JP2024071555A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying presentation images. [Solution] When a special symbol is started to win, a sub-control board 940 causes a decorative symbol display device 479 to display a gaming machine image 1701, which is an image corresponding to the pachinko machine, and a player image 1702, which is an image corresponding to the player positioned in front of the pachinko machine indicated by the gaming machine image 1701, and also displays the contents of other variable displays that can be displayed when a special symbol is started to win in an area of the gaming machine image 1701 that corresponds to the display screen of the display device provided with the pachinko machine indicated by the gaming machine image 1701. [Selected Figure] Fig. 26

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pinball gaming machines.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the gaming area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-31031 A

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can optimally display presentation images.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A lottery means for conducting a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is established;
a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine having a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result,
The display control means is configured to control the display unit to display the specified variable display and the result display when the specified start condition is satisfied, and when the specified start condition is satisfied, the display control means is configured to control the display unit to display a variable display image including at least a part of the variable display that is displayed when the specified start condition is satisfied or a result display image indicating the lottery result, a gaming machine corresponding image corresponding to the gaming machine on which the player is playing, and a player operation image that uses the gaming machine corresponding image to display the method of operation by the player on the gaming machine in a situation where the variable display image or the result display image is displayed on the display unit.

The present invention provides a gaming machine that can optimally display presentation images.

FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine; A perspective view showing a pachinko machine in an open state. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing the pachinko machine in yet another open state. Front view of a pachinko machine A front view of a pachinko machine with the front block removed Front view of the game board A perspective view of the rear side of a pachinko machine Rear view of a pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A flowchart showing an example of a main control process Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing 13A is a front view showing a part of the pattern sheet, and FIG. 13B is a cross-sectional view of the pattern sheet taken along line A-A in FIG. 13A. 1A to 1C are front views of a decorative pattern display device according to a second embodiment, and FIG. 1D is a front view showing a portion of a pattern sheet corresponding to each pattern row. FIG. 13 is a front view of a decorative pattern display device according to a modified example of the second embodiment; FIG. 13A is a schematic side view for explaining the configuration of a reel device, and FIGS. 13B to 13C are front views of a decorative pattern display device according to a third embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board according to the fourth embodiment; 18A is a front view of the luminous decorative body, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view of the luminous decorative body taken along line B-B in FIG. 18A. FIG. 13 is a screen diagram showing an example of a performance image displayed on the decorative pattern display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram for explaining the configuration and operation of a pressing operation device provided in a pachinko machine according to a sixth embodiment; Schematic diagrams showing an example of the appearance of a pressing operation device according to an operation position. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operating position of the pressing operation device and the reaction force to the pressing operation when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device. FIG. 13 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a seventh embodiment; FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram for explaining a pressing operation device provided in a pachinko machine according to a seventh embodiment; FIG. 1A is a screen transition diagram showing an example of a screen transition in a variable display displayed on a decorative pattern display device when a special pattern is started and won; FIG. 1B is a screen transition diagram showing an example of a screen transition in a variable display displayed on a decorative pattern display device when a push operation is performed on a push operation device during a non-play state. FIG. 17 is a screen diagram showing an example of a variable display and a fixed display displayed on a decorative symbol display device in a pachinko machine according to a tenth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a screen diagram showing an example of display contents displayed on the decorative pattern display device during an operable period in a variable display configured to be operable in a pachinko machine according to an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 12 is a screen diagram showing an example of display contents displayed on the decorative pattern display device during an operable period in a variable display configured to be operable in a pachinko machine according to a twelfth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining amount of an operable period in a variable display configured to allow operation input and the state of a pressing operation device; FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining time of the variable display and the state of the pressing operation device. A time chart for explaining an example of the progress of a variable display when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device during the variable display. A time chart for explaining an example of the progress of a variable display when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device during the variable display. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a control in which the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device is set to a plurality of different height positions from the initial position as a trigger for a performance executed in a variable display. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a control in which the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device is set to a plurality of different height positions from the initial position as a trigger for a performance executed in a variable display. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of types of control when the operation surface of the pressing operation device is pressed down and then returned to its original position as a performance executed in the variable display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism.

As an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 will be described as an example of a pinball gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, and then modified examples and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, the structural configuration, electrical configuration, and various control processes of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in order.

<Structural composition>
First, the configuration of the structural part of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference mainly to Fig. 1 to Fig. 9. Fig. 1 to Fig. 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, Fig. 1 shows the closed state of the pachinko machine 100, Fig. 2 shows the state in which the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 are integrally opened relative to the outer frame 101, Fig. 3 shows the state in which the front block 102 is opened relative to the intermediate block 103, and Fig. 4 shows the state in which the rear block 104 is opened relative to the intermediate block 103. Fig. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and Fig. 6 shows the state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state shown in Fig. 5. Note that various wiring is omitted in each drawing, and part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in Figs. 3 and 6.

As shown in Figures 1 to 4, the pachinko machine 100 comprises an outer frame 101, a front block 102, a middle block 103, and a rear block 104, and each of these parts is configured to be displaceable relative to one another by a specified operation.

The outer frame 101 functions as a main body support means for supporting the main body of the pachinko machine 100. The outer frame 101 is, for example, as shown in Fig. 2, a substantially quadrilateral frame body assembled with a top plate 111, a bottom plate 112, a left plate 113, and a right plate 114, and is fitted into a game machine installation facility (island facility) provided in the game center where the pachinko machine 100 is installed, and is firmly fixed by a fixing device (not shown). Note that the outer frame 101 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 100, and a support mechanism that supports the main body part corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101 and a part of a locking mechanism that locks the main body part may be provided on the island facility.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121, 122 are provided on one side in the left-right direction of the outer frame 101 (the side of the left side plate portion 113). The intermediate block support mechanisms 121, 122 connect (couple) the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103, and the main body of the pachinko machine 100 is configured to be rotatable forward with one end side (left side) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 100 as the rotation base end and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip end.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121, 122 are provided at a distance from each other at the upper and lower ends of the outer frame 101, as shown in FIG. 1. Each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121, 122 is configured to be rotatable, for example, by supporting an axle provided in the intermediate block 103 from below by an axle support provided in the outer frame 101, and inserting the axle into an axle hole provided in the axle support. Note that the configuration for allowing the main body of the pachinko machine 100, including the intermediate block 103, to rotate is not limited to the above configuration, and other configurations may be used, such as providing an axle hole on the intermediate block 103 side and forming an axle on the outer frame 101 side.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121, 122 are provided with a function for releasing the connection between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a specified removal operation, and the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is removably attached to the outer frame 101. For example, the connection of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a specified removal operation in which the intermediate block 103 is opened a certain amount or more from the outer frame 101 and moved upward a certain amount. This makes the main body of the pachinko machine 100 removable from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged in front of the intermediate block 103 so as to overlap it, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by the front block support mechanisms 131, 132 provided on the left side when viewed from the front. The front block support mechanisms 131, 132 are configured similarly to the intermediate block support mechanisms 121, 122, support the front block 102 so that it can rotate forward relative to the intermediate block 103, and are configured to be removable by a specified removal operation.

The rear block 104 is arranged to overlap the intermediate block 103, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are connected by rear block support mechanisms 136, 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side when viewed from the front. The rear block support mechanisms 136, 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121, 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131, 132, and are configured to support the rear block 104 so that it can rotate rearward relative to the intermediate block 103, and to support it so that it can be removed by a specified removal operation.

The pachinko machine 100 is also provided with an intermediate block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 relative to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the front block 102 relative to the intermediate block 103, and a lock operation mechanism that is operated to lock and unlock the intermediate block locking mechanism and the front block locking mechanism. As shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is also provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through an opening in the front block 102.

When a right rotation operation is performed using an operating key (not shown) as a predetermined operation for the key cylinder 141, the movable part 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is actuated. This disengages the movable part 143 from the engaged part 142 provided in the outer frame 101 as part of the intermediate block locking mechanism, and the intermediate block 103 enters a state in which it is permitted to open and close relative to the outer frame 101.

Meanwhile, in response to a left rotation operation using a specific operating key on the key cylinder 141, the movable part 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is actuated. This disengages the movable part 144 from the engaged part 145 provided in the front block 102 as part of the front block locking mechanism, and the front block 102 enters a state in which opening and closing is permitted relative to the intermediate block 103.

The pachinko machine 100 is also provided with a rear block opening/closing restriction mechanism that restricts the opening and closing of the rear block 104 relative to the intermediate block 103. This rear block opening/closing restriction mechanism allows the rear block 104 to be switched between a state in which opening and closing is prohibited (opening/closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening and closing is permitted (opening/closing permitted state) relative to the intermediate block 103 by a specified operation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening/closing restriction mechanism is composed of two opening/closing restriction parts 150A, 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening/closing restriction part 150C provided in the rear block 104. These three opening/closing restriction parts 150A-150C are provided with rotating pieces 151A-151C that can be rotated. The rotating pieces 151A-151C change the engagement state with the opening parts that are arranged to overlap front and rear when the rear block 104 is closed by rotating them, and this allows switching between an opening/closing prohibited position corresponding to the opening/closing prohibited state and an opening/closing permitted position corresponding to the opening/closing permitted state. When all the rotating pieces 151A-151C are in the opening/closing permitted position, each of the rotating pieces 151A-151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is in an opening/closing permitted state relative to the intermediate block 103. In addition, the opening/closing prohibited posture and the opening/closing permitted posture only need to be switched between the opening/closing prohibited state and the opening/closing permitted state by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and may be configured to only rotate in a fixed position, may move in a fixed direction, or may operate by a combination of movement and rotation. The same applies below to posture changes when components in each device transition between multiple postures.

Of the three rotating pieces 151A-151C, two rotating pieces 151A, 151B, which correspond to a part of them, are exposed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 100 through an opening formed in the rear block 104 when the rear block 104 is in the opening/closing prohibited state, as shown in FIG. 2, and the remaining rotating piece 151C is exposed on the front side of the intermediate block 103, as shown in FIG. 6. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all of the rotating pieces 151A-151C to the opening/closing permitted position by operating only from one side, such as the rear side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, which enhances crime prevention.

The pachinko machine 100 is also provided with a game ball movement restriction mechanism that restricts the movement of game balls from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in Figures 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement restriction mechanism is configured by a combination of a flow-down restriction piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a restriction change section 162 provided in the front block 102, and the flow-down restriction piece 161 is configured to be biased by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In a state where the front block 102 is closed relative to the intermediate block 103 (closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down restricting piece 161 is in a movement-permitting state that permits game balls to flow down, and specifically, is pressed and pushed toward the rear side of the intermediate block 103 by the restriction change unit 162. The flow-down restricting piece 161 is positioned shifted rearward with respect to a guide passage (not shown) that guides game balls from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement-permitting state. As a result, in the closed state of the front block 102, movement of game balls from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is permitted.

On the other hand, when the front block 102 is open relative to the intermediate block 103 (open state of the front block 102), the pressure on the flow-down restriction piece 161 by the restriction change unit 162 is released, and the flow-down restriction piece 161 is placed in a movement-prohibited state in which it protrudes toward the front block 102 side compared to when the front block 102 is closed. In the movement-prohibited state, the flow-down restriction piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage and prevents game balls from flowing downstream. This prohibits game balls from moving from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with an open/close detection switch 108 that detects whether the intermediate block 103 is closed relative to the outer frame 101, for example at the rear side of the intermediate block 103, at the lower end on the tip of the rotation (left side when viewed from the rear), and as shown in FIG. 3, an open/close detection switch 109 that detects whether the front block 102 is closed relative to the intermediate block 103, for example at the front side of the intermediate block 103, at the lower end on the tip of the rotation (right side when viewed from the front).

Next, the configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be explained in order.

As shown in Figs. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member having a thickness in the front-rear direction that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100, and functions as a front decoration means that decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is composed of multiple functional parts attached to the front and rear of the base frame 201. The front decoration body 210 that forms the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 is attached to the front side of the base frame 201 in a state in which it surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A that is formed including the central portion of the front block 102 when viewed from the front. When the base frame 201 and the front decoration body 210 that constitute the front block 102 are combined, the opening 210A is formed in the front-rear direction over a wide range except for the outer periphery where the front decoration body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located behind the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

As shown in Figures 1 and 3, the front block 102 is also provided with a central panel 220 provided on the rear side of the base frame 201 so as to cover the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls, and a launch operation device 250 operated by the player to launch the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

As shown in Figs. 1 and 5, the front block 102 is formed with an opening periphery 211 surrounding the periphery of the opening 210A as part of the front decorative body 210, an upper protrusion 217 protruding forward below the opening 210A, a lower protrusion 218 located below the upper protrusion 217 and protruding forward, and a flat portion 219 located to the right of the lower protrusion 218 and further back than the upper protrusion 217 and the lower protrusion 218, which is composed of a generally flat area and in which the firing operation device 250 is located. The main storage mechanism 230 is located in the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is located in the lower protrusion 218.

The central panel 220 functions as a cover that allows the rear side to be seen while blocking the opening 210A formed through in the front-rear direction when the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 are combined. As shown in Figures 1 and 3, the central panel 220 includes a panel frame 221 (see Figure 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201, a light-transmitting front plate 222 (see Figure 1) fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221, and a light-transmitting rear plate 223 (see Figure 3) fitted to the rear side of the panel frame 221 approximately parallel to the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap therebetween.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls acquired as the game progresses and game balls loaned from the game center. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes a storage section 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 that operates the ball removal mechanism. The storage section 231 is provided with an inlet 231A that allows game balls to flow from the inside of the pachinko machine 100 into the storage section 231, an outlet (not shown) that allows game balls to flow from the storage section 231 into the inside of the pachinko machine 100, and a discharge port (not shown) formed upstream of the outlet port. By opening this discharge port, the game balls are discharged from the storage section 231 to the player side without being taken into the inside of the pachinko machine 100. The ball removal mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game balls between the outlet port and the discharge port.

Game balls acquired as the game progresses and game balls loaned in response to a loan operation on the loan operation device 292 (described later) flow into the storage section 231 mainly through the inlet 231A. The storage section 231 also has an opening formed on the upper side, and game balls owned by players are manually inserted through this opening, and game balls loaned out at the game center are supplied through it.

The game balls that flow into the storage section 231 are aligned in a row and guided sequentially to the side where the outlet and release port are formed (the upper right side of Figure 1). When no ball removal operation (e.g., a push operation) is performed on the ball removal operation member 232, the game balls are guided through the outlet to the launching device 330 (see Figure 3), which will be described later. On the other hand, when a ball removal operation is performed on the ball removal operation member 232, the game balls are guided through the release port to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see Figure 1).

As shown in Figs. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 comprises a storage section 241 having game ball inlets 241A, 241C (see Fig. 5) and a discharge port 241B (see Fig. 1), a ball removal mechanism 243 that opens and closes the discharge port 241B, and a ball removal operation member 242 that operates the ball removal mechanism 243. Game balls etc. acquired as the game progresses mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage section 231 is full, they flow into the storage section 241 through the inlet 241A. Also, in response to the ball removal operation on the ball removal operation member 232, game balls flow from the storage section 231 into the storage section 241 through the inlet 241C.

The bottom surface of the storage section 241 slopes downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (e.g., a pressing operation) on the ball removal operation member 242, all game balls stored in the storage section 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. When the discharge port 241B is completely opened by a ball removal operation on the ball removal operation member 242, it remains in the open state until a return operation (e.g., a pressing operation again) is performed on the ball removal operation member 242. At the back of the inlet 241A, a ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) is provided to detect whether or not an excessive number of game balls are stored in the storage section 241.

1 and 5, the launch operation device 250 includes a base 251 protruding forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, a freely rotatable launch handle 252 provided around the base 251, a variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects the player's contact with the launch handle 252, and a launch stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that disables the launch of game balls associated with the rotation of the launch handle 252 by the player's operation. When the player rotates the launch handle 252, the game balls are launched from the launch device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation. In addition, if the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the launch handle 252 and the player, or if the launch operation is disabled by operating the launch stop switch 255, the game ball will not be released from the launch device 330 even if the launch handle 252 is rotated.

Furthermore, frame light emitting devices 271-275 (see FIG. 10) are provided at the rear of the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271-275 are arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral portion 211 has as light emitting parts an upper central edge 211A, an upper left edge 211B and an upper right edge 211C located on both the left and right sides of the upper central edge 211A, a left edge 211D located below the upper left edge 211B, and a right edge 211E located below the upper right edge 211C, and the frame light emitting devices 271-275 are installed corresponding to each light emitting part.

The frame light-emitting devices 271-275 are composed of an upper center frame light-emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper center edge 211A, an upper left frame light-emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left edge 211B, an upper right frame light-emitting device 273 corresponding to the upper right edge 211C, a left side frame light-emitting device 274 corresponding to the left side edge 211D, and a right side frame light-emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right side edge 211E. Each of the frame light-emitting devices 271-275 has one or more light-emitting diodes (LEDs) as light-emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and a printed circuit board that integrates and electrically connects these electronic components.

As shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G, for example, at the top of its opening periphery 211, and an upper left acoustic device 281 and an upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIG. 3 and FIG. 10) are provided corresponding to the upper left acoustic output port 211F and the upper right acoustic output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located at the back (rear) of the opening periphery 211 of the front decorative body 210.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290, for example, on the upper right part of the upper protrusion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a number display device 291 that displays a numerical value corresponding to the remaining amount of bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (not shown) arranged next to the pachinko machine 100, a lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving a loan of game balls, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit. When a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in an effective state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit and a numerical value corresponding to the amount of the bills, cards, etc. is displayed on the number display device 291, a predetermined number of game balls are lent from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104 in accordance with the lending operation, and the display of the number display device 291 is updated as the game balls are lent. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in a valid state, the card unit returns the equivalent of the bills corresponding to the remaining amount or a card recording the remaining amount in accordance with the return operation.

1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 that allows the player to perform input operations other than the firing operation. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a push operation device 261 that allows a push operation, a rotation operation device 262 that allows a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 that allows directional operations up, down, left, and right. These operation devices 261-2
63, a performance selection operation for selecting a performance to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light intensity of each device that executes the performance of the pachinko machine 100, or a performance setting operation for inputting information about the player to execute a performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game, etc. can be executed, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game facility as necessary. Note that it is preferable that the input operation part (e.g., the circular rotating operation part in the rotating operation device 262) that the player touches in the input operation device 260 is configured so that the operation such as rotation, up and down movement, or vibration can be executed by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (e.g., the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)) by the input operation part driving means such as a motor or a solenoid, and the performance involving the input operation can be diversified, such as actively encouraging the input operation by operating the input part at one or more timings before and after the input operation, or during the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a roughly rectangular member of roughly the same size as the front block 102, and has the function of integrating the main body of the pachinko machine 100 by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104. The intermediate block 103 is constructed by attaching multiple functional parts, including the game board 400, to the base frame 301.

As shown in Figures 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 with an opening, a game board 400 (see Figure 3) that is attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, a game board support mechanism that supports the game board 400 rotatably and detachably relative to the base frame 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 relative to the base frame 301, a launcher 330 (see Figure 3) that shoots game balls at the game board 400, a main control device 370 (see Figure 4) that is attached to the back side of the game board 400 and controls the overall game progress, and a sub-control device 390 (see Figure 4) that controls game presentation and status notification based on commands from the main control device 370.

3, the base frame 301 is provided with a guide passage section 301A in which a guide passage is formed inside for guiding game balls released from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) to the front block 102, and an opening 301B in which multiple wirings (not shown) and a signal relay device 311 are located. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and the multiple wirings inserted into the opening 301B include wirings for electrically connecting various devices (e.g., the frame light-emitting devices 271-275, the upper left sound device 281, and the upper right sound device 282) provided in the front block 102 to devices (e.g., the main control device 370 and the sub-control device 390) provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104, and the signal relay device 311 functions as a relay board that relays some of the wirings.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 is provided with a flat base 401 having through holes such as an outlet 401A through which game balls can pass back and forth, an outer rail 402 smoothly curving from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401, an inner rail 403 smoothly curving from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401, a return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the tip of the upper left side of the inner rail 403, and a recoil prevention member 405 attached to the tip of the upper right side of the outer rail 402. The outer rail 402 guides game balls launched from the launching device 330 described later into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents game balls once released into the game area from returning to the launching passage 401B formed between the parallel opposing portions of the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403. The anti-rebound member 405 has shock absorbing properties that prevent the game ball from rebounding significantly, such as when the game ball passes over the top center of the game board 400 toward the right side and then returns to the left side via the top center again, and is made of a material such as vibration-damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower part of the rear side of the front block 102. A guide member 33 guides the game ball from the launch device 330 in the direction of the launch passage 401B.
There is a gap between the launching device 330 and the outer rail 402, and a game ball that is launched from the launching device 330 but does not pass the return ball prevention mechanism 404 and returns back up the launching passage 401B is returned to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see Figure 5) through the inlet 241A (see Figure 5) via the return ball passage section 163 located below this gap.

When a game ball passes the return ball prevention mechanism 404, it reaches the game area and moves (flows down) within the game area while falling under its own weight. The game area is partitioned into a shape with an approximately circular outer periphery, with most of the area having a front-to-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The outer periphery of the game area is generally partitioned by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is partitioned in an approximately flat shape by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is partitioned in an approximately flat shape by the base 401 of the game board 400. The various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

3, the launch device 330 includes a ball feed mechanism 331 that sequentially sends out the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the launch position, a ball feed solenoid 332 (see FIG. 10) that drives the ball feed mechanism 331, a launch mechanism 333 that ejects the game balls placed at the launch position, a launch solenoid 334 (see FIG. 10) that drives the launch mechanism 333, and a guide member 335 that guides the game balls launched from the launch mechanism 333 to the launch passage 401B of the game board 400. The launch device 330 operates in response to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250 as described above, and the drive control of the launch solenoid 334 changes in response to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250 to adjust the launch force.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a two-part board case 371 that houses the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside the translucent board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

The main control device 370 is also rotatably attached to the rear side of the game board 400. Specifically, an attachment section 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the rear side of the base 401 of the game board 400, and the main control device 370 is attached to the attachment section 372. This makes it possible to easily check not only the rear side (front side) of the main control device 370, but also the front side (rear side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the attachment section 372 while the main control device 370 is attached to the game board 400. The main control device 370 may be connected to the attachment section 372 so that it cannot be removed without leaving a trace, and it may be easy to manage the removal status of the main control device 370.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a two-part board case 391 that houses the sub-control board 940. The sub-control board 940 is attached to the rear side of the game board 400, housed inside the translucent board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace, similar to the main control board 920.

Here, various structures arranged in the play area of the game board 400 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates an example of a decorative pattern displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, a flow change member such as a nail 411 or a windmill 412 that changes the flow direction or flow speed of the game ball, a central structure 420 disposed approximately in the center of the base 401, and a start device (specifically, an upper middle start winning device 431A and a lower middle start winning device 431B) related to a first special pattern disposed below the central structure 420.
It also comprises a starting device for a second special pattern arranged on the lower right side of the central structure 420 (specifically, a right starting winning device 432), large winning devices 433, 434 (specifically, a lower large winning device 433 and an upper large winning device 434) arranged below the right starting winning device 432, a starting device 436 for a normal pattern arranged above (upstream) the right starting winning device 432, a role link operating device 435 arranged on the upper right side of the game board 400, above (upstream) the upper and lower large winning devices 433, 434, and general winning devices 439A, 439B arranged on both the left and right sides of the lower middle starting winning device 431B.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with a number of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of game balls corresponding to the above-mentioned upper middle start winning device 431A, etc. (see FIG. 10), and it is possible to detect the entry of game balls into a predetermined area corresponding to each switch. For example, a middle start winning switch (upper middle start winning switch 441A) that detects game balls that have entered the upper middle start winning device 431A, a middle start winning switch (lower middle start winning switch 441B) that detects game balls that have entered the lower middle start winning device 431B, a right start winning switch 442 that detects game balls that have entered the right start winning device 432, a lower large winning switch 443 that detects game balls that have entered the lower large winning device 433, an upper large winning switch 444 that detects game balls that have entered the upper large winning device 434, a winning combination operating device 435 that detects game balls that have entered the winning combination operating device 435, and a winning combination operating device 436 that detects game balls that have entered the winning combination operating device 436. The game board 400 is provided with a combination switch 445 that detects game balls that have entered the combination switch 445, a start switch 446 that detects game balls that have entered the starter 436, a non-specific passage switch 447 that detects game balls that have entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the lower large winning device 433, a specific passage switch 448 that detects game balls that have entered a specific passage (not shown) formed inside the lower large winning device 433, and general winning switches 449A and 449B that detect game balls that have entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B, respectively.

In addition, various sensors are provided on the game board 400 to prevent fraud (see FIG. 10), and are capable of detecting abnormalities that occur in the pachinko machine 100. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, etc. are installed on the game board 400.

The entrances of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 form entrances, and the game balls that enter each entrance are released into the game area. The entrances of the winning devices, specifically the upper middle starting winning device 431A, the lower middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower large winning device 433, the upper large winning device 434, and the general winning devices 439A and 439B, form winning ports, and the game balls that enter each winning port are guided to a recovery and discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401 through a through hole formed in the base 401. In addition, the game balls that do not enter each winning device are guided to the recovery and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided at the most downstream part of the game area. The game balls guided to the recovery and discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of winning device is paid out from the payout device 540 (see Figures 8 and 9).

In addition, each winning device may be configured separately from the other winning devices, or a winning device may be configured by a device that integrates two or more winning devices (for example, upper middle start winning device 431A and lower middle start winning device 431B).Furthermore, starting devices such as upper middle start winning device 431A do not necessarily need to be winning ports from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when game balls enter, but may be ball entry ports from which game balls are released again into the game area without being paid out.

The upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle start winning device 431B related to the first special symbol, and the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B each guide the game ball that has entered to the back side of the base 401 without changing the probability of the game ball entering them. The right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering therein. The mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering does not need to be provided only in the start device related to the second special symbol, but may be provided instead of or in addition to the start device related to the first special symbol and/or the general winning devices 439A and 439B. The mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering may be configured by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, or may be configured by a mechanically operated mechanism such as a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball that has entered a predetermined area.

The right start winning device 432 for the second special symbol is equipped with a right entry restriction mechanism 452 that changes the probability of the game ball entering the right entry restriction mechanism 432 by transitioning between the entry permission position and the entry prohibition position, and a right entry restriction solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) that drives the right entry restriction mechanism 452. The right entry restriction mechanism 452 is equipped with two movable pieces driven by the right entry restriction solenoid 462, and when the right entry restriction mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition position, the two movable pieces are arranged to narrow (or close) the entry opening (winning opening), so that the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 432, but when the right entry restriction mechanism 452 is in the entry permission position, the two movable pieces are arranged so that the distance between their tips is expanded, so that the game ball can enter the right start winning device 432. If a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 for a normal symbol is selected by the starting switch 446 and a lottery (hereinafter referred to as the "normal symbol lottery") is won, the right entry restriction mechanism 452 transitions to an entry-permitting position for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined period of time in response to the drive of the right entry restriction solenoid 462.

As shown in Figure 7, the lower large winning device 433 is provided with a lower entry restriction mechanism 453 which restricts the entry of game balls into it by transitioning between an entry permitting position and an entry prohibiting position, a lower entry restriction solenoid 463 (see Figure 10) which changes the position of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453, a distribution mechanism (not shown) which distributes game balls which have entered the lower large winning device 433 to a non-specific passage or a specific passage by transitioning between a non-guiding position and a guiding position, and a switching solenoid 465 (see Figure 10) which changes the position of the distribution mechanism to switch the destination to which the game balls are guided. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 of the lower large winning device 433 is in the entry prohibition position, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 closes the entry port (winning port) and the game ball cannot enter the lower large winning device 433, but when the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 is in the entry permission position, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 opens the entry port and the game ball can enter the lower large winning device 433. In addition, a game ball that enters the lower large winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific path when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guiding position protruding forward, and is guided to a specific path when the distribution mechanism is in a guiding position retracting backward. The specific path, non-specific path, and distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the game state, and when a game ball enters a specific path, a favorable game state is given to the player as a privilege.

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper large winning device 434 is provided with an upper entry restriction mechanism 454 that restricts the entry of game balls into the device by transitioning between an entry permitting position and an entry forbidden position, and an upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the position of the upper entry restriction mechanism 454. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is in the entry prohibiting position, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 closes the entry port (entry port) and prevents game balls from entering the upper large winning device 434, but when the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is in the entry permitting position, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 opens the entry port and allows game balls to enter the upper large winning device 434.

The entry permitting posture and the entry forbidding posture as a mechanism for changing the probability of game balls entering the right entry restricting mechanism 452 and the like may correspond to the posture change of the operating member that constitutes each mechanism and switches between a special state in which game balls can enter the winning port (or ball entry port) of each device and a normal state in which game balls cannot enter, and at least one of the position and the orientation of the operating member may differ depending on each posture. Also, as a mechanism for changing the probability of game balls entering the right entry restricting mechanism 452 and the like, it is not necessarily necessary to make the state in which game balls cannot enter the normal state, and it may be configured so that entry of game balls is permitted even in the normal state, and the posture of the operating member changes to a state in which game balls can enter more easily in the special state than in the normal state.

When a lottery for a jackpot is won, a game ball can enter the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434. Specifically, when a game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle start winning device 431B related to the first special pattern wins a lottery based on detection by the upper middle start winning switch 441A or the lower middle start winning switch 441B (hereinafter also referred to as the "first special pattern lottery"), or when a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special pattern wins a lottery based on detection by the right start winning switch 442 (hereinafter also referred to as the "second special pattern lottery"), at least one of the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 or the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is activated. This operation causes at least one of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 to assume an entry permitting position for a predetermined period of time over a predetermined number of times. In addition, the distribution mechanism transitions to the guiding position in response to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 a predetermined time after the transition of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 to the entry permitting position, and then returns to the non-guiding position in response to the stop of the switching solenoid 465 a predetermined time after the transition to the guiding position.

The combination operation device 435 is a device for setting the conditions necessary for the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 to start operating. After winning the lottery for a jackpot, either the lower large winning device 433 or the upper large winning device 434 will start operating, provided that the game ball passes through the combination operation device 435. Therefore, if the player wins a jackpot, he or she can start the special game state at the timing of his or her choice. Note that it is not necessary to configure either the lower large winning device 433 or the upper large winning device 434 to start operating, provided that the game ball passes through the combination operation device 435. Alternatively or in addition to this, either the lower large winning device 433 or the upper large winning device 434 may start operating after a predetermined time has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is provided with a display having multiple light-emitting elements in which display devices 471-473 that display the changing patterns and lottery results, and display devices 476-478 that display the number of reserved plays, are integrated, in the lower left portion, which corresponds to a part of the game board 400. The multiple light-emitting elements are pre-divided into light-emitting areas corresponding to each device, and the status of each device is displayed by the light-emitting state.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a special symbol display device 471 for a first special symbol that variably displays the first special symbol in response to a first special symbol lottery and displays the first special symbol as a stop symbol according to the lottery result, a special symbol display device 472 for a second special symbol that variably displays the second special symbol in response to a second special symbol lottery and displays the second special symbol as a stop symbol according to the lottery result, a special symbol reserved display device 476 that displays the number of reserved unit games related to the first special symbol, and a special symbol reserved display device 477 that displays the number of reserved unit games related to the second special symbol. The right to play a unit game related to the first special symbol and the right to play a unit game related to the second special symbol are each reserved up to four times. Here, a unit game is one game that is executed based on one initial winning, and refers to a series of games that includes the winning or losing lottery determination executed based on one initial winning, and the start to end of the variable display until the lottery result based on that winning or losing determination is displayed.

When the right to play a unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, no additional right to play a unit game related to the first special symbol is added even if a game ball that has entered the start winning device 431 is detected by the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle start winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). Similarly, when the right to play a unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, no additional right to play a unit game related to the second special symbol is added even if a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 is detected by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10).

The special pattern display device 471 for the first special pattern and the special pattern display device 472 for the second special pattern each consist of multiple light-emitting elements and are controlled by the main control board 920 (see Figure 10). The display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern each are expressed by the light-emitting patterns of the multiple light-emitting elements (combinations of light-emitting states (off, on, blinking) including light-emitting colors). The special pattern reserved display device 476 for the first special pattern and the special pattern reserved display device 477 for the second special pattern each display the number of reserved numbers by combining the light-emitting states (off, on, blinking) of two single-color light-emitting elements.

The game board 400 is also provided with a normal symbol display device 473 that changes the display of normal symbols in response to the normal symbol lottery and displays the normal symbols as stop symbols according to the lottery results, and a normal symbol reservation display device 478 that displays the number of times the right to play a unit game related to a normal symbol has been reserved. The right to play a unit game related to a normal symbol can be reserved up to a maximum of four times. When the right to play a unit game related to a normal symbol has been reserved up to the maximum number of times, no additional right to play a unit game related to a normal symbol is added even if a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the starting switch 446.

The normal symbol display device 473 is composed of multiple light-emitting elements and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see Figure 10). The normal symbol is expressed by the light-emitting pattern of the multiple light-emitting elements. In addition, the normal symbol pending display device 478 displays the number of pending numbers by combining the light-emitting states (off, on, blinking) of the two single-color light-emitting elements.

The game board 400 is also provided with a decorative pattern display device 479 that overlaps the rear of the central structure 420 and displays decorative patterns in a variable manner or a fixed manner in a unit game related to the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

The decorative pattern display device 479 has three pattern display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C aligned in the left-right direction. All of the pattern display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C are areas for displaying decorative patterns in a variable or fixed manner. Of the pattern display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C, the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area 479A located on the far left constitutes the left pattern row, and the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area 479B located on the far right constitutes the right pattern row. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area 479C located between the pattern display area 479A and the pattern display area 479B constitutes the middle pattern row.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 479 is configured as a reel device equipped with three cylindrical reels (rotating bodies) arranged in the left-right direction. Each reel of the reel device is configured to be independently rotatable by a motor (not shown) controlled by the sub-control board 940.

Each cylindrical reel that constitutes the reel device has a cylindrical main body (hereinafter also referred to as the "reel main body") made of light-transmitting resin (e.g., transparent resin), and a strip-shaped pattern sheet 601 (see FIG. 13) that is affixed along the circumferential direction of the outer periphery of the reel main body. On the pattern sheet 601, a number of decorative patterns are arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction in a predetermined order.

The decorative symbol display device 479 can move (scroll) the multiple decorative symbols provided on the symbol sheet 601 from top to bottom or the opposite direction in each symbol display area 479A, 479B, 479C by rotating each reel. This realizes a variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display device 479. Note that the decorative symbol display device 479 does not necessarily have to be composed of multiple reels, and may be composed of other devices such as a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying images.

The display of decorative patterns by the decorative pattern display device 479 is controlled by the sub-control board 940, and is synchronized with the display of decorative patterns by the main control board 920. The display of decorative patterns is more complex and diverse than the display of decorative patterns. The display of decorative patterns does not necessarily have to start changing at exactly the same timing, or to stop changing as a fixed display, but may start changing at approximately the same timing with a slight time difference between them, and may be set to display fixed at approximately the same timing.

The game board 400 also has a board surface light-emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light-emitting device 490 performs various light-emitting effects and status notifications through light emission as the game progresses based on the control of the sub-control board 940.

Here, we will explain the various game states and the transitions between game states. The normal game state (hereinafter also abbreviated as "normal game state") corresponds to a state in which the variable display time of the first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol is long (hereinafter also referred to as "non-time-saving state").

If a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game state to which the player transitions after the special game state differs depending on whether the game ball enters a specific passage (the internal passage of the lower large winning device 433) during the special game state to which the player transitions based on the winning. If the game ball does not enter a specific passage during the special game state, the game state transitions to a state (hereinafter also referred to as the "time-saving game state") in which the variable display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state (hereinafter also referred to as the "time-saving state") and the probability of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the normal game state (hereinafter also referred to as the "low probability state"). On the other hand, if the game ball enters a specific passage during the special game state, the game state transitions to a time-saving state (hereinafter also referred to as a "probability game state") in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than in the normal game state (hereinafter also referred to as a "high probability state").

The time-saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit plays related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 plays), after which the game returns to the normal game state. The probability-variable game state is maintained until the total number of unit plays related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 100 plays), after which the game returns to the normal game state.

The game states and the transitions between game states do not necessarily have to be configured as described above. For example, the high probability state may continue until the next big win is won, at least one of the game states may be configured with other content, a game state other than the game states described above may be included, or transitions between game states may occur under conditions other than those described above.

Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. In the main control board 920, winning random numbers, big win pattern random numbers, stop pattern random numbers, and various change pattern random numbers related to the special symbols (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and when a game ball that enters one of the start winning devices 431A, 431B related to the first special symbol in various game states is detected by one of the middle start winning switches 441A, 441B (see FIG. 10), the first special symbol is started. When the first special symbol is started and the right to play the unit game related to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, the winning random numbers, big win pattern random numbers, and stop pattern random numbers related to the special symbols are obtained and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game based on the random number obtained based on the start winning of the first special symbol will start immediately after the random number is stored if the special game state is not in progress, the unit game related to the first or second special symbol is not in progress, and the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not reserved. Also, even if the special game state is not in progress, if the unit game related to the first or second special symbol is in progress or the right to the unit game related to the first or second special symbol is reserved, the unit game based on this start winning will start after the unit games related to all special symbols (first and second special symbols) that were reserved before this winning have ended. If each random number is obtained based on the start winning of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game based on that random number will start after the unit games related to all special symbols that were reserved before this starting winning after the special game state.

In addition, the unit game based on the random number obtained based on the start winning of the first special symbol will start after all unit games related to the second special symbol have ended. In other words, if random numbers are obtained based on the start winning of the second special symbol after the current start winning, the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol will be executed with priority. Note that it is not necessary to configure the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol to be executed with priority over the unit game related to the first special symbol, and it may be configured such that unit game priority control related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of the start winning, or the two special symbols may be configured to be variable simultaneously rather than being alternative.

If a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery based on the initial winning of the first special pattern, the type of stop pattern (jackpot pattern) corresponding to the jackpot win in the first special pattern lottery is further determined based on the acquired jackpot pattern random number. The type of stop pattern corresponds to the type of jackpot, and multiple types of jackpots are set corresponding to the types of game states, such as the number of rounds (e.g., 6 rounds and 16 rounds) that correspond to the number of times that the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 takes the entry-permitting position, and the game state to which the special game state is transitioned (whether or not to transition to a probability-change game state), and a jackpot pattern is set for each type. If a jackpot is not won in the first special pattern lottery, a losing pattern other than the jackpot pattern is set as the stop pattern.

After the first special symbol is drawn, the display time for the first special symbol is determined and the decorative symbol variation pattern is selected based on the current game state, the result of the drawing, the value of the stop pattern random number, the values of the various variation pattern random numbers, and the number of reserved unit play rights related to the first special symbol. The decorative symbol variation patterns are broadly divided into variation patterns in which a reach display is made before the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) related to the first special symbol is displayed, and variation patterns in which a reach display is not made before the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is displayed when the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a losing symbol.

In addition, the "reach display" is a display that indicates to the player that after the varying display of decorative patterns has begun in a unit game related to special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern), the combination of decorative patterns that has been confirmed and displayed in each pattern row except for one pattern row (e.g., each of the left and right pattern rows) meets the conditions for becoming a jackpot pattern, and that there is a possibility that the decorative patterns of the remaining pattern rows (e.g., the middle pattern row) that continue to be displayed varyingly thereafter may become a jackpot pattern depending on the display result (i.e., the stopping pattern) when they are confirmed and displayed.

Reach displays include normal reaches, which are reach displays with a relatively short variable display time (e.g., approximately 25 to approximately 30 seconds), and super reaches, which are reach displays with a longer variable display time (e.g., approximately 60 to approximately 180 seconds). Note that the types of reach displays are not limited to two, normal reaches and super reaches, but may be three or more types, including special reaches, which are reach displays with a longer variable display time than super reaches.

After the variable display time of the first special pattern is determined and the variable display pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display time is selected, the variable display of the first special pattern on the special pattern display device 471 for the first special pattern and the variable display (variable performance) of the decorative pattern on the decorative pattern display device 479 are started, and for the first special pattern, the variable display continues according to a fixed pattern over the variable display time, and for the decorative pattern, the variable display continues according to the variable pattern over the variable display time. Thereafter, as the variable display time passes, the stopping pattern for the first special pattern is fixedly displayed, and also, a pattern corresponding to the stopping pattern of the first special pattern is fixedly displayed as the decorative pattern. The fixed display of the first special pattern and the decorative pattern continues for at least a predetermined fixed time.

When the stopped pattern related to the first special pattern is a jackpot pattern, the game state transitions to a special game state after the first special pattern is confirmed and displayed. In the special game state, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 of the lower large winning device 433 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 of the upper large winning device 434 are in the entry permission position a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. When a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 8 balls) are detected by the large winning switches 443, 444 during each entry permission position of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454, or when a predetermined maximum entry permission time (e.g., 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 transitions to an entry prohibition position. After that, after the predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed, either the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 returns to the entry permission position again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

The lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 are configured so that only one of them takes the entry permitting position during the special game state, and one of them transitions to the initial entry permitting position after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period). The special game state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed since the final return to the entry prohibition position, and after a further predetermined waiting time has elapsed thereafter (after the ending period). After the special game state ends, as described above, the game transitions to a time-saving game state or a probability variable game state.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 for the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442, the second special symbol is started. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control for the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right to play the unit game for the second special symbol has not been reserved up to the maximum number of times at the time of the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number for the special symbol is obtained, and the unit game based on this start winning is executed. In addition, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the determination of the variable display time of the second special symbol, the selection of the variable pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display time, the execution of the variable display, and the transition control of the game state are also executed in the same manner as the control for the first special symbol.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the starting switch 446, if the right to play a unit game related to a normal symbol has not been reserved up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game related to a normal symbol is not in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game related to a normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right to play a unit game related to the normal symbol that has already been acquired has ended.

In a unit game related to a normal pattern, whether or not a win has been won is determined based on the value of the winning random number, and if a win has been won, a predetermined winning pattern is set as the stopping pattern. On the other hand, if a win is not achieved in the normal pattern lottery, a predetermined losing pattern is set as the stopping pattern. After the normal pattern lottery, the normal pattern display device 473 starts displaying the normal pattern variations, and in the non-time-saving state, the variation display continues in a fixed pattern for a fixed variation display time, and in the time-saving state, the variation display continues in a fixed pattern for a fixed variation display time that is shorter than the non-time-saving state. As a fixed time according to the game state passes, the stopping pattern related to the normal pattern is displayed as a fixed pattern for a fixed time.

When the stopped pattern related to the normal pattern is a winning pattern, the right entry restriction mechanism 452 of the right start winning device 432 transitions to the entry permission position at least once after the confirmation display of the normal pattern. Specifically, when a win occurs in a non-time-saving state (normal game state and special game state), the right start winning device 432 transitions to the entry permission position for a predetermined maximum entry permission time (e.g., approximately 0.1 seconds), and when a win occurs in a time-saving state (time-saving game state and probability variable game state), the right start winning device 432 transitions to the entry permission position intermittently (e.g., in three separate instances) for a predetermined maximum entry permission time (e.g., approximately 4.8 seconds) that is longer than in the non-time-saving state. However, if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right entry restriction mechanism 452 will transition to the entry prohibition position without waiting for the maximum entry allowable time to elapse, and even if the number of transitions to the entry allowable position has not reached the predetermined number, the operation of the right start winning device 432 for the unit game related to this normal pattern will end.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, first, a player must win the normal symbol lottery, and then the game ball must enter the right start winning device 432 in the entry permission state of the right start winning device 432 based on the winning. The probability of winning a normal symbol in the normal game state is the same as the probability of winning in the time-saving game state, but since the stay time of the right start winning device 432 in the entry permission state based on the winning of a hit in the normal game state (e.g., about 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely short compared to the stay time in the time-saving state (e.g., about 4.8 seconds), in the normal game state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. Conversely, in a time-saving state such as a time-saving game state or a probability-changing game state, the opportunities per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery are significantly greater than the opportunities per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery.

Therefore, the player plays the game aiming to win a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and then move to the special game state by entering the game ball into a specific passage in the special game state. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the special game state, the player plays the game aiming to win a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery before the end of each game state.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 in the center of the game area where the game balls flow down, and is configured to selectively perform a game method in which the game balls flow down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420 (left-hand game method) and a game method in which the game balls flow down mainly from the right side of the central structure 420 (right-hand game method). In the normal game state, the player plays using the left-hand game method, and in the time-saving game state and the probability-change game state, the player plays using the right-hand game method. In addition, since the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 are located on the right side of the central structure 420, the player plays using the right-hand game method even in the special game state.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. Figures 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view, respectively, of the pachinko machine 100. Note that in Figure 8, the outer frame 101 has been omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is constructed by attaching other members and devices to a base body 501. The base body 501 and the intermediate block 103 are connected by rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, so that the rear block 104 is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the intermediate block 103.

The rear block 104 includes a game ball tank 510 as a ball storage section for storing game balls, a tank rail 520 as a ball alignment section for straightening the game balls (for example, into a single row) continuously downstream of the game ball tank 510 and aligning them in a single row, a case rail 530 as a ball guide section for guiding the game balls that flow in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, a payout device 540 on the downstream side of the case rail 530 for paying out game balls and lending game balls, and a guide passage (not shown) formed in the base 501 for guiding the game balls that flow out of the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540. The machine is equipped with a guide member 550 as a ball guide section, a payout control device 560 that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 540 and the lending of game balls, a power supply and launch control device 570 that functions as a power supply means that converts external power into power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs it, and a launch control means that cooperates with the main control board 920 to control the ejection of game balls based on the launch operation of the launch operation device 250, and a relay device 950 that relays signals between the payout control device 560 and the game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a card unit (not shown) located to the side of the pachinko machine 100.

The base 501 is integrally molded from resin (e.g., ABS resin) and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front portion and a protective cover portion 503 located rearward of the base portion 502. The upper portion of the base portion 502 is formed in a generally frame shape that conforms to the outer shape of the rear block 104, and the lower portion is formed in a generally flat shape having a thickness in the front-to-rear direction, and functions as a mounting portion to which other devices can be attached.

The protective cover section 503 is formed in a generally plate-like shape with a thickness in the front-to-rear direction. Moreover, the protective cover section 503 is not shaped to cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but is sized to form a window for exposing a portion of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that requires frequent inspection and checking, such as a portion of the main control device 370, to the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. The back surface of the protective cover section 503 is formed with a number of ventilation holes 503A that function to improve the dissipation of heat generated by the main control device 370 and the sub-control device 390.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and game balls are successively replenished to one end of the game ball tank 510 from a ball circulation device (not shown) of the island equipment. An opening (not shown) is formed on one end of the game ball tank 510 in the longitudinal direction, which is different from the end to which the game balls are supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game balls supplied to the game ball tank 510 move to the opening side by their own weight. In addition, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is also inclined in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (front-to-back direction) compared to the longitudinal direction, and the game balls are preferentially guided to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). In addition, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap it, and the antistatic plate is connected to a ground potential to remove static electricity from the game balls in the game ball tank 510 and downstream of it.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side of the game ball tank 510 where the opening is formed, and the game balls flow in through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 is equipped with a passage forming member 521 that forms a roughly gutter-shaped passage for the game balls that is wide enough for the game balls to pass through in a single file, and a straightening member 522 that has a top surface portion that gradually decreases in height as the upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521, and gradually straightens the game balls flowing down the passage from a height where they are stacked up and down to a height of one step. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game balls to the opposite side of the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is formed vertically so as to continue to the underside of the tank rail 520, and game balls flow in from the tank rail 520. The case rail 530 continues downwards while curving left and right so that the game balls do not flow with force. In addition, a ball failure detection unit 539 for detecting ball failure is provided in the middle of the ball passage in the case rail 530. A ball retention switch 591 (see FIG. 10) is built into the ball failure detection unit 539, and the ball retention switch 591 detects a ball failure state in which balls are not being properly replenished in the case rail 530 due to ball clogging or the like occurring in the case rail 530 or upstream thereof.

The payout device 540 is equipped with a payout mechanism that pays out game balls, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a drive means for driving the payout mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control of the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are released downstream. The passage of the released game balls through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, which causes the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) to count the number of paid out game balls.

The payout control device 560 and the power supply/launch control device 570 are attached to the lower rear surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to overlap the lower rear surface of the rear block 104, as shown in Figures 8 and 9. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply/launch control device 570 can be continuously used even if the game board 400 is replaced with a different game board due to a model change, etc.

The dispensing control device 560 comprises a dispensing control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the dispensing control board 930, and like the main control board 920, the dispensing control board 930 is housed inside a board case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving any trace of opening.

The power supply and launch control device 570 comprises a power supply and launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the power supply and launch control board 900, and the power supply and launch control board 900 is housed inside the sealed board case, similar to the main control board 920.

As shown in FIG. 9, a rear setting switch 905 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 100. The rear setting switch 905 is a setting enabling device for enabling a setting operation for setting the ball payout rate of the pachinko machine 100 to one of a number of predetermined stages (e.g., six stages, nine stages, etc.).

The setting change of the ball output rate can be enabled (allowed) by inserting a specified key (not shown) into the rear setting switch 905 and rotating it to a specified position (in this embodiment, a position rotated approximately 90° clockwise from the initial position). With the setting change of the ball output rate enabled in this manner, the setting change of the ball output rate can be enabled (allowed) by performing a specified setting operation (in this embodiment, pressing the initialization switch 907).

When the setting change of the ball payout rate is performed effectively, the predetermined game mode is changed according to each set stage. In other words, the setting change of the ball payout rate by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 can be said to be a setting change of the game mode.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, one of nine types of game modes with different combinations of the initial hit probability (in this embodiment, the probability of winning the first special symbol lottery) and the probability of continuing the special game mode (in this embodiment, the probability of transitioning to the special game mode after the special game state when the special game state is transitioned to via the second special symbol lottery in the special game state) can be selected according to each stage set by changing the setting of the ball payout rate (i.e., changing the setting of the game mode). Therefore, when the setting of the ball payout rate (changing the setting of the game mode) is effectively performed, the winning probability of each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is changed so that the initial hit probability and the continuation probability correspond to the set stage (i.e., the probability lottery data corresponding to each winning probability is used), and the ball payout rate is adjusted.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a top type with a significantly low initial hit probability but a significantly high probability of continuous special mode, a middle type with a medium initial hit probability and medium probability of continuous special mode, and a bottom type with a significantly low initial hit probability but a significantly high probability of continuous special mode can be selected. Furthermore, in each of these types, a three-stage probability state (hereinafter also referred to as a probability setting state) in which the initial hit probability of each type is divided into smaller ranges than the range of initial hit probability between each type can be selected, that is, a first-stage probability with the lowest initial hit probability among the three stages, a second-stage probability with the second lowest initial hit probability, and a third-stage probability with the highest initial hit probability can be selected.

In the top type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the upper and lower middle start winning devices 431A, 431B and the right start winning device 432 is less than the other types, but the number of prize balls associated with winning the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 is more than the other types. On the other hand, in the bottom type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the middle start winning device 431A, 431B and the right start winning device 432 is more than the other types, but the number of prize balls associated with winning the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 is less than the other types.

Here, the number of winning balls may be set to the same for the top type, middle type, and bottom type. This makes it impossible for the player to determine whether the setting is the top type, middle type, or bottom type from the number of winning balls, and adds a long-term gameplay element of guessing which type the setting is.

In addition, the profit margin for the player changes depending on the stage of the probability setting state for all three types, namely the top type, middle type, and bottom type, but if the stage of the probability setting state is the same, the profit margin for the player is set to be substantially the same for all types. Therefore, even if the probability setting is changed by changing the type, the profit that the gaming facility will earn per certain period (for example, one day) is easy to predict, making it easier to manage the gaming facility.

The game mode that is changed by changing the setting of the payout rate does not necessarily have to be limited to the combination of the initial hit probability and the probability of entering the special mode as described above, and may be, for example, either the initial hit probability or the probability of entering the special mode. In addition, it may be a lottery probability other than the initial hit probability and the probability of entering the special mode, such as the probability of winning the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery, the probability of selecting a small win in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, the probability of entering the special mode (in this embodiment, the probability of entering the special mode game state via winning the second special pattern lottery), or the probability of the special mode game state that has been entered ending (for example, the probability of selecting the end of the special mode game state in the fall lottery that is performed each time the variable display of the pattern is executed during the special mode game state), and may be a combination of two or more of these game modes.

A setting display device 906 is provided above the rear setting switch 905. When the setting of the payout rate (setting of the game mode) is effectively changed by operating the rear setting switch 905, setting display information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed on the setting display device 906. The setting display information is composed of a combination of an alphabetical character representing the type and a number representing the probability setting state. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the top type, middle type, and bottom type are represented by the alphabetical characters "T", "M", and "B", respectively. In addition, the probability setting state of each type is represented by "1" for the first stage probability, "2" for the second stage probability, and "3" for the third stage probability.

Therefore, for example, in the case of a top type first stage probability game mode, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "T1", in the case of a middle type third stage probability game mode, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "M3", and in the case of a bottom type second stage probability game mode, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "B2".

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Fig. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in Fig. 10, the pachinko machine 100 is equipped with control circuit devices such as a power supply/launch control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub-control board 940. Note that relay circuit devices that only relay various signals are omitted in Fig. 10. Below, these main control circuit devices will be described individually in detail.

The power supply and launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies a predetermined voltage of power to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (dashed line in the figure), a launch control unit 902 that controls the operation of the launch device 330 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 250, and a signal relay unit 903 that relays an initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and a ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (e.g., 24 V AC) supplied from the outside, converts it to internal power (e.g., 24 V DC), and generates various types of power from the internal power. The power generated by the power supply unit 901 includes a drive voltage (e.g., 12 V DC) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, a control voltage (e.g., 5 V DC) for driving various switches and executing control processes, and a backup voltage for maintaining the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various types of power generated from internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, main control board 920, delivery control board 930, sub-control board 940, etc. Specifically, the power supply monitoring board 910 is supplied with internal power, drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage. The main control board 920 is supplied with drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage, and these powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. The delivery control board 930 is supplied with drive voltage and control voltage. The sub-control board 940 is supplied with drive voltage and control voltage. The launch control unit 902 and signal relay unit 903 are supplied with drive voltage and control voltage.

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in the OFF state, the intake of external power is stopped. Note that a state in which the supply of power to the inside of the pachinko machine 100 is stopped by turning off the power switch 909 or by unplugging a power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 from an external power supply outlet (not shown) or a state in which the supply of external power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a "power outage state."

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the control voltage power for a predetermined period of time even after transitioning to a power outage state. This allows the main control board 920 to save the state and terminate control so that the current control state can be restored.

The launch control unit 902 cooperates with the main control board 920 to control the operation of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 of the launch device 330. The ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the launch control unit 902 outputs an ON launch permission signal to the main control board 920 on the condition that the player's touch on the launch handle 252 (see FIG. 1) is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the launch stop switch 255 for stopping the launch is not operated. In addition, based on the launch permission signal and the launch abnormality signal, the main control board 920 outputs a launch solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the launch control unit 902. The launch control unit 902 operates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the ON ball feed control signal, and operates the launch solenoid 334 based on the reception of the ON launch solenoid control signal and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. This causes the launch device 330 to launch game balls sequentially with a strength that corresponds to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252).

When the initialization switch 907 is pressed, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON initialization signal to the main control board 920. In response to receiving the ON initialization signal, the main control board 920 initializes the stored information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920. Note that the initialization switch 907 does not necessarily need to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 may be directly mounted on the main control board 920 and housed within the board case 371, thereby preventing unauthorized signal input targeting the section through which the signal is transmitted.

In addition, when the ball overflow switch 249 detects game balls, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 outputs a slow payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ON-state ball overflow signal, and the payout control board 930 that receives the slow payout signal slows down the rotation speed of the payout motor 542 (the payout speed of game balls from the payout device 540). In addition, the main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of an OFF-state ball overflow signal, and the payout control board 930 that receives the high-speed payout signal speeds up the rotation speed of the payout motor 542.

As shown in FIG. 10, the signal relay unit 903 is connected to a rear setting switch 905 and a setting display device 906. The signal relay unit 903 relays an ON setting signal that is output to the main control board 920 when the rear setting switch 905 is rotated clockwise by approximately 90° using a specified key (not shown). The main control board 920 allows a change in the game mode in response to receiving an ON setting signal from the rear setting switch 905. The signal relay unit 903 also relays a setting display signal output from the main control board 920 to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the received setting display signal.

The power supply monitoring board 910 includes a power supply monitoring unit 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power supply/launch control board 900, and a signal relay unit 912 that relays the power supply and transmission of various signals between the power supply/launch control board 900 and the main control board 920. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to a transition to a power failure state, and monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901, and when this voltage is less than 22 volts for a predetermined period of time, it determines that a power failure state has occurred and outputs an ON power failure signal to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to a power failure state by receiving the ON power failure signal.

The main control board 920 controls the overall operation of the pachinko machine 100. The main control board 920 is equipped with an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing device, a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and a RAM (not shown) that temporarily stores various data when executing a control program. The main control board 920 is also equipped with various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission/reception circuit (not shown). The RAM of the main control board 920 is configured to maintain (back up) internal data by power supply of a backup voltage from the power supply/launch control board 900 even after transitioning to a power outage state.

The payout control board 930 controls the payout operation of the payout device 540 in response to instructions from the main control board 920 and the lending operation of the payout device 540 in response to the operation of the ball lending device 290. Like the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 is equipped with various circuits such as an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), ROM (not shown) and RAM (not shown), a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generating circuit (not shown), and a signal transmitting/receiving circuit (not shown).

The dispensing control board 930 is equipped with an input/output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices to enable information communication. For example, it is connected to the main control board 920 and relay device 950 to enable bidirectional information input/output communication, to the open/close detection switches 108, 109, the ball storage switch 591, and the dispensing counting switch 592 to enable only one-way information input communication, and to the dispensing motor 542 to enable only one-way information output communication. The RAM of the dispensing control board 930, like the RAM of the main control board 920, may be configured to have a backup function that allows internal data to be maintained for a certain period of time in a power outage, or, unlike the RAM of the main control board 920, may be configured not to maintain internal data in a power outage.

The sub-control board 940 controls the operation of various performance devices, various light-emitting devices, various sound devices, etc., based on instructions from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input/output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information can be communicated with them. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible, the input operation device 260 is connected so that information can be communicated with them in both directions, and the decorative pattern display device 479 and the like are connected so that only one-way information output communication is possible.

<Various control processes>
Next, a description will be given of various control processes executed by the main control board 920. The control processes in the main control board 920 are broadly divided into main processes that are started when the power is restored from a power outage, and timer interrupt processes that are executed by periodically (every 2 ms (milliseconds) in this embodiment) interrupting the main processes.

First, the main processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as "main control main processing" in FIG. 11).

In the main processing of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processes (program start process S1001 to random number initial setting process S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information are executed once, and then, an interrupt prohibition process S1020 for prohibiting interrupts, a random number initial value update process S1021 for updating the values of the winning random number initial value counter (part of the RAM area) for the special pattern, the jackpot pattern random number initial value counter (part of the RAM area) and the winning random number initial value counter (part of the RAM area) for the normal pattern, a fluctuation counter update process S1022 for updating the values of the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter (part of the RAM area) for determining the fluctuation display time (fluctuation time) and the fluctuation pattern, etc., and an interrupt permission process S1023 for permitting interrupts are repeatedly executed. Note that if a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt permission process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt permission process S1023.

In this series of control start processes, a program start process S1001 is executed to set an initial value to a stack pointer (a part of the RAM area) that controls program execution, an interrupt mode setting process S1002 is executed to set an interrupt mode, and a startup waiting process S1003 is executed to wait for a predetermined time until the dispensing control board 930, the sub-control board 940, etc. start up.

After the startup standby process S1003, a process S2001 is performed to determine the output state of the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 of the power supply/launch control board 900. If the determination process S2001 determines that the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is in the OFF state (S2001: N), a process S1004 to determine the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply/launch control board 900, a process S1005 to determine the value of the power outage information (partial area of the RAM), and a process S1007 to determine the storage state of the saved information are performed, and it is determined whether or not to erase the saved information in the RAM based on these determination results. Here, the saved information is information necessary to restore the game state before the power outage, and corresponds to a partial area of the RAM that was updated according to the progress of the game before the power outage, and examples include the value of a counter related to the unit game being executed and the value of a counter stored by a start winning.

The memory state of the saved information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a specified range of memory area in the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation process S1006), and it is determined whether the exclusive OR of the current checksum value and the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement of the checksum value calculated in the power outage monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) following the transition to the previous power outage state, is "0" (determination process S1007), thereby determining whether the current checksum value is the same as the checksum value at the time of the transition to the power outage state.

If the initialization signal is on (S1004: Y), if the power outage information is not a predetermined power outage value indicating that the saved information was saved and ended when transitioning to a power outage state (S1005: N), or if the saved information is not saved correctly (S1007: N), a RAM clear process S1008 is executed to erase the saved information in the RAM. After it is determined that the saved information is saved correctly (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clear process S1008 is executed, a hardware initialization process S1009 is executed to initialize various devices connected to the main control board 920.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, a determination process S1010 is executed to determine whether the power outage information is a power outage value. If the power outage information is a power outage value (S1010: N), a RAM restoration setting process S1011 is executed to initialize various information, including the restoration of retained information, and a restoration command indicating the completion of the settings is set (restore command output process S1012). The restoration of the retained information in the RAM restoration setting process S1011 restores the control state of the main control board 920 to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power outage state.

On the other hand, if the power outage information is not a power outage value (S1010: Y), various information is initialized without restoring the retained information (RAM initial setting process S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the settings is output (initialization command output process S1014).

In addition, in the RAM recovery setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power outage information is set to a predetermined current value different from the power outage value, and even if various error states such as fraud detection errors occurred immediately before the transition to the previous power outage state, all of these error states are released. In addition, either a recovery command or an initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the dispensing control board 930 and the sub-control board 940, and a predetermined initialization process is also executed in each of the dispensing control board 930 and the sub-control board 940 that received the recovery command or initialization command.

After initial setting of the RAM according to the start-up situation (judgment process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014), if the condition device was operating when the previous power outage occurred, preparations are made to return to the special game state (special game state return preparation process S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operating state of the condition device and the role continuous operation device are judged, and the process corresponding to the game situation during the power outage is executed in the sub-control board 940.

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the state is in the time-saving state or not by determining whether the time-saving state flag is set (determination process S1016), and if the state is in the time-saving state (S1016: Y), a time-saving command is output (time-saving command output process S1017). On the other hand, if the state is not in the time-saving state (S1016: N), a non-time-saving command is output (non-time-saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (a part of the RAM area) related to the special pattern is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

On the other hand, in the determination process S2001, if it is determined that the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is in the on state, which indicates that the rear setting switch 905 is being operated by a specified key (S2001: Y), a RAM clear process S2002 is executed to erase information in substantially all areas of the RAM 922. Specifically, in the RAM clear process S2002, information in substantially all areas except for the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is erased.

The setting correspondence information is information corresponding to each of a plurality of predetermined stages (nine types in this embodiment) of game modes, and the setting mode information corresponding to the game mode being set is stored in RAM 922. Therefore, the RAM clear process S2002 erases information from substantially all areas in RAM 922 of the main control board 920 except for the storage area for the setting correspondence information, and the state becomes one in which setting changes are permitted.

When a state in which a setting change is permitted is reached, a setting display signal that identifies the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in RAM 922 is output to the setting display device 906. The setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the setting display signal received from the main control board 920. In other words, the setting display device 906 displays setting display information that corresponds to the setting correspondence information stored in RAM 922.

Next, a setting change process S2003 is executed to change the game mode setting until the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off. Note that the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off when the rear setting switch 905 is not operated by a specified key.

The game mode setting is changed by pressing the initialization switch 907 while the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a specified key. Specifically, in this state, the setting correspondence information is changed sequentially each time the main control board 920 receives an initialization signal based on pressing the initialization switch 907. Specifically, the order in which nine predetermined game modes are cyclically selected (for example, ... → T1 → T2 → T3 → M1 → M2 → M3 → B1 → B2 → B3 → T1 → T2 → ...) is predetermined, and the selected game mode is changed sequentially according to this order each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed.

Each time the change is made, a value corresponding to the selected game mode is stored in RAM 922 as setting correspondence information. Each time the setting correspondence information stored in RAM 922 is changed, a setting display signal corresponding to the setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device 906, and setting display information corresponding to the changed setting correspondence information is displayed on the setting display device 906.

Therefore, the person changing the settings, such as the manager of the game facility, can complete the selection of the game mode by repeatedly pressing the initialization switch 907 until the game mode he or she wants to set for this pachinko machine 100 is selected while the rear setting switch 905 is operated with a specified key, and then having a game ball enter the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle start winning device 431B. Therefore, the setting change process S2003 ends when a game ball enters the middle start winning devices 431A, 431B after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907.

When the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off (S2004: Y), a RAM change setting process S2005 is executed to newly initialize various information in the RAM 922, excluding information related to the game mode setting (i.e., setting correspondence information). This essentially ends the start-up of the main control board 920, and it is determined that the game will proceed in the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922.

After the RAM change setting process S2005, a set command output process S2006 is executed, which outputs a set command indicating completion of setting of the RAM 922 to the payout control board 930. By receiving the set command output by the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 can recognize that the main control board 920 will transition to normal game processing, and can also recognize in which game mode it will operate. After the set command output process S2006, the special game state return preparation process S1015 and subsequent processes are executed.

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 (abbreviated as "main control interrupt processing" in the figure).

In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 is executed to start the timer interrupt. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. This prohibits interrupts other than this timer interrupt. After that, the power outage monitoring process S1202 to the external information output process S1221, which are related to the actual control such as the progress control of the game of the pachinko machine 100 and the monitoring of various sensors, are executed in sequence. However, if the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various types of fraud (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, an interrupt permission process S1222 is executed to permit the next timer interrupt, and the current timer interrupt process is terminated. Below, each of the various main processes will be explained individually.

In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM area) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is checked three times, and if the ON state is detected all three times, it is determined that there is a power failure. If it is not determined that there is a power failure in this determination, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

On the other hand, if the power outage monitoring process S1202 determines that a power outage has occurred, the following process is executed. First, the power outage information value is changed from the power-on value set in the RAM recovery setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power outage value. Also, a checksum value for a predetermined range of memory area in the RAM is calculated, and the two's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM judgment value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not perform any substantial control such as the progress of the game or monitoring of various sensors, and the state of the RAM after the RAM judgment value is set is maintained based on the backup power. Note that, since the output state of the power outage signal is checked three times, each timer interrupt process is executed twice after the first detection of the reception of the power outage signal.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the jackpot random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter for the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is a value different from the specified maximum value (e.g., "576"), it is changed to a value that is "1" larger than the current value, and if the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). However, if the changed value is the same as the circulation initial value for the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol, and the circulation initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter for normal symbols are updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter for special symbols. However, the update range determined by the specified maximum and minimum values of each counter is set to a unique value for each counter, and multiple counters are updated asynchronously, and the cyclic initial value of each counter refers to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter for special symbols and the winning random number initial value counter for special symbols have the same value range, the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range, and the winning random number counter for normal symbols and the winning random number initial value counter for normal symbols have the same value range.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter for the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (e.g., "576"), it is changed to a value that is "1" larger than the current value, and if the value of the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). The symbol random number initial value counter for the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter for the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique values for those counters.

In the variation counter update process S1205, the values of the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter for determining the variation display time (variation time) and the variation pattern are updated. Specifically, if the value of the first variation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), it is changed to a value that is "1" larger than the current value, and if the value of the first variation type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). The second variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter are also updated in the same manner as the first variation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters.

The winning random number counters for the special and normal symbols, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the variable type counters do not necessarily have to be configured as described above, and at least some of the counters may be configured in a different way. For example, they may be configured to update from a fixed initial value without using an initial value counter, or they may be configured with a random number generating IC without using a program and reference values as needed.

In the game stop determination process S1206, if the fraud detection information is a fraud detection value, it is updated to a game stop value and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not a fraud detection value or is already a game stop value, the game stop determination process S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. Note that the fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when the occurrence of various types of fraud is detected in the fraud detection process S1211. Also, in the determination process S1207, whether or not the game is stopped is determined depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is a game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, signals are output to control various notification devices such as the special pattern display device 471 for the first special pattern, the special pattern display device 472 for the second special pattern, and the normal pattern display device 473 for the normal pattern. Also, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, signals are output to control various actuators such as the ball feed solenoid 332, the launch solenoid 334, the right entry restriction solenoid 462, the lower entry restriction solenoid 463, the upper entry restriction solenoid 464, and the switching solenoid 465.

In the switch reading process S1209, the signal status from each of the middle start winning switches 441A, 441B, right start winning switch 442, lower large winning switch 443, upper large winning switch 444, combination activation switch 445, start switch 446, non-specific path switch 447, specific path switch 448, and general winning switches 449A, 449B is read, and changes in the detection status of the game ball by the various switches are detected.

Specifically, in the switch read process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into an input buffer (a part of the RAM) twice with a predetermined time interval between them, and for each signal from each switch, changes in the detection state of the various switches are detected based on the signal state read the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as the "first signal state"), the signal state read the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as the "second signal state"), and the detection state detected in the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as the "previous detection state"). Then, for each switch, if the previous detection state is off, the first signal state is on, and the second signal state is on, it is determined that the switch has transitioned to the on state, and a detection flag (part of the RAM) corresponding to the type of switch is set. As explained in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each timer interrupt process is executed twice, so the detection flags for various switches can be set accurately even if the various switches start to be turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped.

In the timer update process S1210, various timers (specified areas of RAM) used for the variable display of special and normal symbols, control of each game state, and fraud monitoring are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, fraudulent acts such as forcibly causing game balls to enter various winning devices or forcibly activating various winning devices are detected. Specifically, the occurrence of a situation in which it is highly likely that fraudulent acts have been performed is detected, such as forcibly moving the right start winning device 432, the lower large winning device 433, and the upper large winning device 434 to an entry-permitting position, guiding a game ball to a specific passage of the lower large winning device 433 by vibration, forcibly inducing a malfunction of the right start winning device 432, the lower large winning device 433, and the upper large winning device 434 by radio waves, guiding a game ball to various winning devices by magnetic attraction, and guiding a game ball at an abnormal timing to the upper middle start winning device 431A, the lower middle start winning device 431B, the right start winning device 432, the lower large winning device 433, and the upper large winning device 434.

In the winning detection response process S1212, control is executed based on the detection of a game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle start winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10), the middle start winning counter (a predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (a predetermined area of RAM) are updated. Also, when the right start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Also, when the lower large winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the lower large winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the upper large winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the upper large winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10), the large winning counter (a predetermined area of RAM) and the second payout counter (a predetermined area of RAM) are updated.

In the launch control process S1213, launch-related information for controlling the launch of game balls by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, it is detected whether the intermediate block 103 (see Figures 1 and 2) is closed relative to the outer frame 101 (see Figures 1 and 2) based on the output state of the signal from the open/close detection switch 108 (see Figure 10) via the dispensing control board 930. Also, it is detected whether the front block 102 (see Figures 2 and 3) is closed relative to the intermediate block 103 (see Figures 2 and 3) based on the output state of the signal from the open/close detection switch 109 via the dispensing control board 930 (see Figure 10).

In the payout status monitoring process S1215, information indicating the payout control status output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout status commands corresponding to the payout control status are set as necessary. In addition, upon receiving the payout status command, the sub-control board 940 causes the decorative pattern display device 479, the upper left sound device 281, the upper right sound device 282, etc. to issue a notification corresponding to the type of payout status command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by one each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and is decremented by one each time a prize ball command based on the winning is set. The payout control board 930 requests a prize ball command from the main control board 920 each time it executes control to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to the winning (e.g., three balls) (in detail, shortly before the payout is completed), and in a situation where the payout of the prize balls is continuing, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a winning number of prize balls different from that of the first payout counter (for example, 13 balls), and when the payout control board 930 receives a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter, the payout control board 930 executes control to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol-related process S1217, the reservation control of the right to play a unit game related to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right to play a unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the operation control of the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 is further executed.

In addition, in a unit game related to the first special pattern, various pieces of information are selected for displaying the decorative pattern variation display and the confirmation display on the decorative pattern display device 479. For example, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern variation display executed by the decorative pattern display device 479 in a unit game related to the first special pattern is selected based on the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the values of various variation pattern random numbers, and the number of times the right to play the unit game related to the first special pattern has been reserved.

In addition, in the special symbol related process S1217, the reservation control of the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the operation control of the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 is further executed.

In addition, in a unit game related to the second special pattern, various pieces of information are selected for displaying the decorative pattern variation display and the confirmation display on the decorative pattern display device 479. For example, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern variation display executed by the decorative pattern display device 479 in a unit game related to the second special pattern is selected based on the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the values of various variation pattern random numbers, and the number of times the right to play the unit game related to the second special pattern has been reserved.

In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the reservation control of the right to play a unit game related to a normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to a normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right to play a unit game related to a normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol reservation display device 478 is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to a normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and if the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is also executed.

In the display control process S1219, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized based on various information updated to control the operation of the special pattern display device 471 for the first special pattern, the special pattern display device 472 for the second special pattern, the special pattern reserved display device 476 for the first special pattern, and the special pattern reserved display device 477 for the second special pattern in the special pattern related process S1217. The synthesized output data is output to each device in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

In addition, in the display control process S1219, various commands corresponding to each information for displaying the decorative pattern display device 479 with the decorative pattern change display and the fixed display selected in the special pattern related process S1217 are set. For example, a change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern selected in the special pattern related process S1217 is set. The set command is output to the sub-control board 940 in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. The sub-control board 940 controls the decorative pattern display device 479 based on the command received from the main control board 920.

In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is performed. In the external information output process S1221, output data is set to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100.

<Picture sheet>
Next, the configuration of the pattern sheet 601 will be described with reference to Fig. 13. Fig. 13(A) is a front view showing a part of the pattern sheet 601, and Fig. 13(B) is a cross-sectional view of the pattern sheet 601 taken along line A-A in Fig. 13(A). For reference, in Fig. 13(B), the direction of each surface of the pattern sheet 601 is indicated by an arrow.

As shown in Figures 13(A) and 13(B), the pattern sheet 601 comprises a sheet-like base material 611 that is transparent or otherwise light-transmitting (translucent), extending in a strip-like shape, a decorative pattern 621 formed on the back surface of the base material 611 (the surface that faces the reel body when the pattern sheet 601 is attached to the reel body), and a decorative portion 622 formed on the front surface of the base material 611 (the surface that faces outward when the pattern sheet 601 is attached to the reel body).

The decorative patterns 621 include a main pattern 621A that can form a jackpot pattern, and a sub-pattern 621B that cannot form a jackpot pattern. The decorative patterns 621 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the pattern sheet 601 such that the main patterns 621A and the sub-patterns 621B alternate.

The main design 621A is configured as a design that includes information that specifies individual numerical values, such as numbers and characters that correspond to the numbers (hereinafter, this information is referred to as "numerical information"). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 13(A), the main design 621A is configured as a design that includes both numbers that indicate numerical values, such as "2" and "3," and characters that correspond to each number (for example, a puffer fish that corresponds to "2" and a turtle that corresponds to "3") as numerical information.

The main pattern 621A may be configured such that the numerical information is composed only of numbers indicating numerical values, or may be composed only of characters corresponding to each numerical value (number). The main pattern 621A may be configured such that all of the main pattern 621A is unified as either a pattern including only numbers indicating numerical values as numerical information, a pattern including only characters corresponding to each numerical value as numerical information, or a pattern including both numbers indicating numerical values and characters corresponding to each number as numerical information, or may be configured as a mixture of these patterns.

The main pattern 621A is configured as a pattern including numerical information corresponding to each number from "1" to "9", for example. The main pattern 621A may be a pattern including numerical information corresponding to each number from "1" to "9", excluding some numbers (for example, "4").

The jackpot pattern is, for example, a predetermined combination (for example, a combination of the same main patterns 621A) of the main patterns 621A in each pattern row (left pattern row, right pattern row, center pattern row). In a unit game related to a special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern), if the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery is won, the jackpot pattern is displayed as a fixed stopping pattern on a preset active line.

The "active line" is a line where the game state transitions to a special game state when a jackpot pattern based on a decorative pattern is displayed on the line as a stop pattern. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, five active lines are set. Specifically, three horizontal active lines (specifically, the upper line located at the top, the lower line located at the bottom, and the middle line located between the upper line and the lower line) and two diagonal active lines (specifically, the active line in the upward right direction and the active line in the downward right direction) are set.

The number of active lines that are set does not necessarily have to be five, and may be set to any appropriate number, such as one or more. For example, three active lines may be set, consisting of the top line, the bottom line, and the middle line, or one active line, such as the middle line, may be set.

The main patterns 621A are arranged on the pattern sheet 601 so that the numerical values of the numerical information are in ascending or descending order from top to bottom when the reel is viewed from the front. For example, in the pattern sheet 601 used for the reel corresponding to the left pattern row in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the main patterns 621A are arranged so that the numerical values corresponding to the numerical information are in ascending order from top to bottom when the reel is viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 13(A). On the other hand, in the pattern sheet 601 used for each reel corresponding to the right pattern row and the center pattern row, the main patterns 621A are arranged so that the numerical values corresponding to the numerical information are in descending order from top to bottom when the reel is viewed from the front.

The sub-pattern 621B is configured as a predetermined pattern that is smaller than the main pattern 621A and does not include numerical information. In the example shown in FIG. 13(A), the sub-pattern 621B is configured as a star-shaped pattern. In the pattern sheet 601, the sub-pattern 621B is placed between the two main patterns 621A.

The decorative patterns 621 (main pattern 621A, sub-pattern 621B) are formed as a coating on the back side of the substrate 611 by printing with light-transmitting ink. Therefore, when a backlight (not shown) provided on the inner circumference of the reel body is turned on, the light from the backlight passes through the decorative patterns 621 and the substrate 611, so that the decorative patterns 621 drawn on the pattern sheet 601 can be illuminated.

The decorative portion 622 is provided outside the formation area of the decorative pattern 621 (main pattern 621A, secondary pattern 621B) on the pattern sheet 601. The decorative portion 622 is colored with a color that is configured to reflect light more easily than at least some of the colors that color the decorative pattern 621. Note that "at least some of the colors that color the decorative pattern 621" may be, for example, the color that reflects light most easily (e.g., the color with the highest brightness) among the main colors that color each main pattern 621A included in the decorative pattern 621 (e.g., the color that colors the largest area in the main pattern 621A), or the color that reflects light most easily among the colors that color all of the decorative patterns 621.

The "color that is configured to easily reflect light" may be, for example, determined by the presence or absence of brilliance, or may be determined by the brightness of the color. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, for example, the decorative pattern 621 is colored with ink that does not contain a brilliant material, and the decorative portion 622 is colored with a brilliant color such as a metallic color (e.g., gold or silver) or a pearl color (e.g., pearl white), which is a color that is configured to easily reflect light compared to at least some of the colors that color the decorative pattern 621.

Alternatively, the decorative portion 622 may be colored in a color that is more easily reflective than at least some of the colors that color the decorative pattern 621, and that is brighter than the color that is most easily reflective among the colors that color the decorative pattern 621 (e.g., a high-brightness color such as white or pale yellow).

As shown in FIG. 13(B), the decorative portion 622 is formed as a coating on the surface side of the substrate 611 by printing with ink of a color that is configured to easily reflect light. This causes the decorative portion 622 to protrude forward (toward the surface side) from the decorative pattern 621 formed on the back side of the substrate 611, allowing the decorative portion 622 to be provided three-dimensionally relative to the decorative pattern 621. Note that the surface (the surface facing outward) of the decorative portion 622 may be smooth, may be uneven, or may have a mixture of smooth and uneven portions on its surface.

Next, we will explain the operation and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a decorative pattern 621 is formed on the back side of a sheet-like base material 611 that is light-transmitting (translucent), and a decorative portion 622 is formed on the front side of the base material 611, on the peripheral side of the decorative pattern 621. This allows the decorative portion 622 to be provided three-dimensionally relative to the decorative pattern 621, thereby improving the decorative feel of the decorative portion 622 relative to the decorative pattern 621.

In particular, the decorative portion 622 is colored in a color that is more reflective than at least some of the colors that color the decorative pattern 621, which adds brilliance and brilliance to the decorative portion 622, thereby more suitably improving the decorative feel of the decorative portion 622.

In this way, the decorative portion 622 enhances the decorative feel, thereby increasing the attention to the decorative pattern 621 on the peripheral side of the decorative portion 622, thereby increasing the attention to the gaming machine.

The reel of the reel device constituting the decorative pattern display device 479 is constructed by adhering a pattern sheet 601 having a base material 611, a decorative pattern 621 formed as a coating on the back side of the base material 611, and a decorative portion 622 formed as a coating on the front side of the base material 611 to the outer circumferential surface of the reel body, so that the decorative feel provided by the decorative portion 622 is improved, thereby favorably increasing the attention paid to the changing display and stopping display (confirmation display) of the decorative pattern 621.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 14. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, a pattern that becomes visible when a predetermined situation occurs is drawn on a pattern sheet 601.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment (hereinafter, this embodiment will also be referred to as the "first embodiment") will be denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described. Also, the components described below as the second embodiment may be added to the components provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the above-mentioned first embodiment, or may be provided in place of some of the components of the pachinko machine 100 of the above-mentioned first embodiment.

Figures 14(A) to 14(C) are front views of the decorative pattern display device 479 of the second embodiment. Figure 14(D) is a front view showing a portion of the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to each pattern row. Note that in Figures 14(B) and 14(C), for reference, the position of the middle line L2, which is one of the set pay lines, is shown by a dashed line.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14(A), heaters 650 functioning as heat sources are provided on the inner periphery of each reel body corresponding to the left pattern row Z1 and the right pattern row Z2, in positions that can overlap with the patterns 721A and 721B described below when viewed from the front.

The pattern sheets 601 corresponding to each of the pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are provided with patterns 701, 702, and 703 that are normally difficult or impossible to see, but become visible when a specific light such as a flash light is applied to them as the light is retroreflected. The patterns 701, 702, and 703 are drawn across the pattern sheets 601 corresponding to each of the pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, and are configured so that each pattern is completed when a specific main pattern 621A is placed on the middle line L2 in the final display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14(B), when the main pattern 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the number "7" in each of the pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 is displayed as confirmed while being positioned on the middle line L2 (i.e., when the jackpot pattern of the main pattern 621A corresponding to the number "7" is displayed as a stopped pattern), the pattern 701 is completed by the pattern 701A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the left pattern column Z1, the pattern 701B provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern column Z2, and the pattern 701C provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the middle pattern column Z3.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14(C), when the main pattern 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the number "5" is arranged on the middle line L2 in the left and right pattern columns Z1 and Z2, and the main pattern 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the number "9" is arranged on the middle line L2 in the middle pattern column Z3, the pattern 702 is completed by the pattern 702A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the left pattern column Z1, the pattern 702B provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern column Z2, and the pattern 702C provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the middle pattern column Z3.

In other words, in a configuration in which the decorative patterns 621 that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped in the left pattern row Z1, the right pattern row Z2, and the center pattern row Z3, when the left and right pattern rows Z1 and Z2 generate a reach display on the center line L2 due to the main pattern 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the number "5", and then the main pattern 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the number "9" stops on the center line L2 of the center pattern row Z3, resulting in a losing pattern (more specifically, a losing pattern that constitutes a losing reach), the pattern 702 is completed.

In addition, in the example pattern sheet 601 shown in FIG. 14(D), when the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "9" is arranged on the middle line L2 in the left and right pattern columns Z1 and Z2, and the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "5" is arranged on the middle line L2 in the middle pattern column Z3, and a confirmation display is made, the pattern 703 is completed by the pattern 703A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the left pattern column Z1, the pattern 703B provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern column Z2, and the pattern 703C provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the middle pattern column Z3.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 is configured such that the decorative portion 622 (see FIG. 13) is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611 (see FIG. 13), and patterns such as pattern 701, which become visible when a specific light such as a flash light is shone on the pattern and the light is retroreflected, are formed on the surface side of the base material 611 using an ink that has retroreflectivity and emits a specific color (e.g., black or green) when illuminated with a flash light or the like.

Therefore, when the specified main pattern 621A is placed on the middle line L2 in the final display, and a specified picture (e.g., pattern 701 or pattern 702) is thereby completed, an image showing the specified pattern drawn in a specified color can be obtained by taking a flash photograph with a camera.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to each of the pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is provided with patterns 721A and 721B that are normally difficult or impossible to see, but become visible when heated or warmed.

As shown in FIG. 14(B), the patterns 721A and 721B are provided in positions that overlap the heater 650 in a front view when the main pattern 621A, which includes numerical information corresponding to the number "7", is located on the middle line L2 in the left and right pattern rows Z1 and Z2. The patterns 721A and 721B are formed on the front side of the substrate 611 with ink that changes from colorless to a predetermined color (e.g., pink or orange) when heated or warmed.

The heater 650 is configured to be heated or warmed under the control of the sub-control board 940 when the main pattern 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the number "7" is positioned on the middle line L2 in each of the pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 and is displayed as a confirmed winning pattern (i.e., when the jackpot pattern of the main pattern 621A corresponding to the number "7" is displayed as a stopped pattern).

Therefore, when the jackpot pattern of the main pattern 621A corresponding to the number "7" is displayed as a fixed stop pattern, the patterns 721A and 721B are visibly displayed in a predetermined color. Note that when the heater 650 starts heating or warming due to the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "7" being positioned on the middle line L2 and the fixed display, the sub-control board 940 stops heating or warming by the heater 650 when the variable display of the special pattern starts thereafter.

Next, we will explain the operation and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 is provided with patterns 701, 702, and 703 that are difficult or impossible to see under normal circumstances but become visible when a specific light such as a flash light is shone on the pattern sheet 601 as the light is retroreflected, and patterns 721A and 721B that are difficult or impossible to see under normal circumstances but become visible when heated or warmed, so that different patterns can be visibly displayed in different situations. This makes it possible to increase attention to the gaming machine by using different patterns that become visible depending on the situation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the stopped symbol is a predetermined losing symbol (for example, the losing symbol shown in FIG. 14(C)), a specific symbol such as symbol 702 can be made visible by irradiating it with a flash light (for example, taking a flash photograph with a camera). When the decorative symbol 621 is displayed as a losing symbol, if the number of reserved times for the unit game rights related to the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is zero, the state of the losing symbol displayed as a confirmed symbol is maintained for a period until the next start winning of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, a specific symbol such as symbol 702 can be maintained in a completed state for that period.

Therefore, when the number of reserved times of the unit game rights related to the special symbol is zero, the period during which the specific pattern completed by the decorative symbol 621 being displayed as a predetermined losing symbol can be viewed can be longer than when the number of reserved times is 1 or more. The longer the period during which the specific pattern can be viewed, the less likely the player will miss the specific pattern (for example, the player will miss the specific pattern because the camera for flash photography is not prepared in time), so the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment can provide a gameplay that allows the player to enjoy not increasing the number of reserved times of the unit game rights related to the special symbol.

In addition, when the decorative pattern 621 is displayed as a predetermined jackpot pattern, a special game state occurs afterwards. In this special game state, the player tends to prioritize operations (operations on the launch handle 252) for causing the game ball to enter the jackpot devices 433, 434. Therefore, the player may not be able to perform operations (for example, camera operations for flash photography) to make the specific pattern visible, and may miss the specific pattern. In contrast, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, even if the special pattern lottery is not won, the completed specific pattern (for example, pattern 702) can be seen by irradiating it with a flash light, so that a gameplay in which the specific pattern can be seen even if the special pattern lottery is not won can be provided.

As explained in this embodiment, in a configuration in which the patterns 701, 702, and 703 become visible when a specific light such as a flash light is applied, for example, by providing a stage 670 in front of the decorative pattern display device 479, it is possible to improve the playability by making the patterns 701, 702, and 703 visible under specific circumstances.

Figure 15 is a front view of a decorative pattern display device 479 in a modified example of this embodiment. In Figure 15, the stage 670 provided on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 479 is simply illustrated by the shape of its rolling surface. For reference, Figure 15 also illustrates game balls P1 and P2 as an example of a game ball rolling on the stage 670. For reference, Figure 15 also illustrates the position of the middle line L2, which is one of the set pay lines, by a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 15, in this modified example, a stage 670 is provided in front of the decorative pattern display device 479. The stage 670 has a rolling surface that is approximately W-shaped when viewed from the front. A warp passage (not shown) is provided on the left end side of the stage 670, which can guide game balls flowing down the left side of the central structure 420 to the stage 670, and guides game balls that enter the warp passage to the left end side of the stage 670.

A game ball that enters the left end of stage 670 moves back and forth in the left-right direction on stage 670 along the rolling surface of stage 670. By positioning the two recesses in stage 670, which are configured in a roughly W shape, at the locations that correspond to the eyes in face-like image 702, it becomes possible for game balls (e.g., game balls P1 and P2) that pass near the recesses to look like eyes.

As a result, when the pattern 702 can be displayed (i.e., when the main pattern 621A including numerical information corresponding to the number "5" in the left pattern column Z1, the main pattern 621A including numerical information corresponding to the number "5" in the right pattern column Z2, and the main pattern 621A including numerical information corresponding to the number "9" in the middle pattern column Z3 are arranged on the middle line L2 to complete the pattern 702, it is possible to obtain an interesting image in which eyes are added to the pattern 702 by timing the flash photography with the camera.

In addition, by forming the passage through which the game balls discharged (falling) from the two recesses in the stage 670, which is configured in a substantially W-shape, can pass using a resin having optical transparency (translucency) that allows the game balls passing through the passage to be visible to the player, it is possible to make the game balls discharged from the recesses look like tears. By making the passage a zigzag passage that goes back and forth from side to side and heads downward, it is possible to ensure a period during which the game balls can be seen by the player.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 16. In the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, a currently set game mode can be suggested by utilizing a configuration in which a pattern that becomes visible when a predetermined situation occurs is drawn on a pattern sheet 601.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of the first or second embodiment described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described. Also, the components described below as the third embodiment may be added to the components of the pachinko machine 100 of the first or second embodiment described above, or may be provided in place of some of the components of the pachinko machine 100 of the first or second embodiment described above.

Figure 16(A) is a schematic side view for explaining the configuration of a reel device, and Figures 16(B) and 16(C) are front views of a decorative pattern display device 479 of the third embodiment. In Figure 16(A), in order to make the drawing easier to understand, the reel body R and the pattern sheet 601 attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel body R are shown separated from each other. Also, for reference, in Figure 16(A), the direction of light irradiation by the light-emitting body 690 is shown by an arrow, and the vertical display range of the decorative patterns 621 located on the upper line, middle line, and lower line are shown.

In addition, in Fig. 16(B), Fig. 16(C), and Fig. 16(D), the positions of the upper line L3, the middle line L2, and the lower line L1 are shown by dashed lines for reference. In Fig. 16(B), Fig. 16(C), and Fig. 16(D), the intensity of the color in the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C is represented by the density of the hatching to make the drawings easier to understand. Specifically, the darker the color, the denser the hatching.

As shown in FIG. 16(A), in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C that function as heat sources similar to heater 650 are provided on the inner periphery of each reel body R corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. More specifically, heater 650A is provided at a position overlapping main symbol 621A located on upper line L3 in a front view, heater 650B is provided at a position overlapping main symbol 621A located on middle line L2 in a front view, and heater 650C is provided at a position overlapping main symbol 621A located on lower line L1 in a front view.

Heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C are configured as heaters that heat (warm) to different temperatures. Specifically, heater 650A is the heater that can heat to the highest temperature among heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C, heater 650A is the heater that can heat to the second highest temperature among heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C, and heater 650C is the heater that can heat to the lowest temperature among heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C. Heating (warming) by heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C is controlled by sub-control board 940.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the pattern sheets 601 corresponding to the respective pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are provided with patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C that are normally difficult or impossible to see but become visible when heated or warmed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16B, the pattern 741A is the main pattern 621A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the left pattern row Z1, which includes the number information corresponding to the number "7".
It is a circular pattern that surrounds the

As shown in FIG. 16(B), pattern 741B is a circular pattern that surrounds the periphery of main pattern 621A including numerical information corresponding to the number "9" among main patterns 621A provided on pattern sheet 601 corresponding to right pattern row Z2. As shown in FIG. 16(B), pattern 741C is a circular pattern that surrounds the periphery of main pattern 621A including numerical information corresponding to the number "8" among main patterns 621A provided on pattern sheet 601 corresponding to middle pattern row Z3.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 is configured so that the decorative portion 622 (see FIG. 13) is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611 (see FIG. 13), and the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C are formed on the surface side of the base material 611 with ink that changes from colorless to a predetermined color (e.g., pink or orange) when heated or warmed. The ink that forms the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C is configured so that the higher the heating or warming temperature, the darker the color it appears in.

Therefore, when the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "7" in the left pattern column Z1, the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "9" in the right pattern column Z2, and the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "8" in the middle pattern column Z3 are displayed in a confirmed state in a state where they are arranged on the upper line L3, and when heating (warming) is performed by the heater 650A, the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C are displayed in a darker color than when these main patterns 621A are arranged on the middle line L2 or the lower line L1 and heated by the heater 650B or heater 650C, as shown in FIG. 16(B).

In addition, when the main patterns 621A are positioned on the middle line L2 and are heated (warmed) by the heater 650B, the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C are displayed in a lighter color than when the main patterns 621A are positioned on the upper line L3 and are heated by the heater 650A, and in a darker color than when the main patterns 621A are positioned on the lower line L1 and are heated by the heater 650C, as shown in FIG. 16(C).

In addition, when the main patterns 621A are positioned on the lower line L1 and the heater 650C is used to heat (warm) them, the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C are displayed in a lighter color than when the main patterns 621A are positioned on the upper line L3 or middle line L2 and are heated by the heater 650A or heater 650B, as shown in FIG. 16(D).

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured so that the ball payout rate can be changed (the game mode can be changed) by operating the rear setting switch 905 (see FIG. 9) and the initialization switch 907 (see FIG. 9), and the currently set game mode is indicated by the intensity of the color of the pictures 741A, 741B, and 741C.

Specifically, when the game mode corresponding to the ball payout rate that provides the highest profit rate to the player (i.e., the game mode of the first stage probability for each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type) is set among the nine game modes that can be set by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the images 741A, 741B, and 741C are configured to appear in the darkest color (i.e., a darker color than when the other game modes are set).

More specifically, when the first stage probability game mode is set for each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, the sub-control board 940, in a unit game related to a special symbol when the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is not won, arranges the main symbol 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "7" in the left symbol column Z1, the main symbol 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "9" in the right symbol column Z2, and the main symbol 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "8" in the middle symbol column Z3 on the upper line L3 with a predetermined probability (for example, about 10%), and heats or warms the heater 650A. This allows the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C to appear in a darker color than when other game modes are set.

Furthermore, among the nine game modes that can be set by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, when the game mode that corresponds to the ball payout rate that provides the player with the lowest profit rate (i.e., the game mode with the third stage probability for each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type) is set, the images 741A, 741B, and 741C are configured to appear in the lightest color (i.e., a lighter color than when the other game modes are set).

More specifically, when the game mode of the third stage probability is set for each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, in a unit game related to a special pattern when the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) is not won, the sub-control board 940 arranges and displays the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "7" in the left pattern column Z1, the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "9" in the right pattern column Z2, and the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "8" in the middle pattern column Z3 on the lower line L1 with a predetermined probability (for example, about 10%), and heats or warms the heater 650C. This allows the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C to appear in a lighter color than when other game modes are set.

Furthermore, when the game mode corresponding to the ball payout rate that provides the second highest profit rate for the player (i.e., the game mode of the second stage probability for each of the top, middle, and bottom types) is set among the nine game modes that can be set by operating the rear setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the images 741A, 741B, and 741C are configured to appear in a lighter color than when the game mode of the first stage probability for each type is set, and in a darker color than when the game mode of the third stage probability for each type is set.

More specifically, when the game mode of the second stage probability is set for each of the top type, middle type, and bottom type, the sub-control board 940, in a unit game related to the special pattern when the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) is not won, arranges and displays the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "7" in the left pattern column Z1, the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "9" in the right pattern column Z2, and the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "8" in the middle pattern column Z3 on the middle line L2 with a predetermined probability (for example, about 10%), and heats or warms the heater 650B. As a result, the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C can be made to appear in a lighter color than when the game mode of the first stage probability of each type is set, and in a darker color than when the game mode of the third stage probability of each type is set.

In addition, the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C when the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) is not won may be a fixed value of 1 (for example, approximately 10%), or may be a variable value that changes depending on the situation. For example, the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C may be configured to change depending on the number of times the right to a unit game related to the special pattern is reserved. Specifically, for example, the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C may be configured to be higher as the number of times the right to a unit game related to the special pattern is reserved increases.

Alternatively, the probability of appearance of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C may change depending on the length of play time. For example, the longer the play time, the higher the probability of appearance of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C. The play time may be, for example, the time measured from the end of the so-called "customer waiting effect" (i.e., an effect display unrelated to the play state, such as a title display or demo display, that is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 when a predetermined time has elapsed without the player playing the pachinko machine 100), or the time the launch handle 252 is continuously operated.

Alternatively, the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C may be changed depending on the game mode. For example, the appearance probability of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C may be higher in a special game mode than in a normal game mode.

In addition, if the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "7" in the left pattern column Z1, the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "9" in the right pattern column Z2, and the main pattern 621A including the number information corresponding to the number "8" in the center pattern column Z3 are displayed as being positioned on the lines L1, L2, and L3 of each row, and heating or warming by the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C is started, the sub-control board 940 will then stop heating or warming by the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C when the variable display of the special pattern begins.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the patterns 701, 702, and 703 (see FIG. 14) provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to each pattern row Z1, Z2, and Z3 are configured as patterns that are difficult or impossible to see under normal circumstances, but become visible when illuminated with black light. In other words, the patterns 701, 702, and 703 in this embodiment are formed on the front side of the base material 611 with ink that emits light in a predetermined color (e.g., black or green) when illuminated with black light.

On the front side of each reel (reel body R and pattern sheet 601) corresponding to each of the pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, light emitters 690 (e.g., black light LEDs) are provided as light emitting means capable of irradiating the area that will be the display area of the decorative patterns with black light. For example, as shown in FIG. 16(A), black light LEDs as light emitters 690 facing the display area of the decorative patterns on each reel are arranged in a row in the width direction (left-right direction) of each reel on the front upper and lower sides of each reel.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is configured to cause the light-emitting body 690 to emit light (i.e., emit black light) in a situation where pictures such as 701, 702, and 703 are completed, such as when the main pattern 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the number "7" is located on the middle line L2 in the left and right pattern rows Z1 and Z2. This allows the player to see each of the pictures such as 701, 702, and 703 when a specified main pattern 621A is positioned on the middle line L2 in the final display.

In a configuration in which patterns such as patterns 701, 702, and 703 are formed on pattern sheet 601 using ink that emits a predetermined color when illuminated with black light, it is not necessary to provide light emitter 690 capable of illuminating with black light, and the player may display patterns such as patterns 701, 702, and 703 using light emitting means capable of illuminating with black light that he or she owns or is loaned to him or her.

Next, we will explain the operation and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, if the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is not won, the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C, which become visible when heated or warmed, are heated or warmed at a temperature corresponding to the currently set game mode with a predetermined probability. The patterns 741A, 741B, 741C are configured to develop a darker color the higher the heating or warming temperature, so the player can determine the type of current game mode in this pachinko machine 100, i.e., the ball payout rate (machine payout rate, payout rate), based on the intensity of the color of the patterns 741A, 741B, 741C.

This adds a feature that allows the player to guess probability information about the gaming machine he or she is playing on, based on the difference in color intensity of the pictures 741A, 741B, and 741C. For example, the player can consider whether the pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that suits his or her preferences, or a different gaming machine, and use the guessed probability information as one of the selection factors for whether to continue playing or move on to another gaming machine, thereby improving the playability of a gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set at multiple stages.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 17 and Fig. 18. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, a light-emitting decoration 780 with improved decorativeness on the periphery (edge side) is provided to increase the attention of players.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to third embodiments described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described. Also, the configuration described below as the fourth embodiment may be added to the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the first to third embodiments described above, or may be provided in place of a portion of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the first to third embodiments described above.

Figure 17 is a front view of the game board 400 of the fourth embodiment. Figure 18 (A) is a front view of the luminous decorative body 780, and Figure 18 (B) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the luminous decorative body 780 along line B-B in Figure 18 (A).

In FIG. 18(A), for reference, a rough boundary line G between the direct light transmission area X1 and the reflected light transmission area X2 in the peripheral decorative portion 788 is shown by a two-dot chain line. Also, in FIG. 18(B), for reference, an example of a path along which light output from the light emitter 782 as the light emitting means travels is shown by arrows J1 and J2.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, an illuminating decorative body 780 configured in a star shape when viewed from the front is provided in approximately the center of the upper part of the central structure 420.

As shown in Figures 18(A) and 18(B), the luminous decorative body 780 comprises luminous bodies 781 and 782, a substrate 783, an inner lens 784, a reflector 785, a decorative lens portion 786, a protrusion 787, a peripheral decorative portion 788, a decorative sheet 789, and a reflective component 790.

The light emitters 781 and 782 are configured to include light sources capable of expressing full color (for example, full-color LEDs, etc.). The light emitters 781 and 782 emit light in a predetermined color under light emission control by the sub-control board 940. Note that the light sources constituting the light emitters 781 and 782 do not necessarily need to be light sources capable of displaying full color, and may be light sources that emit light in a single color (for example, white LEDs, etc.).

The light emitter 781 is a light emitting means arranged inside the inner lens 784. The light emitter 782 is a light emitting means arranged outside the inner lens 784, on the rear side (lower side in FIG. 18(B)) of the peripheral decorative portion 788 so as to overlap the peripheral decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front. The light emitters 781 and 782 are arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 18(B)) of the substrate 783. The substrate 783 is a circuit board such as a printed circuit board on which the light emitters 781 and 782 and electronic components such as resistors for operating the light emitters 781 and 782 are provided.

The inner lens 784 is made of a resin (e.g., acrylic resin) having optical transparency (translucency) such as a transparent resin, and transmits (guides) the light output (emitted) from the light emitter 781. The inner lens 784 includes a top surface portion 784A that overlaps the front side of the light emitter 781 in a front view, and a side surface portion 784B that is connected to the peripheral side of the top surface portion 784A, and is provided so as to surround the front side of the light emitter 781.

As shown in FIG. 18B, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the inner lens 784 is configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross section. More specifically, the top surface 784A is configured to have a flat plate shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the side surface 784B is configured to have a flat plate shape extending in a substantially vertical direction.

The outer shape of the top surface portion 784A side of the inner lens 784 (the outer shape of the front side of the inner lens 784) is configured to have a shape that can fit into the inner surface of the decorative lens portion 786 (more specifically, the surface formed by the rear surface of the top surface portion 786A and the inward-facing surface of the side surface portion 786B) described below.

Reflector 785 is a light-opaque part having a color (e.g., white) capable of reflecting light, and is provided adjacent to the outside of the rear side of inner lens 784 (more specifically, the rear side of side portion 784B). Reflector 785 reflects light emitted outward from the rear side (the side closer to light emitter 781) of side portion 784B of inner lens 784 toward inner lens 784. This allows light output from light emitter 781 to be appropriately guided to the front side (i.e., the side of top surface portion 784A of inner lens 784).

In addition, the reflector 785 is located between the light emitter 782 and the side portion 784B of the inner lens 784, and can effectively guide the light output from the light emitter 782 forward (i.e., toward the peripheral decorative portion 788).

Thus, by disposing reflector 785 between light emitter 781 and light emitter 782, the light output from light emitter 781 can be made to enter decorative lens portion 786 via inner lens 784, and the light output from light emitter 782 can be made to enter peripheral decorative portion 788. Note that a reflector similar to reflector 785 may be provided on the side of reflective component 790 relative to light emitter 782 (the side opposite reflector 785).

The reflector 785 does not necessarily have to be a light-opaque component having a color capable of reflecting light, but may be configured to have a light-opaque surface by providing a mirror finish (e.g., chrome plating) to the surfaces on the inner lens 784 side and the light emitter 782 side.

The decorative lens portion 786 is made of a resin (e.g., acrylic resin) having optical transparency (translucency) such as transparent resin, and transmits (guides) the light that has passed through the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784 when the light-emitting body 781 is turned on (when light is output from the light-emitting body 781).

The decorative lens portion 786 includes a top surface portion 786A that overlaps with the front side of the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784 in a front view, and a side surface portion 786B that is connected to the peripheral side of the top surface portion 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decorative lens portion 786 is configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross section as shown in FIG. 18(B). More specifically, the top surface portion 786A is configured as a flat plate extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the side surface portion 786B is configured as a flat plate extending in a substantially vertical direction.

The front surface 786A1 of the top surface 786A is exposed so that it can be directly seen by the player in an area where the protrusion 787 described below is not provided. Therefore, when the light emitter 781 is turned on, the light that passes through the top surface 786A and is emitted from the front surface 786A1 can be seen by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decorative lens unit 786 is configured such that the exposed portion of the top surface 786A is star-shaped when viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 18(A). Therefore, in this configuration, when the light emitter 781 is turned on, the player can see the luminous decorative body 780 that shines in a star shape due to the light emitted from the front surface 786A1 of the top surface 786A. The decorative lens unit 786 functions as the first decorative part that constitutes the main body of the decoration in the luminous decorative body 780.

In particular, in this embodiment, the top surface 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 is configured as a plate with a front surface 786A1 that is approximately flat, so that the luminous decorative body 780 can illuminate the decorative shape (in this embodiment, a star shape) of the decorative lens portion 786, which is the first decorative portion, in a planar manner.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the top surface 786A of the decorative lens unit 786 is configured as a flat plate extending in a substantially horizontal direction, but it may be a plate shaped inclined in a predetermined direction (for example, inclined backward as it approaches downward when viewed from the front). In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the top surface 786A of the decorative lens unit 786 is configured as a flat plate, that is, the front surface 786A1 (the front surface visible to the player) and the rear surface (the surface facing the inner lens 784) are both substantially flat, but either the front surface 786A1 or the rear surface, or each of these surfaces, may be a curved surface, or may be a flat or curved surface including fine irregularities.

The protrusion 787 is made of a resin having the same optical transparency as the decorative lens portion 786, and protrudes forward from the front surface 786A1 of the top surface 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the protrusion 787 is connected to the front surface 786A1 of the top surface 786A by being integrally molded with the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral decorative portion 788 described below. Note that the protrusion 787 may be configured as an independent part from the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral decorative portion 788.

The protrusions 787 are provided at least along the periphery of the top surface 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18(A), the protrusions 787 are provided along the periphery of the top surface 786A, which is configured in a star shape, and are provided in a substantially straight line connecting adjacent recesses in the star shape.

An optical diffusion treatment such as a rough surface treatment (e.g., a grained surface treatment) is applied to the end surface 787A on the front side of the protrusion 787. This allows natural light to be diffused at the end surface 787A, making the end surface 787A appear whitish. Note that instead of rough surface treatment on the end surface 787A, a color that easily reflects light, such as white or a metallic color (e.g., silver or gold), may be printed on the end surface 787A.

The peripheral decorative portion 788 is made of a resin having the same optical transparency as the decorative lens portion 786, and is provided around the entire circumference of the peripheral side (outer side) of the decorative lens portion 786. More specifically, the peripheral decorative portion 788 protrudes outward from the side portion 786B around the entire circumference of the decorative lens portion 786.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the peripheral decorative portion 788 is connected to the side portion 786B by being integrally molded with the decorative lens portion 786 and the protruding portion 787. Note that the peripheral decorative portion 788 may be configured as an independent part from the decorative lens portion 786 and the protruding portion 787.

The front surface 788A of the peripheral decorative portion 788 (the surface on the front side visible to the player) is configured as a substantially horizontal, approximately flat surface. Note that the front surface 788A does not necessarily have to be a substantially horizontal, approximately flat surface, and may be a plane that slopes in a predetermined direction (for example, a plane that slopes rearward as it moves outward when viewed from the front) or a substantially flat surface. The front surface 788A of the peripheral decorative portion 788 may also be a curved surface, or may be a flat or curved surface that includes fine irregularities.

In the example shown in FIG. 18(B), the front surface 788A of the peripheral decorative portion 788 is configured to be located rearward of the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786. Note that the front surface 788A does not necessarily have to be rearward of the front surface 786A1, and may be configured to be located forward of the front surface 786A1, or may be configured to be located approximately in the same position in the front-to-rear direction as the front surface 786A1.

On the other hand, the rear surface 788B (the surface facing the light emitter 782) of the peripheral decorative portion 788 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines away from the substrate 783 as it extends outward. As a result, part of the light output (emitted) forward from the light emitter 782 enters from the rear surface 788B and transmits forward (toward the front surface 788A), and part is reflected at the rear surface 788B and travels rearward and outward, as shown in FIG. 18(B).

As will be described in detail later, the peripheral decorative portion 788 glows with light corresponding to the light output from the light-emitting body 782 (either directly incident light or light reflected by the rear surface 788B and then reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective part 790). Thus, in the light-emitting decorative body 780, the peripheral decorative portion 788 functions as an edge portion serving as a second decorative portion in relation to the shape (star-shaped in this embodiment) of the decorative lens portion 786 serving as the first decorative portion when viewed from the front.

The decorative sheet 789 is made of a resin sheet having one optical transparency (translucency) and configured to the outer shape (star-shaped in this embodiment) of the top surface 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, and is disposed between the top surface 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the top surface 784A of the inner lens 784. The decorative sheet 789 may be configured to be attached to the rear surface of the top surface 786A (the surface facing the inner lens 784) or the front surface of the top surface 784A (the surface facing the decorative lens portion 786), or may be configured to be sandwiched between the rear surface of the top surface 786A and the front surface of the top surface 784A.

The decorative sheet 789 does not necessarily have to be one resin sheet configured to the outer shape of the top surface 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, but may be a plurality of resin sheets divided into the shape of the top surface 786A surrounded by the protrusion 787. For example, in the example shown in Fig. 18(A), the decorative sheet 789 may be configured to be divided into resin sheets each corresponding to five approximate triangles formed on the convex portion side on the star side, and a resin sheet corresponding to one approximate pentagon formed on the center side.

The decorative sheet 789 is configured as a light-transmitting sheet that is colored entirely in a single color (e.g., a single color such as yellow or blue) or multiple colors. This allows the light emitted from the front surface 784A1 of the decorative lens portion 786 to be a color that corresponds to the color of the decorative sheet 789 when the light-emitting body 781 is lit. This allows the player to see the color of the light-emitting decorative body 780 that shines in a star shape with the color of the decorative sheet 789, for example, when the inner lens 784 and the decorative lens portion 786 are both made of transparent resin.

When the decorative sheet 789 is colored in multiple colors, the multiple colors may be colored as independent areas, or the multiple colors may be colored in a gradation. The decorative sheet 789 may also be configured to have a predetermined pattern (such as a design, picture, or text) drawn on it.

The reflective component 790 is a resin component that is located outward from the light emitter 782 and has the function of reflecting the light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788 so that it travels forward and outward.

The reflective component 790 is spaced downward from the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788, and has a front surface 790A that is an inclined surface that, like the rear surface 788B, inclines outwardly so as to move away from the substrate 783.

In the example shown in FIG. 18(B), the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is configured as an inclined surface that is approximately parallel to the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788. Note that the front surface 790A does not necessarily need to be approximately parallel to the rear surface 788B, and the front surface 790A and the rear surface 788B may be configured to be non-parallel (i.e., the inclination angle of the front surface 790A is different from the inclination angle of the rear surface 788B).

The reflective component 790 is positioned so that a portion of the front surface 790A overlaps the peripheral decorative portion 788 in a front view, and the remainder of the front surface 790A does not overlap the peripheral decorative portion 788 in a front view (i.e., can be directly seen in a front view). The width of the area of the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 that does not overlap the peripheral decorative portion 788 in a front view (non-overlapping area X3) may be, for example, approximately 3 mm or more, and preferably approximately 5 mm or more.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the light output forward from the light emitter 782 can travel outward while reflecting between the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative part 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective part 790 (more specifically, the reflective film part 790B described later), and the inclination angles of the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative part 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective part 790, and the overlap amount (overlap width) between the rear surface 788B and the front surface 790A when viewed from the front are set so that part of the light reflected at the front surface 790A enters from the rear surface 788B (e.g., arrow J1) and part travels outward from the peripheral decorative part 788 without entering the peripheral decorative part 788 (e.g., arrow J2).

A reflective film portion 790B that is opaque to light and capable of reflecting light is formed on a front surface 790A of the reflective component 790. The reflective film portion 790B is a coating film of a substantially uniform thickness that is formed by, for example, depositing, applying, or printing a glittering pigment such as a metallic pigment.

The reflective film portion 790B may be configured in a single color or in multiple colors. The color of the reflective film portion 790B may be the same as or similar to the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789. By configuring it in this way, a sense of unity can be given to the color of the luminous decorative body 780, and unnatural or overly gaudy color schemes can be prevented.

As described above, the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is an inclined surface that inclines away from the substrate 783 as it moves outward. Therefore, the reflective component 790, which has a reflective film portion 790B provided on the front surface 790A, can reflect light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788 so that the light travels forward and outward by being received by the reflective film portion 790B.

In the following description, the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B based on the light from the light emitter 782 (i.e., the light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788 and reflected by the reflective film portion 790B) is also referred to as "specific reflected light."

According to the luminous decorative body 780 configured as described above, the luminous body 782 is provided on the inner side (the side closer to the decorative lens portion 786) of the area that overlaps with the rear side (the side closer to the substrate 783) of the peripheral decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front, so that the light output from the luminous body 782 is directly incident on the inner side (the side closer to the decorative lens portion 786) of the peripheral decorative portion 788.

In contrast, the reflective film portion 790B (more specifically, a part of the inner side of the reflective film portion 790B) of the reflective component 790 is disposed in a position that is outward of the light-emitting body 782 in the area that overlaps with the rear side of the peripheral decorative portion 788 in a front view. As described above, the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 are configured so that a part of the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B (specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B) can be incident from the rear surface 788B, so that a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B can be incident on the outer side of the area of the peripheral decorative portion 788 where the light output from the light-emitting body 782 is directly incident.

Therefore, of the light incident on the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788, the direct light from the light emitter 782 passes through the inward direct light transmission area X1, and the specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B passes through the reflected light transmission area X2, which is on the outer side of the direct light transmission area X1.

In FIG. 18(A), a straight boundary line G is illustrated as the boundary between the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2, but the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 do not need to be clearly separated by the boundary line G, and a region through which both the direct light from the light emitter 782 and the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B are transmitted may exist near the boundary line G.

In addition, the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 are configured so that a portion of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B can travel outward from the peripheral decorative portion 788 (i.e., outward from the reflected light transmission area X2) without entering the peripheral decorative portion 788, so that a portion of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B can travel through the air as light that is directly visible to the player outward from the peripheral decorative portion 788.

Next, we will explain the operation and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a reflector 785 is provided between the light emitters 781 and 782, so that the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral decorative portion 788 can be made to shine independently by the light output from the light emitters 781 and 782, respectively. Therefore, the peripheral decorative portion 788 can be made to shine independently as an edge portion of the shape of the decorative lens portion 786 when viewed from the front (in this embodiment, a star shape).

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a peripheral decorative portion 788 capable of transmitting light output from the light emitter 782 is provided on the peripheral side of the decorative lens portion 786. The peripheral decorative portion 788 is configured so that on the inner side (the side closer to the decorative lens portion 786), direct light from the light emitter 782 transmits through the direct light transmission region X1, and on the outer side, light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 (specific reflected light) transmits through the reflected light transmission region X2.

This allows the player to see different light (e.g., brightness, color, etc.) in the direct light transmission area X1, where light based on direct light from the light emitter 782 is emitted, and the reflected light transmission area X2, where light based on specific reflected light by the reflective film section 790B is emitted. Therefore, the peripheral decorative section 788, which appears to glow based on the light output from the light emitter 782 (direct light and specific reflected light by the reflective film section 790B), can have different lighting on the inner and outer sides, improving the decorativeness of the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral decorative section 788 (decorativeness of the light passing through the peripheral decorative section 788).

In addition, since the intensity of reflected light is generally smaller than the intensity of incident light, in a configuration in which direct light from the light emitter 782 passes through the direct light transmission region X1 on the inner side of the peripheral decorative portion 788, and specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 passes through the reflected light transmission region X2 on the outer side, the intensity of the light passing through the reflected light transmission region X2 can be made weaker than the intensity of the light passing through the direct light transmission region X1. This makes it possible to make the outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 788 appear to shine less brightly than the inner side. Therefore, the brightness of the peripheral decorative portion 788 can be varied, and in this respect as well, the decorativeness of the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral decorative portion 788 can be improved.

By improving the decorativeness of the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral decorative portion 788 as described above, the light from the light emitter 781 is clearly separated from the decorative lens portion 786, which shines in a planar manner, and the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral decorative portion 788 can be made to attract more attention. This can increase the attention to the gaming machine.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, since the light passing through the direct light transmission area X1 and the reflected light transmission area X2 is both light (direct light or specific reflected light) corresponding to the light output from the light emitter 782, there is no need to provide separate light sources for the light passing through the direct light transmission area X1 and the light source for the light passing through the reflected light transmission area X2 (i.e., the light source can be shared), which reduces manufacturing costs and prevents the arrangement of the light sources from becoming complicated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective part 790 is incident (enters) on the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788, and a part of the specific reflected light is configured to proceed as light that can be directly seen by the player on the outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 788 (i.e., on the outer side of the reflected light transmission area X2) without entering the peripheral decorative portion 788. Depending on whether the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B passes through the peripheral decorative portion 788 (more specifically, the reflected light transmission area X2) or proceeds on the outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 788, the way the light appears to the player (for example, brightness, brilliance, etc.) can change, so that the decorativeness of the luminous decorative body 780 formed by the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured so that a portion of the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 does not overlap the peripheral decorative portion 788 on the outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front (i.e., it is exposed and directly visible to the player when viewed from the front), so that the player can see a mixture of natural light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B (hereinafter, this reflected light is also referred to as "natural reflected light") and specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B on the outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 788. This makes it possible to give a different impression than when the only light that the player can see on the outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 788 is natural reflected light, for example, an impressive sense of brilliance (metallic feel).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decorative sheet 789 is disposed on the rear side of the top surface 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, so even if the decorative lens portion 786, the peripheral decorative portion 788, and the protruding portion 787 are integrally molded using transparent resin, it is possible to make only the decorative lens portion 786 (top surface 786A) shine with the color of the decorative sheet 789. Therefore, there is no need to manufacture the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral decorative portion 788 separately, which reduces manufacturing costs. Also, there is no need to print a specified color or pattern directly on the rear surface side of the top surface 786A.

When the color of the decorative sheet 789 described below, which has optical transparency, or the main color in the decorative sheet 789 is a relatively dark color such as blue, it is preferable for the light-emitting body 781 to emit light in the same color or a similar color as the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color in the decorative sheet 789 (for example, a bluish color such as light blue when the decorative sheet 789 is blue). This makes it possible to prevent the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color in the decorative sheet 789 from appearing lighter than the original color, compared to when the light-emitting body 781 emits light in a single white color.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 18 (A) and 18 (B), the protrusion 787 is provided along the peripheral edge of the top surface 786A of the decorative lens portion 786. Since the decorative sheet 789 is provided on the back side of the decorative lens portion 786, the protrusion 787 can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative sheet 789. This can improve the decorative feel provided by the protrusion 787.

In particular, the front end surface 787A is treated with a light diffusion process, so that it appears whitish due to the diffusion of natural light. This allows the decorative feel of the protrusion 787, whose end surface 787A appears whitish, to be improved by configuring the main color of the decorative sheet 789 (for example, the color that colors the largest area of the decorative sheet 789) to a color that reflects less light than white.

In addition, the protrusion 787 that protrudes forward from the decorative lens portion 786 is provided along the peripheral edge of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, so that the shape of the decorative lens portion 786 when viewed from the front (in this embodiment, a star shape) can be three-dimensionally decorated by the protrusion 787. This can improve the decorativeness of the decoration of the luminous decorative body 780.

In addition, the protrusion 787 provided along the periphery of the top surface 786A of the decorative lens part 786 is located between the exposed part of the top surface 786A of the decorative lens part 786 and the peripheral side decorative part 788, so that the protrusion 787 becomes a clear boundary between the shape of the decorative lens part 786 in a front view, which is the first decorative part in the decoration of the luminous decorative body 780, and the peripheral side decorative part 788, which is the edge part as the second decorative part relative to the first decorative part. This allows each part to be clearly illuminated when the first decorative part and the second decorative part (edge part) in the decoration of the luminous decorative body 780 are illuminated independently.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 19. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment, an image equivalent to (corresponding to) an image including a part of a character that appears in a suggestive performance that is displayed after a predetermined reach display is displayed is displayed in a suggestive performance that is displayed after a reach display different from the reach display, thereby increasing the attention of the player.

The "suggestive effect" is an effect that suggests the degree of possibility of transitioning to a special game state after the unit game involving the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (hereinafter also referred to as the "expectation of transition to a special game state"), that is, the degree of possibility that the decorative symbol 1621 displayed in a variably manner on the decorative symbol display device 479 will stop at a stopping symbol that will be a jackpot symbol.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to fourth embodiments described above will be given the same reference numerals and will not be described again. In addition, the configuration described below as the fifth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the first to fourth embodiments described above, or may be provided in place of a portion of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the first to fourth embodiments described above.

FIG. 19(A) to FIG. 19(D) are screen images showing an example of an effect image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the fifth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 479 is configured as an image display device (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying images. In FIG. 19(B), for reference, the movement direction of the image 822 is shown by an arrow.

In the decorative pattern display device 479 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19 (FIG. 19(A) to FIG. 19(D)), a decorative pattern 1621 is displayed as an image. Like the decorative pattern 621 (see FIG. 13), the decorative pattern 1621 is a decorative pattern for displaying the stopping patterns (jackpot pattern, losing pattern) corresponding to the lottery results of the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) on the decorative pattern display device 479.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decorative pattern 1621 is composed of a main pattern that can form a jackpot pattern, similar to the main pattern 621A (see FIG. 13). Note that the decorative pattern 1621 may be composed of a main pattern and a sub-pattern that cannot form a jackpot pattern, similar to the sub-pattern 621B.

The main pattern constituting decorative pattern 1621 is, for example, configured as a pattern including numerical information indicating multiple types of numerical values (e.g., numerical values from "1" to "9"). Note that the main pattern constituting decorative pattern 1621 may be configured as a pattern including not only numerical values indicating numerical values, but also both numerical values and characters corresponding to the numerical values as numerical information.

The decorative pattern 1621 is displayed variably on the decorative pattern display device 479 in a unit game related to the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern), and then is displayed (stopped) as a fixed stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery. The display position of the decorative pattern 1621 does not necessarily have to be approximately the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479, and the decorative pattern 1621 may be displayed at various positions within the display area. For example, the decorative pattern 1621 may be displayed on a corner side (e.g., the upper right corner side) of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479 as shown in FIG. 19.

In the decorative pattern display device 479 of this embodiment, when a reach display occurs in the changing display of the decorative pattern 1621, a predetermined suggestive performance using a video or image can be displayed after the changing display ends.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a reach display consisting of an odd number (for example, a reach display consisting of "7") is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621, a suggestive effect in which a specified character appears (hereinafter, this suggestive effect is also referred to as a "first suggestive effect") is executed with a specified probability after the reach display is displayed. Note that the first suggestive effect in which a specified character appears may be an effect that is executed (displayed) only for a specific reach display, such as a so-called super reach.

The probability of executing the first suggestive performance when a reach display consisting of an odd number is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621 (i.e., the above-mentioned "predetermined probability") may be any appropriate value greater than 0%, and may be, for example, a probability less than 100% (e.g., 30% or 60%), or may be the probability that the first suggestive performance will always be displayed (i.e., 100%). The selection of whether or not to execute the first suggestive performance is performed under the control of the sub-control board 940.

Whether the reach display by the decorative pattern 1621 is composed of odd or even numerical values depends on, for example, the jackpot pattern random number acquired by the main control board 920 at the time of the initial winning of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern). More specifically, if the stopping pattern determined by the main control board 920 based on the jackpot pattern random number is a jackpot pattern, the sub-control board 940 determines a reach display composed of odd or even numerical values according to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot pattern. On the other hand, if the stopping pattern determined by the main control board 920 based on the jackpot pattern random number is a losing pattern that constitutes a losing reach, the sub-control board 940 determines a reach display composed of a predetermined numerical value regardless of whether it is an odd or even number.

For the first suggestion effect, multiple types of effect patterns are prepared according to the expectation (or reliability) of a transition to the special game state. The expectation of a transition to the special game state set for each effect pattern is determined by the probability of winning in the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery), the selection probability in the selection table referred to if the special pattern lottery is won (hereinafter also referred to as the "win selection table"), and the selection probability in the selection table referred to if the special pattern lottery is not won (hereinafter also referred to as the "loss selection table").

Each video data (image data) corresponding to each performance pattern of the first suggestion performance is stored in a specified area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in association with each performance pattern. The sub-control board 940 selects a performance pattern of the first suggestion performance, and displays (executes) the first suggestion performance of the selected performance pattern on the decorative pattern display device 479.

The timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the presentation pattern of the first suggestion presentation may be the timing at which the sub-control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 a variation pattern command corresponding to a unit game related to the target special symbol (i.e., the variation display of the special symbol), or may be a specified timing between the reception of the variation pattern command and the display of the reach display by the decorative symbol 1621. Also, in a configuration in which a period during which an operating device such as the pressing operation device 261 can be operated in response to the display of the first suggestion presentation is provided, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to select the presentation pattern of the first suggestion presentation at the end of that period.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, each presentation pattern in the first suggestion presentation is configured so that the type of character that appears differs depending on the expectation (or reliability) for a transition to a special game state that is set for that presentation pattern. The player can relatively recognize the level of expectation for a transition to a special game state based on the type of character that appears in the first suggestion presentation.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, characters that can appear in the first suggestion performance include, for example, short-haired characters CA1 and CA2 holding flags 801A and 801B in both hands as shown in Figures 19(A) and 19(C), and ponytailed character CA3 holding flags 801A and 801B in both hands as shown in Figure 19(D). Note that the difference between characters CA1 and CA2 is the pattern drawn on flags 801A and 801B. In other words, characters CA1 and CA2 differ in whether the pattern drawn on flags 801A and 801B is a cat or a star.

For the first suggestion effect in which character CA1 appears, the expectation of a transition to a special game state is set to, for example, 50%, and for the first suggestion effect in which character CA2 appears, the expectation of a transition to a special game state is set to, for example, 10%. Also, for the first suggestion effect in which character CA3 appears, the expectation of a transition to a special game state is set to, for example, 30%.

The player can recognize the expectation level set for each character from the instruction manual distributed for the pachinko machine 100, or can recognize the relative magnitude of the expectation level set for each character from experience. As a result, for example, out of characters CA1, CA2, and CA3, when character CA1 appears in the first suggestion performance, the player can have the most hope for a transition to the special game state, and when character CA3 appears, the player can have less hope than character CA1, but more hope than character CA2.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a reach display consisting of an even number (for example, a reach display consisting of "6") is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621, after the reach display is displayed, a suggestion effect (hereinafter, this suggestion effect is also referred to as the "second suggestion effect") is executed with a predetermined probability, in which an image including a part of a character that suggests the expectation (reliability) of a transition to a special game state appears in the first suggestion effect.

The probability of executing the second suggestive effect when a reach display consisting of an even number is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621 (i.e., the above-mentioned "predetermined probability") may be any appropriate value greater than 0%, and may be, for example, a probability less than 100% (e.g., 30% or 60%), or may be the probability that the second suggestive effect will always be displayed (i.e., 100%). The selection of whether or not to execute the second suggestive effect is performed under the control of the sub-control board 940.

In the example shown in FIG. 19(B), after a reach display consisting of a "6" is displayed by decorative pattern 1621, a second suggestive performance is executed in which images 821, 822, and 823 including parts of character CA1 appear (are displayed) simultaneously. More specifically, image 821 is an image including the left eye portion of character CA1 in FIG. 19(A), image 822 is an image including the left hand of character CA1 and part of flag 801A held in said left hand, and image 523 is an image including the button portion of the jacket of character CA1.

In the second suggestion presentation, in which an image including part of a character (such as image 821) appears, the player can be made to recognize the relative degree of expectation (level of expectation) for a transition to a special game state depending on the type of character that corresponds to the image that appears.

In this embodiment, the expectation level for a transition to a special game state for a character corresponding to an image that appears in the second suggestion performance is set to be the same as the expectation level when that character appears in the first suggestion performance. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19(B), a player who views images 821, 822, and 823 that appear in the second suggestion performance can recognize the same expectation level as when character CA1 corresponding to these images 821, 822, and 823 appears in the first suggestion performance.

Images such as images 821, 822, and 823 that are made to appear in the second suggestive presentation, i.e., images including a portion of a character that suggests the expectation of a transition to a special game state in the first suggestive presentation, are generated based on an image cut out from video data (image data) that corresponds to the presentation pattern of the first suggestive presentation and is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 940. Here, an image cut out from video data (image data) refers to a portion of a video or image that has been selected in advance from a video or image composed of video data or image data, and the expression "cut out" may also be other expressions such as "pre-selected" or "extracted," and the same applies below.

More specifically, the image to be displayed in the second suggestion effect is generated by cutting out the relevant area from a specific frame of image that contains a character from among the frames constituting the video data that correspond to the effect pattern in which a character appears that suggests the expectation of a transition to a special game state in the first suggestion effect, and based on the cut-out image (for example, by applying processing such as deformation or enlargement/reduction to the cut-out image).

For example, image 821 is generated based on an image obtained by cutting out a portion of area AR1 from an image of a frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19(A) in the video data corresponding to the performance pattern in which character CA1 appears. Similarly, images 822 and 823 are generated based on images obtained by cutting out portions of areas AR2 and AR3, respectively, from the image of the frame. As will be described in detail later, images 821, 822, and 823 are generated by applying processing such as deformation and enlargement/reduction to the images obtained by cutting out portions of areas AR1, AR2, and AR3.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, for the presentation pattern in which character CA2 appears, an image to be made to appear in the second suggestion presentation is generated based on an image obtained by cutting out each portion of areas AR1, AR2, and AR3 from an image of a frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19 (C) in the video data corresponding to the presentation pattern in which character CA2 appears. Similarly, for the presentation pattern in which character CA3 appears, an image to be made to appear in the second suggestion presentation is generated based on an image obtained by cutting out each portion of areas AR1, AR2, and AR3 from an image of a frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19 (D) in the video data corresponding to the presentation pattern in which character CA3 appears.

It is preferable that the area to be cut out from the image in the video data of the first suggestive performance is an area where the cut-out image can suggest the type of character. For example, it is preferable that the area includes the character's eyes, the pattern of the flag 801A held by the character in the character's left hand, the jacket worn by the character, and the buttons of the jacket, as in areas AR1, AR2, and AR3.

In the following, an image including a part of a character suggesting the expectation for a transition to a special game state, which is extracted from video data corresponding to the presentation pattern of the first suggestion presentation (for example,
The image obtained by cutting out a portion of the area AR1 is also referred to as a "cut-out image."

The cut-out image is generated under the control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 selects one presentation pattern from among the presentation patterns prepared for the first suggested presentation, and generates a cut-out image from an image of a specific frame in the video data stored in the ROM in correspondence with the selected presentation pattern.

The selection of the presentation pattern to be used in generating the cut-out image is performed by referring to the hit selection table or miss selection table prepared for selecting the presentation pattern for the first suggestion presentation, in the same manner as when selecting the presentation pattern for the first suggestion presentation. This control is executed by the sub-control board 940.

The frame used to generate the cut-out image (i.e., a specific frame including a character that indicates the expectation of a transition to a special game state) is specified in advance by the frame number and time in the video data. In addition, the cut-out area such as area AR1 in the image of the frame to be cut out is specified in advance by the coordinates on the image.

The cutout area does not necessarily have to be a rectangular area like area AR1, but may be a non-rectangular area, such as a circle. The number of cutout areas may be one or more. If multiple cutout areas are provided, the shapes of the cutout areas do not necessarily have to all be the same shape (for example, all rectangular) like areas AR1 to AR3, but may be a mixture of areas of two or more different shapes.

The sub-control board 940 generates a cut-out image by cutting out a pre-specified area from an image of a pre-specified frame. The timing at which the sub-control board 940 generates the cut-out image may be the timing at which the sub-control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 a variation pattern command corresponding to a unit game related to the target special symbol (i.e., a variation display of the special symbol), or may be a predetermined timing between the reception of the variation pattern command and the display of a reach display by the decorative symbol 1621. In a configuration in which a period during which an operating device such as the pressing operating device 261 can be operated in response to the display of the second suggestive performance is provided, the sub-control board 940 may generate the cut-out image at the end of the period.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, an image cut out from video data corresponding to the presentation pattern of the first suggestion presentation (i.e., a cut-out image) is processed by deformation, enlargement, reduction, etc., and the processed cut-out image (e.g., image 821, etc.) is displayed in the second suggestion presentation. The processing of the cut-out image (e.g., deformation, enlargement, reduction, etc.) and the display of the processed cut-out image are controlled by the sub-control board 940.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19(B), images 821, 822, and 823 that appear (are displayed) in the second suggestion performance are not rectangular in shape corresponding to the shapes of cut-out areas AR1, AR2, and AR3, but are displayed as images that have been deformed into a diamond shape when viewed from the front, with the front appearing to face in a lower right direction. In this way, by displaying images 821, 822, and 823 so that they all appear to face in approximately the same direction that is different from the front direction, a more orderly impression can be given than when at least one of these images 821, 822, and 823 is displayed in a different display orientation from the other images.

In the example shown in Fig. 19(B), images 821, 822, and 823 that appear in the second suggestion performance are images that are enlarged or reduced at different enlargement or reduction ratios (enlargement or reduction ratios) for the corresponding cut-out images. Specifically, the sizes of the cut-out images increase in the order of the image cut out of the area AR1, the image cut out of the area AR3, and the image cut out of the area AR2, while these cut-out images are enlarged or reduced in the order of image 822, image 822, and image 823.

It is not necessary to enlarge or reduce all of the cut-out images, and some of the cut-out images may be enlarged or reduced at different enlargement/reduction ratios, or all at the same enlargement/reduction ratio. Also, some or all of the cut-out images may be enlarged or reduced at different enlargement/reduction ratios in the vertical and horizontal directions.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a plurality of processed cut-out images (e.g., images 821, 822, 823) are configured to appear (display) simultaneously in the second suggestive performance. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19(B), images 821, 822, 823 based on images cut out (cut-out images) from the image of the frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19(A) are all displayed facing in a lower right direction, lined up from front to back in the order of image 823, image 821, image 822.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when multiple processed cut-out images appear simultaneously in the second suggestion performance, one processed cut-out image and the other processed cut-out images are displayed so as to overlap at least partially (i.e., to appear to overlap). Note that the display is also controlled by the sub-control board 940.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19(B), a part of image 822 overlaps a part of image 821, and a part of image 821 overlaps image 823. As a result, the content (drawing content) depicted in the area where image 821 overlaps in image 822 and the area where image 823 overlaps in image 821 becomes difficult to see (impossible to see).

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when one processed cut-out image and another processed cut-out image are displayed so that they overlap at least partially, the display position of the image in which the drawing content is difficult to see due to the overlap is moved, thereby making the drawing content that was difficult to see visible. Note that the display control is also performed by the sub-control board 940.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19(B), after a portion of image 822 and a portion of image 821 are displayed overlapping, the display position of image 822, where some of the drawn content has become difficult to see due to the overlap of image 821, is moved to the left (in the direction of arrow M). As the overlap between images 822 and 821 decreases, the area in image 822 where the drawn content is visible increases. This allows the player to recognize that image 822 is, for example, an image including a left hand and part of flag 801A held in the left hand, and that flag 801A has a cat pattern drawn on it.

Here, character CA1 is configured the same as character CA2 except for the pattern drawn on flag 801A, so if the player can recognize that the pattern drawn on flag 801A is a cat by the movement of image 822, he or she can deduce that the character corresponding to the image displayed in the second suggestion performance is character CA1. Therefore, the second suggestion performance is configured to make it easier to guess the expectation level for a transition to a special game state depending on the elapsed time since the processed cut-out image appeared, improving the playability of guessing the expectation level for a transition to a special game state in the second suggestion performance.

Next, we will explain the operation and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, an image including a part of a character suggesting the expectation of a transition to a special game state in the first suggestive effect, which is displayed in the second suggestive effect, is generated based on an image cut out from video data corresponding to the presentation pattern of the first suggestive effect, i.e., the video data corresponding to the presentation pattern of the first suggestive effect is used to generate the image displayed in the second suggestive effect. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of video data (image data) stored and makes it easier to reduce the need to develop presentation images for each of the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, thereby reducing development costs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, an image corresponding to an image including a part of a character suggesting the expectation of a transition to a special game state, which is cut out from video data corresponding to the presentation pattern of the first suggestion presentation (specifically, an image obtained by subjecting the cut-out image to processing such as deformation and enlargement/reduction), is displayed in the second suggestion presentation, so that the expectation of a transition to a special game state suggested by the character that appears in the first suggestion presentation can be similarly suggested in the second suggestion presentation. Furthermore, since the suggestion of said expectation by the first suggestion presentation and the suggestion of said expectation by the second suggestion presentation are realized with different appearances, it is possible to increase the variety of suggestion presentations while suppressing the cost of developing presentation images for each of the second suggestion presentations.

Here, the image displayed in the second suggestion effect is an image equivalent to an image including a part of a character that suggests the expectation of a transition to the special game state that appears in the first suggestion effect, so the amount of information contained in the image is less than when the entire character is displayed, making it difficult to guess the character that corresponds to the image from the image displayed in the second suggestion effect.

As a result, the difficulty of inferring the expectation of a transition to the special game state from the content of each suggestive effect differs between when the first suggestive effect is displayed and when the second suggestive effect is displayed, and this improves the gameplay of inferring the expectation of a transition to the special game state from the content of each suggestive effect when the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is displayed, thereby increasing the attention paid to the gaming machine.

In particular, since the second suggestion effect is configured to display an image that has been processed by transforming or enlarging or reducing an image cut out from video data that corresponds to the presentation pattern of the first suggestion effect, it is possible to suitably make it difficult to guess the character that corresponds to the image displayed in the second suggestion effect. In this respect, it is possible to suitably improve the gameplay in which the expectation of a transition to a special game state can be guessed from the content of each suggestion effect when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is displayed.

In addition, since each image corresponding to a plurality of cut-out images cut out from a plurality of regions is displayed simultaneously in the second suggestion performance, it is easier to guess the character corresponding to the image from the image displayed in the second suggestion performance compared to when a single cut-out image is displayed. This prevents the character corresponding to the image from becoming too difficult to guess from the image displayed in the second suggestion performance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when multiple processed cut-out images appear simultaneously in the second suggestive performance, one processed cut-out image and the other processed cut-out images are displayed so as to overlap at least partially (i.e., to appear to overlap), making it difficult for the player to recognize the content of the overlapped image. In this respect, it is possible to suitably make it difficult to guess the character corresponding to the image displayed in the second suggestive performance from the image, and therefore it is possible to suitably improve the playability of guessing the expectation for a transition to a special game state from the content of each suggestive performance when the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance is displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when one processed cut-out image and another processed cut-out image are displayed so that they overlap at least partially, the display position of the image whose drawing content is difficult to see due to the overlap is moved, thereby making the drawing content that was difficult to see visible. Therefore, the difficulty of inferring the expectation of a transition to a special game state from the content of the second suggestive performance can be varied depending on the amount of time that has passed since the multiple processed cut-out images first appeared simultaneously in the second suggestive performance. This can improve the playability of inferring the expectation of a transition to a special game state from the content of each suggestive performance when the second suggestive performance is displayed.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 20 to 22. In the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment, instead of the push operation device 261 (see Figure 1) provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, a push operation device 1261 is provided in which the stroke amount by the push operation is variable by an operating mechanism 860.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-mentioned first to fifth embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below as the sixth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to fifth embodiments, or may be provided in place of a portion of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to fifth embodiments.

Figure 20 is a schematic diagram for explaining the configuration and operation of the push operation device 1261 provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment. Figure 21 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the appearance of the push operation device 1261 according to the operation position. Note that in Figure 20, in order to facilitate understanding of the internal configuration of the push operation device 1261, the base 851 and operated portion 852 of the button operation unit 850, the operation cover member 870, and the bottom member 880 are each illustrated in cross section. Hatching of these cross sections has been omitted.

20 and 21, for reference, the position of the surface of the pachinko machine 100 (more specifically, the surface that the player can contact around the operation cover member 870 in the front block 102) is illustrated by a dashed line Q. In other words, the side above the dashed line Q indicates that a part of the operation device 1261 (the operation cover member 870) is exposed (protruding) upward from the surface of the front block 102, and the side below the dashed line Q indicates that the operation device 1261 is buried below the surface of the front block 102.
In addition, in Figure 21, in order to make the drawing easier to understand, the bottom member 880 is omitted from the illustration, and the area below the dotted line Q in the operating device 1261 (i.e., the area buried below the surface of the front block 102) is illustrated by a dotted line.

The push operation device 1261 is a device that can be pushed by a player, similar to the push operation device 261. As shown in FIG. 20 , the push operation device 1261 includes a button operation unit 850, an actuation mechanism 860, an operation cover member 870, and a bottom member 880.
The button operation unit 850 includes a base 851, an operated portion 852, and a spring member 853. The base 851 is configured in a cylindrical shape having a bottom surface at the lower end side. The operated portion 852 is configured in a columnar shape that can be accommodated on the inner periphery side of the base 851. The spring member 853 is, for example, a coil spring, and is interposed between the base 851 and the operated portion 852 to support the operated portion 852 with respect to the base 851. The spring member 853 functions as a biasing means that biases the operated portion 852 upward.

A protrusion 851A that protrudes inward is provided on the upper end side of the base 851, and a protrusion 852A that protrudes outward is provided on the lower end side of the operated part in a position that overlaps with the protrusion 851A when viewed from above.

As a result, the operated portion 852, which is biased upward by the spring member 853, is maintained in a state in which the protruding portion 852A abuts against the protruding portion 851A from below, with the protruding portion 851A of the base 851 acting as a stopper. In the button operating portion 850, the position where the protruding portion 852A abuts against the protruding portion 851A of the base 851 from below becomes the initial position of the operated portion 852.

When the operated portion 852 is pushed in (i.e., when the operated portion 852 is pressed downward), the operated portion 852 moves downward against the biasing force of the spring member 853 (i.e., while deforming the spring member 853). After that, when the pushing operation on the operated portion 852 ends (i.e., when the operated portion 852 becomes unloaded), the operated portion 852 returns to its initial position by the biasing force of the spring member 853.

The button operation unit 850 is equipped with a detection sensor 854 that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the sub-control board 940 when the operated part 852, which has moved downward by a pressing operation, is located at a predetermined position. The detection sensor 854 is, for example, an optical proximity sensor. Hereinafter, the position of the operated part 852 detected by the detection sensor 854 is also referred to as the "maximum pressing position of the operated part 852 by the spring member 853". The detection sensor 854 outputs a high-level signal when the operated part 852 reaches the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853, and outputs a low-level signal when the operated part 852 moves from the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853.

The sub-control board 940 determines that the operated part 852 has reached the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853 when the signal received from the detection sensor 854 rises to a high level signal, and determines that the operated part 852 has moved from the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853 when the signal falls to a low level signal.

When the signal received from the detection sensor 854 rises to a high level signal, the sub-control board 940 sets the maximum pressure position flag (a part of the RAM) to ON. When the signal received from the detection sensor 854 falls to a low level signal, the sub-control board 940 sets the maximum pressure position flag to OFF. As a result, when the maximum pressure position flag is set to ON, the sub-control board 940 determines that the operated portion 852 is located at the maximum pressure position by the spring member 853.

The actuation mechanism 860 is provided below the button operation unit 850. As shown in FIG. 20, the actuation mechanism 860 includes a rack 861, which is a rod-shaped body on a flat plate with teeth cut, a pinion (gear) 862 that meshes with the teeth of the rack 861, and a motor 863 for rotating the pinion 862. The motor 863 is, for example, a DC motor.

The operating mechanism 860 rotates (drives) the motor 863 to rotate the pinion 862, thereby moving the position of the button operation unit 850 in a direction that follows the tooth trace direction of the rack 861 and corresponds to the rotation direction of the motor 863, without the player operating the operated unit 852.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the operating mechanism 860 can move the button operating unit 850 in approximately the same direction (i.e., up and down) as the operated unit 852 moves due to deformation (compression or restoration by bias) of the spring member 853. The button operating unit 850 can be moved up and down within the movement range of the rack 861 relative to the pinion 862 in the operating mechanism 860.

The actuation mechanism 860 is equipped with an encoder (not shown) capable of detecting the rotation direction, rotation position, and rotation speed of the motor 863. When controlling the movement (position change) of the button operation unit 850 by the actuation mechanism 860, the sub-control board 940 detects the detection result by the encoder and controls the operation of the motor 863 according to the current arrangement position.

The operating mechanism 860 is configured to be able to hold (maintain) the button operation unit 850 in a predetermined position by controlling the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 so that the detection result by the encoder is constant. This allows the unloaded button operation unit 850 (button operation unit 850 in a state in which the operated unit 852 is not operated) in which the player is not touching the operation cover member 870 to be held (maintained) in a predetermined position within the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860. The position in which the unloaded button operation unit 850 is held by the operating mechanism 860 is also referred to as the "neutral position".

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the operating mechanism 860 is configured so that, when a certain condition is met, the unloaded button operation unit 850 is held in a position that corresponds to the met condition, out of multiple positions that are predetermined as neutral positions of the button operation unit 850. In other words, the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 is configured to change depending on the met condition.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the height of the button operation unit 850 in the neutral position (more specifically, the height from the surface of the pachinko machine 100) is configured to become higher as the number of reserved unit games related to the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) increases.

When the button operation unit 850 is in the neutral position, the push operation device 1261 is also in the neutral position, so in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the height of the push operation device 1261 in the neutral position also increases as the number of reserved unit games related to the special symbol increases.

As described above, the actuation mechanism 860 is configured to hold the button operation unit 850 in a predetermined position by the torque (holding force) of the motor 863. Therefore, when a force exceeding the torque is applied to the button operation unit 850, the actuation mechanism 860 is operated by the force without electrically driving the motor 863, and the button operation unit 850 can be moved in the direction of the force.

For example, when a downward force exceeding the torque is applied to the button operation unit 850 (i.e., when the button operation unit 850 is pressed down with a force exceeding the torque), the button operation unit 850 can be moved downward by the force. Also, when an upward force exceeding the torque is applied to the button operation unit 850 (i.e., when the button operation unit 850 is pulled up with a force exceeding the torque), the button operation unit 850 can be moved upward by the force.

As a result, in the pressing operation device 1261 of this embodiment, the stroke amount due to the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 can be set to the sum of the stroke amount S1 of the operated part 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853 (i.e., the movement amount from the initial position of the operated part 852 in the button operation part 850 to the maximum pressing position) and the stroke amount S2 of the button operation part 850 by the operating mechanism 860 (the movement amount from the neutral position of the button operation part 850 to the position which is the lower end of the movement range of the button operation part 850 by the operating mechanism 860).

The operation cover member 870 is a member that covers the button operation unit 850 from the outside, and is configured in a cylindrical shape with an operation surface on the surface at the upper end side. The operation cover member 870 is translucent, and is configured to be able to transmit light emitted by a light-emitting body (not shown) such as an LED arranged inside the operation cover member 870 (e.g., the base 851 of the button operation unit 850, etc.).

The back surface of the operation cover member 870 (i.e., the surface facing the button operation unit 850) abuts against the operated portion 852 of the button operation unit 850, so when the player performs a pressing operation on the operation surface of the operation cover member 870, the operation cover member 870 and the operated portion 852 move downward together.

As a result, the pressing operation performed by the player on the operating surface of the operation cover member 870 becomes a pressing operation on the operated portion 852, and the operated portion 852 can be moved downward against the biasing force of the spring member 853, and the button operating portion 850 can be moved downward by the operation of the operating mechanism 860.

As shown in FIG. 21, a reserved number display section 870A is provided on the surface of the operation cover member 870. The reserved number display section 870A has numbers from "0" to "8" that correspond to the reserved number of unit games related to the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and lines as scales that correspond to each of these numbers.

In the reserved number display section 870A, the numbers corresponding to the reserved number of unit games related to the special pattern are arranged in ascending order from top to bottom, and when the button operation section 850 is in the neutral position corresponding to the current reserved number, the number corresponding to that reserved number is displayed in an arrangement that is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100 (dotted line Q).

As a result, for example, when the number of reserved plays for a unit game related to a special symbol is zero, as shown in FIG. 21(A), the button operation unit 850 is placed in a neutral position corresponding to that reserved number (i.e., the reserved number that is zero), and only the number "0" corresponding to that reserved number depicted on the reserved number display unit 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100.

For example, when the number of reserved plays for a unit game related to a special symbol is 3, as shown in FIG. 21(B), the button operation unit 850 is placed in the neutral position corresponding to that reserved number (i.e., the reserved number is 3), and the number "3" corresponding to that reserved number depicted on the reserved number display unit 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100. As a result, the numbers from "0" to "3" are exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100.

For example, when the number of reserved plays for a unit game related to a special symbol is 8, as shown in FIG. 21(C), the button operation unit 850 is placed in the neutral position corresponding to that reserved number (i.e., the reserved number is 8), and the number "8" corresponding to that reserved number depicted on the reserved number display unit 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100. As a result, the numbers from "0" to "8" are exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100.

Therefore, in a configuration in which the height of the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 increases as the number of reserved unit games related to the special symbols increases, the player can grasp the current number of reserved games by visually checking the numbers displayed on the part exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100 among the numbers drawn on the reserved number display unit 870A. In other words, the pressing operation device 1261 can be made to function as a display device that displays the number of reserved unit games related to the special symbols, similar to the special symbol reserved display devices 476 and 477.

Returning to FIG. 20, the explanation will be given. The bottom member 880 is a member that constitutes the bottom portion of the pressing operation device 1261. The bottom member 880 is configured to be substantially circular when viewed from above, and a groove 880A capable of accommodating the side surface of the operation cover member 870 is provided on the peripheral side. The groove 880A also functions as a guide that guides the operation cover member 870 in the up and down direction. Note that the operation cover member 870 can only move up and down within a certain range, and is configured to include a stopper mechanism that limits upward movement beyond a certain amount, but this is not shown in the figure.

The pressing operation device 1261 is equipped with a detection sensor 890 that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the sub-control board 940 when the button operation unit 850 is located at a position that is the lower end of the range of movement of the actuation mechanism 860. The detection sensor 890 is, for example, an optical proximity sensor. This detection sensor 890 does not necessarily have to be provided, and the detection position detected by the detection sensor 890 may be detected using information from a sensor (encoder) that can detect the upper and lower positions of the button operation unit 850.

The detection sensor 890 outputs a high-level signal when the button operation unit 850 reaches a position that is the lower end of the range of movement caused by the actuation mechanism 860, and outputs a low-level signal when the button operation unit 850 moves from a position that is the lower end of the range of movement caused by the actuation mechanism 860.

The sub-control board 940 determines that the button operation unit 850 has reached the lower end of the range of movement of the actuation mechanism 860 when the signal received from the detection sensor 890 rises to a high level signal, and determines that the button operation unit 850 has moved from the lower end of the range of movement of the actuation mechanism 860 when the signal falls to a low level signal.

When the signal received from the detection sensor 890 rises to a high level signal, the sub-control board 940 sets the bottom end position flag (a part of the RAM) to ON. When the signal received from the detection sensor 890 falls to a low level signal, the sub-control board 940 sets the bottom end position flag to OFF. As a result, when the bottom end position flag is set to ON, the sub-control board 940 determines that the button operation unit 850 is located at the bottom end of the range of movement caused by the actuation mechanism 860.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the sub-control board 940 determines that the pressing operation device 1261 has been operated when a situation occurs in which the button operation unit 850 is located at the lower end of the range of movement caused by the actuation mechanism 860 and the operated unit 852 is located at the maximum pressing position caused by the spring member 853.

More specifically, when the sub-control board 940 determines that the signal received from the detection sensor 854 has risen to a high level signal, and if the bottom end position flag is set to on, it determines that the push operation device 1261 has been operated. Similarly, when the sub-control board 940 determines that the signal received from the detection sensor 890 has risen to a high level signal, and if the maximum push position flag is set to on, it determines that the push operation device 1261 has been operated.

When the pressing operation device 1261 (button operation unit 850) is in the neutral position where the button operation unit 850 is above the lower end of the range of movement of the actuation mechanism 860, the sub-control board 940 controls the actuation mechanism 860 so that the button operation unit 850 returns to the neutral position when it determines that the pressing operation device 1261 has been operated. This allows the pressing operation device 1261 to be returned to the current neutral position.

When a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 is applied to the button operation unit 850 to move the button operation unit 850, the rotation of the pinion 862 rotates the motor 863, and the rotation direction, rotation position, and rotation speed can be detected by an encoder (not shown) provided in the operating mechanism 860. If the sub-control board 940 determines that the signal received from the detection sensor 854 has risen to a high level signal while the lower end position flag is off, and determines that the rotation speed of the motor 863 detected by the encoder is zero, it controls the operating mechanism 860 to return the button operation unit 850 to the current neutral position.

As a result, even if the button operation unit 850 is operated (pushed) with a force that exceeds the torque of the motor 863, and the operation ends before the button operation unit 850 reaches a position that is the lower end of the range of movement of the actuation mechanism 860, the pressing operation device 1261 can be returned to its current neutral position.

When returning the pressing operation device 1261 to the current neutral position, the speed at which the button operation unit 850 moves toward the neutral position within the range of movement of the button operation unit 850 by the actuation mechanism 860 may be a constant speed or may vary depending on the state at that time.

Next, the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 configured as described above will be described. When the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to a position where the button operation unit 850 is at the lower end of the range of movement of the actuation mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20A), and a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 in the neutral position (i.e., when a pressing operation is performed on the operation surface of the operation cover member 870), the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed down by a change in position of the operated unit 852 due to deformation of the spring member 853.

Therefore, when the button operation unit 850 is pressed down to a state where the pressing operation device 1261, whose neutral position is the lower end of the range of movement of the actuation mechanism 860, is determined to have been operated by the sub-control board 940, the stroke amount corresponds to the stroke amount S1 of the operated unit 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853, as shown in FIG. 20(B).

In contrast, when the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to a position where the button operation unit 850 is above the lower end of the range of movement of the actuation mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20(C)), if a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 in the neutral position, if the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 is greater than the biasing force of the spring member 853 at the maximum pressing position, the pressing operation device 1261 will first be pressed down to the maximum pressing position by the deformation of the spring member 853 (see FIG. 20(D)), and then be pressed down by the position change of the button operation unit 850 by the actuation mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20(E)).

Therefore, when the pressing operation device 1261, whose neutral position is a position above the lower end of the range of movement of the operating mechanism 860, is pressed down to a state in which the sub-control board 940 determines that an operation has been performed, the stroke amount is the sum of the stroke amount S1 of the operated part 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853 and the stroke amount S2 of the button operating part 850 due to the operating mechanism 860, that is, (stroke amount S1 + stroke amount S2), as shown in Figures 20 (D) and 20 (E).

The stroke amount S2 of the button operation unit 850 caused by the actuation mechanism 860 is the amount of movement from the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 to a position that is the lower end of the range of movement of the button operation unit 850 caused by the actuation mechanism 860, and is therefore a value that varies depending on the variation in the neutral position of the button operation unit 850. More specifically, the stroke amount S2 is a value that increases as the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 becomes higher. Therefore, in the pressing operation device 261 of this embodiment, the stroke amount caused by the pressing operation increases as the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 becomes higher.

Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 and the reaction force against the pressing operation when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261. More specifically, Figure 22 is a graph in which the horizontal axis represents the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261, and the vertical axis represents the reaction force against the pressing operation.

In this embodiment, the position of the operation surface of the operation cover member 870 in the pressing operation device 1261 is defined as the "operation position of the pressing operation device 1261." The position of the operated portion 852 of the button operation unit 850 may also be defined as the "operation position of the pressing operation device 1261."

When the button operation unit 850 performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20A), which is in a neutral position when the button operation unit 850 is at the lower end of the range of movement of the actuation mechanism 860, the reaction force against the pressing operation in the section from the operation position A1 of the pressing operation device 1261 in the neutral position to the operation position Amin of the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20B) in a situation where the sub-control board 940 determines that an operation (pressing operation) has been performed (i.e., the section of stroke amount S1) increases linearly with the slope of the spring constant of the spring member 853 as it approaches the operation position Amin from the operation position A1, as shown by the straight line J1 in FIG. 21A.

Next, a case will be described where the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 is raised, causing the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 in the neutral position to move from operation position A1 to operation position A2 (see FIG. 20(C)), and a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 in the neutral position.

In such a case, when the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 is greater than the biasing force of the spring member 853 at the maximum pressing position, the reaction force against the pressing operation in the section from the operating position A2 of the pressing operation device 1261 in the neutral position to the operating position A2x of the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20(C)) where the operated part 852 is at the maximum pressing position (i.e., the section of stroke amount S1) increases linearly with the slope of the spring constant of the spring member 853 as it approaches the operating position Ax from the operating position A1, as shown by the straight line J2 in FIG. 21(A).

The reaction force against the pressing operation in the section from the operation position A2x to the operation position Amin of the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20(B)) in a situation where the sub-control board 940 determines that an operation (pressing operation) has been performed (i.e., the section of stroke amount S2) is a value according to the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 in that section.

The torque of the motor 863 depends on the value of the current passing through the motor 863, so the relationship between the operating position of the push operation device 1261 and the reaction force against the push operation on the push operation device 1261 can be varied by controlling the value of the current passing through the motor 863, and multiple settings can be made to provide different operating feel depending on the game situation and lottery results.

For example, if the torque of the motor 863 is constant regardless of the operating position of the pressing operation device 1261, the reaction force against the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 can include a constant pattern in the section from the operating position A2x to the operating position Amin, as shown by the straight line J3 in FIG. 21(A).

Alternatively, the torque of the motor 863 is such that the operation position of the pressing operation device 1261 is the operation position Am
In the case where the reaction force against the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is increased linearly as it approaches in, the configuration can include a pattern in which the reaction force against the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is increased linearly as it approaches from the operating position A2x to the operating position Amin, as shown by the dotted line J4 in Figure 21 (A).

It is to be noted that the pattern is not limited to increasing the torque of the motor 863, but may also include a pattern of decreasing the torque of the motor 863. In such a case, the reaction force against the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 can be decreased as the operation position approaches from the operation position A2x to the operation position Amin. Also, a pattern may be included that combines an increase and a decrease in the torque of the motor 863. Also, the increase or decrease in the torque of the motor 863 does not necessarily have to be linear, and may include a pattern in which the torque of the motor 863 increases or decreases in a curved manner, or may include a pattern that includes a portion where the torque increases and then decreases to a maximum, or a portion where the torque decreases and then increases to a minimum.

Also, the pattern may be one in which the change in torque of the motor 863 is discontinuous in the section between the operation position A2x and the operation position Amin (more specifically, a pattern in which the change in torque includes a step and is discontinuous before and after a predetermined position). In such a case, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(B), the reaction force against the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is discontinuous in that it rises sharply at the operation position X without any change in the operation position. The change in the reaction force against the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 in the section from the operation position X to the operation position Amin may be constant in that section, as shown by the straight line J5 in FIG. 21(B), or may include a pattern in which the reaction force increases as the operation position Amin is approached, as shown by the two-dot chain line J6 in FIG. 21(B).

In addition, the pattern may include a pattern in which the change in the reaction force against the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 in the section from operation position A2x to operation position X is the same as the change in the reaction force against the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 in the section from operation position X to operation position Amin, or a configuration in which these change patterns are different.

In addition, the operation position where the reaction force against the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is discontinuous does not necessarily have to be one as shown in FIG. 21(B), and may include a pattern in which multiple operation positions (i.e., two or more) are provided where the reaction force against the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is discontinuous.

In addition, it is not necessary to discontinuously change the torque of the motor 863 at the operation position X (i.e., to discontinuously change the reaction force against the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261), and a pattern in which the change patterns of the reaction force against the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 are different before and after the operation position X and each change pattern changes continuously at the operation position X may be included.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the operating mechanism 860 is equipped with an encoder (not shown) that is capable of detecting the rotation direction, rotation position, and rotation speed of the motor 863 when a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 is applied to the button operation unit 850 to move the button operation unit 850. The sub-control board 940 can detect the pressing speed (movement speed of the pressing operation device 1261) during the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 and the amount of movement of the pressing operation device 1261 based on the values detected by the encoder.

Here, target values are set in advance for the moving speed and amount of movement of the push operation device 1261 when pressed (i.e., the target values for the moving speed and amount of movement of the push operation device 1261 are stored in the ROM or RAM of the sub-control board 940), and when the moving speed or amount of movement of the push operation device 1261 detected by the sub-control board 940 based on each value detected by the encoder exceeds the moving speed or amount of movement stored in advance as the target value, a predetermined effect or display is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, or a pattern in which a predetermined role provided on the game board 400 operates may be included.

Specifically, when the pressing operation device 1261 (button operation unit 850) is pressed with a force that exceeds the torque of the motor 863, the sub-control board 940 detects the moving speed or amount of movement of the pressing operation device 1261 based on the rotation direction, rotation position, and rotation speed of the motor 863 detected by the encoder, compares the detected moving speed or amount of movement with the moving speed or amount of movement that is previously stored as a target value, and if it is determined that the detected moving speed or amount of movement exceeds the moving speed or amount of movement that is previously stored as a target value, it may include a pattern that displays a predetermined effect or display on the decorative pattern display device 479 or operates a predetermined role provided on the game board 400.

This configuration provides a gameplay that allows the player to operate the push operation device 1261 in accordance with a predetermined target value, thereby increasing the attention to the pachinko machine 100.

The target value may be set to either the moving speed or the moving amount, or a combination of both, or it may be the pressing force on the button operation unit 850 held at a certain height. The target value may be set based on a threshold value, such as whether or not a predetermined target value is exceeded, or may be an operation with a target set for an operation time that involves an operation to maintain a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range for a certain period of time or more.

It is also preferable to set multiple types of target values for the pressing operation device 1261, the height position of the neutral position, and the magnitude and change pattern of the reaction force. Then, it is preferable to select one of the multiple types based on conditions based on the game situation (e.g., the number of reserved times, the game time, the number of times a specified effect (e.g., the display of a specific character) is executed), or to select one of the multiple types based on conditions based on the results of a specified lottery such as a jackpot lottery, and use this as an effect that suggests to the player, for example, the result of the pattern lottery or the possibility (expectation, reliability) of transitioning to a special game state.

For example, the sub-control board 940 can detect the amount of movement of the push operation device 1261 that is pushed based on the values detected by the encoder. In a configuration in which the height of the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 changes according to the number of reserved unit games related to special symbols, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to control the operating mechanism 860 to discontinuously change the torque of the motor 863 at a position corresponding to the number of reserved unit games corresponding to the unit games that have won the special symbol lottery with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) when the push operation device 1261 is pushed with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 and a push operation is performed with a target value of a certain speed or less (for example, a moving speed of 0.5 seconds or less per stroke of one scale).

In addition, when the currently reserved unit games include a unit game that has won the special pattern lottery, the probability of discontinuously changing the torque of the motor 863 at the position corresponding to the reserved number of times that corresponds to the unit game that has won the special pattern lottery may be greater than 0% and less than 100%, or may be a 100% probability.

In this way, when the push operation device 1261 is pushed with a force that exceeds the torque of the motor 863, in a configuration in which the movement mode of the push operation device 1261 (i.e., the change in the operation feel due to discontinuous changes in the torque of the motor 863 while the push operation device 1261 is moving, and the pattern of the reaction force against the movement) changes depending on the content of each reserved unit game (for example, whether or not a special pattern lottery has been won), it is possible to provide a gameplay that allows the player to guess the content of the lottery results of each reserved unit game based on the movement mode of the push operation device 1261.

Next, we will explain the operation and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the push operation device 1261 that can be pushed by the player is equipped with a button operation unit 850 in which an operated part 852 is supported on a base 851 via a spring member 853, and an operating mechanism 860 that enables the button operation unit 850 to move in the up and down directions. The operating mechanism 860 can hold the button operation unit 850 in a predetermined neutral position, and by applying a downward force (pushing operation force) to the button operation unit 850 that exceeds the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860, the button operation unit 850 can be moved in the direction of the force.

This allows the stroke amount caused by the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 to be changed according to the change in the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., the neutral position of the button operation unit 850). This makes it possible to diversify the operation feeling when the player operates the operated unit 852, compared to when the amount of movement of the operated unit 852 is limited to a certain range based on the deformation of the spring member 853, and can favorably increase the attention to the pachinko machine 100.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the height of the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 (neutral position of the button operation unit 850) is configured to become higher as the number of reserved unit games related to special symbols increases. Therefore, the player can visually check the push operation device 1261 to recognize the number of reserved games, and even when playing with his/her eyes lowered, the number of reserved games can be easily recognized by the height of the button operation unit 850.

In addition, the stroke amount of the push operation device 1261 becomes longer as the number of reserved times increases. This allows the operation feeling when the player operates the operated part 852 to differ depending on the number of reserved times, so the player can guess (recognize) the number of reserved times intuitively by pushing the push operation device 1261. Therefore, with this configuration, it is possible to provide a gameplay that allows the player to guess (recognize) the number of reserved times for unit games related to special patterns by pushing the push operation device 1261 without visually checking information related to the number of reserved times.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 can be changed according to the current value by changing the current value passed through the motor 863, so that the operating feel of the operated part 852 (the operating feel of the button operating part 850) can be changed in various ways in the section in which the button operating part 850 can move up and down by the operating mechanism 860.

For example, if the torque of the motor 863 is kept constant within the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860 and is not dependent on the operation position of the push operation device 1261 (the amount of operation of the push operation device 1261), the reaction force against the push operation of the push operation device 1261 can be kept constant within that movement range, so the player can push the push operation device 1261 with a constant force within that range.

Furthermore, if the torque of the motor 863 is increased or decreased linearly or non-linearly as the amount of operation (amount of pressing) of the push operation device 1261 increases within the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the operating mechanism 860, the reaction force against the pressing operation on the push operation device 1261 can be increased or decreased linearly or non-linearly within that movement range, so that the player can operate the push operation device 1261 while linearly or non-linearly increasing or decreasing the force (pressure) with which the push operation device 1261 is pressed within that range.

This allows the operation feel of the pressing operation device 1261 in the section where the button operation unit 850 can move up and down by the operating mechanism 860 to be changed in various ways, such as an operation feel where the pressing operation can be performed with a constant force, or an operation feel where the pressing operation needs to be performed with increasing or decreasing force as the amount of pressing increases. This makes it possible to diversify the operation feel when the player operates the operated unit 852. In this respect as well, it is possible to favorably increase the attention paid to the pachinko machine 100.

In addition, by controlling the current value passing through the motor 863 to change the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 in accordance with the content of a specified presentation displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, the operating feel when operating the operated portion 852 can be changed in accordance with the content of the presentation.

For example, when a performance of pumping air into a balloon with a manual air pump is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during a variable display, the current value can be controlled so that the torque of the motor 863 is constant in accordance with the depiction of the operation of the manual air pump, thereby making it possible to make the feel of the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 constant, as if operating a manual air pump. If the display result of the variable display is a win or if the player is to be advised that the variable display has a high expectation, a reaction force can be generated until the end of the performance to depict the balloon becoming as large as possible due to the pressing operation, whereas if the player is to be advised that the variable display has a loss or if the player is to be advised that the variable display has a low expectation, a hole can be made in the balloon and it shrinks, and as the balloon shrinks, the torque can be reduced to minimize the reaction force, so that the balloon does not inflate.

In addition, when a performance in which a character tries to push open a tightly closed door is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display, the current value can be controlled so that the torque of the motor 863 suddenly decreases the moment the door opens in accordance with the depiction of the character pushing the door to open it, thereby making the feel of the pushing operation on the push operation device 1261 suddenly lighter, as if the door had opened. Then, when the display result of the variable display is a win or the player is to be suggested to have a high expectation variable display, the torque can be reduced at the end of the performance to minimize the reaction force, and the door can be shown to open and a character indicating a lucky state is behind the door, whereas when the display result is a loss or the player is to be suggested to have a low expectation variable display, the reaction force can be generated until the end of the performance to show that the door does not open.

In terms of the presentation corresponding to the display result of the variable display, it is not limited to the above, but may be possible to continue the state where it is pressed all the way down for a certain period of time, and then, depending on the expectation level or whether it is a win or loss, the button operation unit 850 may be maintained in the lowest position or may rise, and the position after operation may be changed, the magnitude of the operating force (reaction force) may be changed, or a combination of these may be used.

In this way, by controlling the current value passing through the motor 863 so that the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 changes in accordance with the content of a predetermined presentation displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, the operational feel of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 can be made to match the presentation displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. This makes it possible to give the player the sensation of participating in a predetermined presentation displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 can be changed according to the value of the current passed through the motor 863, so that the torque of the motor 863 can be changed discontinuously (or in a step-like manner, or in a sudden manner) at a predetermined position within the section in which the button operation unit 850 can move up and down by the operating mechanism 860.

As a result, when a player operates the operated part 852 with a force that exceeds the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860, the operating feel of the operated part 852 (press operation device 1261) changes discontinuously at a predetermined position within the section in which the button operation part 850 can be moved up and down by the operating mechanism 860. Because the operating feel of the press operation device 1261 changes discontinuously at a predetermined position, the operating feel of the press operation device 1261 is unlikely to become monotonous, which can favorably increase the attention to the pachinko machine 100.

In addition, in the pressing operation device 1261 provided in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the position of the button operation unit 850 is configured to be changeable by the operating mechanism 860, and the control of the sub-control board 940 can be configured to include control to move the button operation unit 850 at a speed that generates an inertial force of a magnitude that deforms the elastic body. In other words, by moving the button operation unit 850 in a predetermined direction (upward or downward) by the operating mechanism 860 and then suddenly stopping the movement, the operated unit 852 supported by the base 851 via the spring member 853 in the button operation unit 850 can be moved along the predetermined direction (e.g., upward) by the inertial force received by the operated unit 852 due to the sudden stop of the button operation unit 850, and it is also possible to make a vibration motion (reciprocating motion) that reciprocates between the predetermined direction and the opposite direction to the predetermined direction (e.g., downward).

This allows the push operation device 1261 to function not only as a device that simply causes the player to perform a specified operation (specifically, a push operation), but also as a device that can provide an effect that utilizes the vibration of the operated portion 852. By allowing the push operation device 1261 to form part of the effect, interest in the push operation device 1261 can be increased, and this can increase the attention paid to the pachinko machine 100.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 23 and Fig. 24. In the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment, a device is provided to allow the user to preferably experience the operation feeling and the feeling of operation (operation feeling) of the pressing operation device 1261 of the sixth embodiment.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-mentioned first to sixth embodiments are given the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below as the seventh embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to sixth embodiments, or may be provided in place of a portion of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to sixth embodiments.

Figure 23 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. Figure 24 is a schematic diagram for explaining the push operation device 1261 provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. More specifically, Figure 24(A) is a top view showing the vicinity of the push operation device 1261, and Figure 24(B) is a side view of the vicinity of the push operation device 1261 as viewed from the direction of arrow A in Figure 24(A).

In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the drawings, Fig. 24 (Fig. 24(A) and Fig. 24(B)) illustrates the pressing operation device 1261, a case 893 that houses the pressing operation device 1261, and a hand rest 895. Also, for reference, each of Fig. 24(A) and Fig. 24(B) illustrates arrows that indicate the forward/backward, left/right, or up/down directions relative to the illustrated content.

In addition, in Fig. 24(A), for reference, the position of the front plate 222 relative to the pressing operation device 1261, etc. is shown by a two-dot chain line. In addition, in Fig. 24(B), in order to make the drawing easier to understand, partial cross sections of the upper end sides of the case 893 and the hand rest 895 are shown, and hatching for each cross section is omitted. In addition, in Fig. 24(B), for reference, a dashed line QA is shown indicating the vertical position of the opening R on the opening surface.

In addition, in FIG. 24, for reference, an example of the player's hand operating the pressing operation device 1261 (performing a pressing operation on the operation surface 870B) and a portion of the forearm connected to the hand are illustrated by a two-dot chain line TE. Note that in this embodiment, the "hand" refers to the part from the wrist to the tip side, which is composed of the palm and fingers, and the "forearm" refers to the part connected to the hand, which is the part from the wrist to the elbow.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the input operation device 260 is configured to include a pressing operation device 1261 and a selection operation device 263. The input operation device 260 may be configured to include a rotation operation device 262 in addition to the pressing operation device 1261 and the selection operation device 263.

As shown in FIG. 23, the push operation device 1261 is disposed approximately in the center of the upper protrusion 217. On the side closer to the player than the push operation device 1261 (i.e., on the forward side of the push operation device 1261), a hand rest 895 is provided on which the player can place the hand (e.g., the right hand) that operates the push operation device 1261. The hand rest 895 is a rest that extends forward from the case 893 that houses the push operation device 1261.

The push operation device 1261 is housed in the case 893 through the opening R which is open facing upward. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the push operation device 1261 is configured so that the neutral position of the operation surface 870B, which is the surface of the upper end side of the operation cover member 870 and which the player touches when performing the push operation, is approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening R that houses the push operation device 1261 (the opening surface located at the dashed dotted line QA) in the up-down direction, which is the movement direction of the push operation device 1261, as shown in FIG. 24(B).

In this embodiment, the opening R is positioned at a position that coincides with a plane, but the opening R may be positioned at a height that does not coincide with a plane. For example, the operation surface 870B may be configured so that the neutral position is a position that is approximately equal to at least a portion of the periphery of the opening in the direction of movement of the operation surface 870B. In this case, the neutral position may be a position that is approximately equal to at least a portion of the periphery of the opening that is closer to the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the hand rest 895 is configured so that a player who operates the pressing operation device 1261 (performs a pressing operation on the operation surface 870B) can place at least a part of the hand performing the pressing operation (more specifically, the part of the hand excluding the part of the fingers operating the operation surface 870B) and at least a part of the forearm connected to the hand.

In other words, the hand rest 895 functions as a support base that supports from below a part of the player's hand and at least a part of the forearm connected to the hand, so that the player can operate the operation surface 870B by pressing the hand. In the example shown in FIG. 24, as indicated by the two-dot chain line TE, a part of the wrist side of the player's hand and a part of the wrist side of the forearm are supported by the hand rest 895.

Therefore, the player can operate the operation surface 870B while placing and supporting at least a part of the hand performing the pressing operation on the operation surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 and at least a part of the forearm connected to the hand on the hand rest 895. For example, as shown in FIG. 24(B), in a configuration in which the operation surface 870B and the upper surface of the hand rest 895 are both positioned approximately equal in the vertical direction to the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 (the opening surface located at the dashed line QA), the player can perform a pressing operation on the operation surface 870B by moving the hand (more specifically, the fingertip side) up and down with the wrist side of the palm as a fulcrum while placing the hand on the hand rest 895. In addition, by placing the hand on the operation surface 870B with the wrist side of the palm as a fulcrum, the hand (more specifically, the fingertip side) can be easily moved up and down by the movement of the operation surface 870B, making it easier for the operation surface 870B to move and for the feeling of the movement to be felt.

Next, we will explain the operation and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the pressing operation device 1261 is in the neutral position, the operation surface 870B is positioned at approximately the same vertical position as the opening surface of the opening R, so that a player performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 can more easily perform a forceful pressing operation (pressing operation) such as hitting the operation surface 870B, compared to when the operation surface 870B protrudes upward relative to the opening surface of the opening R.

Therefore, in a configuration in which the neutral position of the operation surface 870B is approximately equal in the vertical direction to the opening surface of the opening R, such as the pressing operation device 1261 provided in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a player who performs a pressing operation on the operation surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 can perform a pressing operation in which the operation surface 870B is pressed slowly against the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20), rather than a forceful pressing operation (pressing operation) such as hitting the operation surface 870B.

Therefore, in a pachinko machine 100 having a configuration in which the pressing operation device 1261 can move from a neutral position in the direction of the pressing operation (pressing) when a downward force (pressing force) exceeding the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 is applied to the operation surface 870B, the player can preferably experience the feeling of pressing (pressing) which is difficult to feel with a forceful pressing operation due to the momentum of the force. This makes it possible to increase the attention to the pachinko machine 100 having this configuration.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a hand rest 895 is provided on the side closer to the player than the push operation device 1261, on which the player who operates the push operation device 1261 (performs a push operation on the operation surface 870B) can place at least a part of the hand (more specifically, the part of the hand excluding the part of the fingers that operate the operation surface 870B) and at least a part of the forearm connected to the hand (supported from below).

This allows the hand rest 895 to support at least a portion of the forearm connected to the hand, excluding a portion of the fingers that operate the operation surface 870B, thereby stabilizing the hand and preventing the player from pressing in an inappropriate position on the operation surface 870B.

In addition, because the hand rest 895 can support the player's hand excluding a portion of the fingers that operate the operation surface 870B and at least a portion of the forearm connected to the hand, the strength of the pressing operation on the operation surface 870B can be reduced compared to when the hand and forearm are free to move. This makes it difficult for a player who performs a pressing operation on the operation surface 870B (operating the pressing operation device 1261) to perform a forceful operation on the operation surface 870B (such as hitting the operation surface 870B).

This allows a player who performs a push operation on the operation surface 870B of the push operation device 1261 to perform a push operation in which the operation surface 870B is slowly pushed in against the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860. In this respect, in a pachinko machine 100 having a configuration in which the push operation device 1261 can be moved from a neutral position in the direction of the push operation (pressing) when a downward force (pushing force) exceeding the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 is applied to the operation surface 870B, the player can be made to preferably experience the operational feeling of pushing (pressing) that is difficult to feel in a forceful push operation due to the momentum of the push operation, and this makes it possible to increase the attention to the pachinko machine 100.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24(A), the length (length W1) of the area in front of the front plate 222 minus the length (length WA) from the front end of the operation surface 870B (press operation device 1261) to the rear end of the hand rest 895 in the area including the operation surface 870B and hand rest 895 of the press operation device 1261 (i.e., length WB) is shorter than the length (length W2) of the operation surface 870B (press operation device 1261). In other words, the area including the operation surface 870B and hand rest 895 of the press operation device 1261 occupies a relatively large area in the front-to-rear direction in the area in front of the front plate 222.

In such a configuration, the size of the operation surface 870B is relatively large in the area forward of the front plate 222, which makes it easier for the player to operate the operation surface 870B. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 24(A), the operation surface 870B is relatively large, occupying approximately half of the area forward of the front plate 222 in the front-to-rear direction, or large enough for the player to operate it with multiple fingers (for example, four fingers excluding the thumb).

In this way, even if the operation surface 870B (press operation device 1261) is relatively large in the area forward of the front plate 222, a support portion is provided so that at least a portion of it is forward of the press operation device 1261, thereby enabling convenient operation of the operation surface 870B (i.e., the operation surface 870B which is relatively large), and allowing the player to conveniently experience the feel of operating the press operation device 1261 which has the operation surface 870B.

In addition, as described above, the pressing operation device 1260 of this embodiment is configured so that the sense of movement of the pressing operation device 1260 (movement of the operation surface 870B) can be experienced by moving the hand in conjunction with the movement of the operation surface 870B, by placing the hand (more specifically, the fingertip side of the hand) on the operation surface 870B, with the wrist side of the palm placed on the hand rest 895 as the fulcrum.

Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which the height of the neutral position of the press operation device 1261 of this embodiment changes according to the number of reserved unit games related to the special pattern (more specifically, the higher the number of reserved games, the higher the height), like the press operation device 1260 described in the sixth embodiment, the player can intuitively grasp the increase or decrease in the number of reserved games by moving the hand placed on the operation surface 870B, with the wrist side of the palm placed on the hand rest 895 as a fulcrum.

In addition, in an embodiment of the push operation device 1260, in a configuration in which the height of the neutral position changes according to the number of reserved unit games related to the special pattern (more specifically, the higher the number of reserved games, the higher the height becomes), when the neutral position where the operation surface 870B is at a position approximately equal in the vertical direction to the opening surface of the opening R is assigned to a predetermined reserved number (e.g., zero) that is smaller than the maximum number of reserved numbers (e.g., eight times), it is also possible to intuitively grasp whether the number of reserved unit games related to the special pattern is more or less than the predetermined reserved number by moving the hand placed on the operation surface 870B.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment, a device is provided to increase the attention of the player even during a non-play state in which no variable display is being performed.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-mentioned first to seventh embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below as the eighth embodiment may be added to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to seventh embodiments, or may be provided in place of a portion of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to seventh embodiments.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the so-called "customer waiting effect" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during a non-play state (waiting) in which the machine is waiting for a player to play and no variable display is being performed is composed of videos or images that use video data (image data) that is prepared in advance for various effects to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during variable display. The video data for the effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 is stored in a specified area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in association with each effect pattern.

Specifically, for example, for some or all of the multiple types of effects prepared in advance, a series of partial videos (successive frame images) for each target effect are cut out from the video data corresponding to each target effect, and the cut-out videos, or if there are multiple target effects, each of the cut-out videos is connected in a predetermined order for each target effect to create a video that serves as a waiting-for-customer effect.

For example, when multiple types of suggestive performances, which are one of the performances displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display, are prepared, some or all (i.e., at least one) of the multiple types of suggestive performances are targeted, and a partial series of videos (successive frame images) in the suggestive performance are cut out from each video data corresponding to each targeted suggestive performance, and the cut-out videos, or, in the case where there are multiple targeted suggestive performances, each of the cut-out videos is connected in a predetermined order for each targeted suggestive performance, to form a customer waiting performance.

The "partial series of moving images" cut out from the effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display may be any range of moving images in the effect. For example, it may be configured to cut out a portion of the partial moving image (successive frame images) that includes at least the range in which a characteristic display is performed in the target effect.

The "range in which a characteristic display is made in the performance" may be, for example, when the target performance is a suggestive performance, a predetermined moving image portion (a predetermined range of moving images) capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state in the suggestive performance, more specifically, for example, a moving image portion in which a character appears suggesting the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state, or a moving image portion whose background color is a color suggesting the degree of expectation. For example, in the first suggestive performance in the fifth embodiment described above, a moving image portion in which a predetermined character such as characters CA1 to CA3 (see FIG. 19) appears may be configured to be cut out as the "range in which a characteristic display is made in the performance".

Alternatively, for example, if the target performance is a performance that prompts the user to operate the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during a variable display, the moving image portion showing characteristic content in the performance that prompts the user to operate may be set as the "range in which a characteristic display is made in the performance." For example, a moving image portion corresponding to the "performance of inflating a balloon with a manual air pump" or the "performance of a character trying to push open a tightly closed door" exemplified in the sixth embodiment described above may be configured to be cut out as the "range in which a characteristic display is made in the performance."

In addition, the "range in which a characteristic effect is performed in the effect" may be a characteristic video portion that cannot be seen in other effects (such as a suggestive effect) (for example, a video portion in which a character that cannot be seen in other effects appears), regardless of the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state.

The waiting performance does not necessarily have to be a partial video cut out from the target performance, or a video made by connecting the cut out videos in a specified order. For example, the waiting performance may be a video of the entire range of the target performance, or a video made by connecting the entire range of the target performance in a specified order, or the waiting performance may be a video that is a mixture of a video cut out in part from the target performance and a video of the entire range of the target performance.

The customer waiting performance does not necessarily have to be composed of a partial video cut out from a performance displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display, as described above, or a video covering the entire range of the performance. For example, for some or all of the multiple types of performances prepared in advance, one or more images of an area may be cut out from one or more frame images among the frame images constituting each of the video data corresponding to each of the target performances, and an image or video including one or more images cut out from each performance may be composed as the customer waiting performance.

Specifically, for example, if multiple types of suggestive effects are prepared as effects to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display, in which a character appears to suggest the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state, similar to the first suggestive effect in the fifth embodiment described above, then for some or all (i.e., at least one) of the multiple types of suggestive effects, one or more images of an area may be cut out from one or more frame images among the frame images constituting each of the video data corresponding to each of the target suggestive effects, and an image or video including one or more images cut out from each effect may be configured as a customer waiting effect.

In this case, for example, one or more cut-out images are displayed on a specified background image in an image or video in which all images (cut-out images) are displayed at once, or in which all cut-out images are displayed in succession in multiple batches, creating a customer waiting effect.

The frame image from which the image is cut out may be any of the frame images constituting the target effect. For example, when the target effect is a suggestive effect similar to the first suggestive effect of the fifth embodiment described above, a frame image of a predetermined area may be cut out from a frame image including a character suggesting the expectation of a transition to a special game state, among the frame images constituting the suggestive effect.

Alternatively, if the target effect is an effect that prompts the user to operate the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or the pressing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during a changing display, the configuration may involve cutting out an image of a specified area from a frame image that corresponds to an image that includes content characteristic of the effect (for example, a specified image that includes a manual air pump in an effect of inflating a balloon with a manual air pump).

Alternatively, the configuration may involve cutting out an image of a specific area from a frame image corresponding to an image that contains characteristic content that cannot be seen in other effects (such as an image featuring a character that cannot be seen in other effects) in the target effect (such as a suggestive effect), regardless of the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state.

The cut-out area of the image in the frame image may be any area in the target frame image. For example, if the target frame image is a frame image that includes a character that indicates the expectation of a transition to a special game state, the cut-out area may be an area that includes a part of the character.

The customer waiting performance may be a combination of an image or video including one or more images cut out from each performance, and a full-range video of the target performance or a partial video cut out from that performance, as described above.

When the sub-control board 940 determines that a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 100 has not been played by the player, it determines that the machine is in a non-playing state (waiting) in which the machine is waiting for the player to play and no variable display is being performed, and begins displaying the customer waiting effect of this embodiment described above.

Specifically, the sub-control board 940 determines that the launch handle 252 has not been operated based on a command received from the main control board 920, and measures the period during which the decorative pattern display device 479 does not display a changing decorative pattern or produce a jackpot using a timer or counter provided in the sub-control board 940, and when the period exceeds a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), it determines that the predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 100 has not been played by the player.

The customer waiting performance does not necessarily have to be of one type, but may be configured to prepare multiple customer waiting performances by changing the combination of performances (performances used to cut out videos and images) to be displayed in the customer waiting performance, by changing the position of the cut-out videos and images displayed in the customer waiting performance even for the same performance, or by changing the order in which the cut-out videos and images appear.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a predetermined push operation is performed on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or the push operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during a non-play state (standby), the decorative pattern display device 479 is configured to display a variable display (variable performance) in a manner (contents of the variable display, variable pattern) selected under the same selection conditions as when a start winning of a special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) occurs during play (i.e., a period not during a non-play state). Specifically, during a non-play state, the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 displays predetermined information (for example, the text "If you want to see a sample of the variable display, press the button!") that prompts the player to start a demo variable display, and in this situation, when a push operation is performed, the variable display starts.

The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment with such a configuration has a demo pseudo winning random number counter, a demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter, a demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and a first demo pseudo variation type counter to a fourth demo pseudo variation type counter on the sub-control board 940.

These counters (demo pseudo winning random number counter, demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter, demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and first demo pseudo variation type counter to fourth demo pseudo variation type counter) provided on the sub-control board 940 function in the same way as the winning random number counter related to the special patterns provided on the main control board 920, the jackpot pattern random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the first variation type counter to fourth variation type counter, respectively.

The counters provided on the sub-control board 940 will be described in detail. While the winning random number counter for the special symbol provided on the main control board 920 functions as a counter for performing a special symbol lottery, the demo pseudo winning random number counter (a part of the RAM area on the sub-control board 940) functions as a counter for performing a pseudo demo win/lose lottery corresponding to the special symbol lottery. The demo pseudo winning random number counter generates a demo pseudo winning random number (hereinafter also referred to as "demo pseudo winning random number") corresponding to the winning random number for the special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the demo pseudo winning random number counter is configured to be able to select (draw) a demo pseudo jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as a "demo pseudo jackpot") with the same winning probability as the winning probability of a jackpot by the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. Therefore, the demo pseudo winning random number counter is configured, for example, the same as the winning random number counter related to the special symbol provided in the main control board 920.

While the jackpot pattern random number counter provided in the main control board 920 functions as a counter for selecting a jackpot pattern, the demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter (a part of the RAM area in the sub-control board 940) functions as a counter for selecting a demo pseudo jackpot pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a "demo pseudo jackpot pattern") that corresponds to the jackpot pattern. The demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter generates a demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number (hereinafter also referred to as a "demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number") that corresponds to the jackpot pattern random number.

The demo pseudo jackpot patterns are prepared in a variety corresponding to the types of jackpot patterns, and the demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter is configured to be able to select any of the demo pseudo jackpot patterns.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter is configured to be able to select each type of demo pseudo jackpot pattern with the same selection probability as the selection probability of the type of jackpot pattern that corresponds to each type and is selectable by the jackpot pattern random number counter. Therefore, the demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter is configured the same as the jackpot pattern random number counter provided in the main control board 920, for example.

While the stop pattern selection counter provided in the main control board 920 functions as a counter for selecting a stop pattern, the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter (a part of the RAM area in the sub-control board 940) functions as a counter for selecting (selecting) a demonstration pseudo stop pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a "demo pseudo stop pattern") corresponding to the stop pattern. The demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter generates a demonstration pseudo stop pattern random number (hereinafter also referred to as a "demo pseudo stop pattern random number") corresponding to the stop pattern random number.

Note that various types of demonstration pseudo-stop patterns are prepared corresponding to the types of stop patterns, and the demonstration pseudo-stop pattern selection counter is configured to be able to select any one of the types of demonstration pseudo-stop patterns.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter is configured to be able to select each type of demo pseudo stop pattern with the same selection probability as the selection probability of the type of stop pattern that corresponds to each type and is selectable by the stop pattern selection counter. Therefore, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter is configured to be the same as the stop pattern selection counter provided in the main control board 920, for example.

While the first to fourth variation type counters provided on the main control board 920 function as counters for selecting (determining) the variation time and variation pattern of the decorative pattern variation display performed by the decorative pattern display device 479 when a special pattern is first won, the first to fourth demo pseudo variation type counters (all part of the RAM area on the sub-control board 940) function as counters for selecting the variation time and variation pattern of the pseudo decorative pattern variation display performed for demonstration purposes by the decorative pattern display device 479 when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-play state. The various demo pseudo variation type counters generate various demo pseudo variation pattern random numbers corresponding to various variation pattern random numbers, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the various pseudo-variation type counters for demo are configured to be able to select the types of variation times and variation patterns of the pseudo decorative pattern variation display performed for demos, which correspond to the respective types, with the same selection probability as the selection probability of the types of variation times and variation patterns selectable by the various variation type counters. Therefore, the first pseudo-variation type counter for demo to the fourth pseudo-variation type counter for demo are configured to be the same as, for example, the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter provided on the main control board 920, respectively.

The demo pseudo winning random number counter, demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter, demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and the first demo pseudo variation type counter through the fourth demo pseudo variation type counter only need to be configured to have the same winning or selection probabilities as the counters on the main control board 920 that correspond to each of these counters (i.e., the winning random number counter for special patterns, the jackpot pattern random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the first variation type counter through the fourth variation type counter), and do not necessarily need to have the same configuration as the counters on the main control board 920 that correspond to each of these counters.

The demo pseudo winning random number counter, demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter, demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and the first demo pseudo variation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo variation type counter provided on the sub-control board 940 are updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter related to the special pattern provided on the main control board 920, the jackpot pattern random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter are updated.

In other words, the sub-control board 940 updates the demo pseudo winning random number counter, demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter, and demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter at the same intervals as the main control board 920 executes the process of updating the winning random number counter related to the special pattern, the jackpot pattern random number counter, and the stop pattern selection counter in the timer interrupt process (main control interrupt process) (i.e., the random number update process S1203 (see FIG. 12)).

In addition, the sub-control board 940 updates the first demo pseudo-fluctuation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo-fluctuation type counter at intervals similar to the intervals at which the main control board 920 executes the process of updating the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter in the main processing (i.e., the fluctuation counter update process S1022 (see Figure 11)), and updates the first demo pseudo-fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter in the timer interrupt processing (main control interrupt processing) (i.e., the fluctuation counter update process S1205 (see Figure 12)).

Specifically, at each update timing of each of these counters (i.e., the demo pseudo winning random number counter, the demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter, the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and the first demo pseudo fluctuation type counter through the fourth demo pseudo fluctuation type counter), if the value of each counter is different from the specified maximum value of each counter (e.g., "576"), the sub-control board 940 changes the value to a value that is "1" larger than the current value. On the other hand, if the value of each counter is the specified maximum value of each counter, it changes the value to the specified minimum value of each counter ("0").

The above-mentioned demo pseudo winning random number counter, demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter, demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and various demo pseudo fluctuation type counters (first demo pseudo fluctuation type counter to fourth demo pseudo fluctuation type counter) do not necessarily have to be configured as described above, and at least some of the counters may be configured differently.

For example, in the above configuration, the demo pseudo winning random number counter, demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and various demo pseudo variation type counters are configured to be updated from a fixed initial value, but they may also be configured to use an initial value counter to set the initial value (circulating initial value) each time, or they may be configured without using a program and configured with a random number generating IC to reference values as needed.

Specifically, for example, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to have two types of random number initial value counters that function in the same way as the winning random number initial value counter for special patterns and the jackpot pattern random number initial value counter provided on the main control board 920, and these random number initial value counters may be used to set the cyclic initial values of the demo pseudo winning random number counter and demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter in the same way as the winning random number initial value counter for special patterns and the jackpot pattern random number counter set the cyclic initial values of the winning random number counter for special patterns and the jackpot pattern random number counter.

When a push operation device such as push operation device 261 is pressed during a non-play state, the sub-control board 940 obtains the demo pseudo winning random number, demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number, and demo pseudo stop pattern random number from the demo pseudo winning random number counter, demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter, and demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, in the same way as when the main control board 920 obtains the winning random number, jackpot pattern random number, and stop pattern random number related to the special pattern at the time of the initial winning of the special pattern, and stores them in a specified area of the RAM of the sub-control board 940.

Based on the acquired demo pseudo-winning random number, the sub-control board 940 performs a lottery (a pseudo winning/losing lottery) in the same way as when the main control board 920 performs a special pattern lottery, and makes a pseudo winning/losing judgment.

If a demo pseudo jackpot is won in the pseudo win/lose lottery, the sub-control board 940 determines the type of demo pseudo stopping pattern (demo pseudo jackpot pattern) corresponding to the demo pseudo jackpot win based on the acquired demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number, in the same way that the main control board 920 determines the type of jackpot pattern based on the jackpot pattern random number. Note that the types of demo pseudo jackpot patterns in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment correspond to the types of jackpot patterns determined based on the jackpot pattern random number.

On the other hand, if the demo pseudo jackpot is not won in the pseudo win/lose lottery, the sub-control board 940 sets a demo pseudo stop pattern (demo pseudo losing pattern) different from the demo pseudo jackpot pattern as the stop pattern.

After the pseudo win/lose lottery, the sub-control board 940 determines the variation time of the pseudo decorative pattern variation display performed for the demo based on the result of the win/lose lottery, the value of the demo pseudo stop pattern random number, and the values of various demo pseudo variation type counters, and selects the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the variation display.

The sub-control board 940 may be configured to randomly determine the virtual number of reserved plays corresponding to the number of reserved plays for the special pattern and the virtual game state, and may be configured to determine the change time of the pseudo decorative pattern change display performed for the demo and the change pattern of the decorative pattern in the change display using the determined virtual number of reserved plays and the virtual game state, in addition to the result of the pseudo win/lose lottery, the value of the demo pseudo stop pattern random number, and the values of various demo pseudo change type counters.

After the sub-control board 940 determines the time for which the pseudo decorative pattern is changed for demonstration purposes and the pattern of change of the decorative pattern in the change, the sub-control board 940 starts the change of the pseudo decorative pattern on the decorative pattern display device 479. This causes the display on the decorative pattern display device 479 to switch from the customer waiting performance to the change of the decorative pattern.

After starting the display of the demo-use pseudo decorative pattern, the sub-control board 940 continues the display of the decorative pattern for the change time determined for the change display, according to the change pattern determined for the change display. As the change time determined for the change display elapses, the sub-control board 940 confirms and displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern determined based on the demo-use pseudo jackpot pattern random number.

When the determined variation pattern is a specific reach display using decorative symbols (such as a super reach), the sub-control board 940 selects a presentation pattern for a suggestive presentation. As a result, during the display of the decorative symbol variations, the suggestive presentation of the selected presentation pattern is displayed after the reach display.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is equipped with pseudo demo counters (demo pseudo winning random number counter, demo pseudo jackpot random number counter, demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and various demo pseudo variation type counters) that function in the same way as the various counters used to determine the content of the variable display performed by the decorative pattern display device 479 based on the initial winning of the special pattern, and when a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pressed during a non-play state, these pseudo demo counters are used to select a variation pattern and a performance pattern in a suggestive performance under the same selection conditions as when the special pattern was initially won (i.e., the winning probability or selection probability by each counter is the same, and the method of obtaining random numbers from each counter is the same).

As a result, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the player can press a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 during a non-play state to cause the decorative pattern display device 479 to display a variable display (variable presentation) in a manner selected under the same selection conditions as when a special pattern is initiated and visually recognize the variable display.

In addition, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during a non-play state, causing the display on the decorative pattern display device 479 to switch from a customer waiting display to a changing display, if neither the pressing operation device nor the launch handle 252 is operated within a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) after the end of the changing display, the display on the decorative pattern display device 479 will switch to a customer waiting display.

Next, we will explain the operation and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the so-called "customer waiting effect" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during a non-play state is composed of videos or images that use video data that is prepared in advance for various effects that are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during a variable display.

This allows a player viewing a customer waiting effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during a non-play state to recognize or infer from the video or image contained in the customer waiting effect the content of the performance portion corresponding to the video or image in the performance displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during variable display. For example, the player can be made to recognize the content of the performance portion corresponding to the video based on a video cut out from the performance, and the player can be made to infer the content of the performance portion corresponding to the video based on an image cut out from a frame image that constitutes the performance. This can increase the player's interest in the performance displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, thereby increasing the attention paid to the pachinko machine 100.

In addition, since the video data prepared in advance for the various effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display is reused for the customer waiting effects, there is no need to prepare dedicated video data for the customer waiting effects, and the amount of storage required can be reduced.In addition, since there is no need to prepare dedicated video data for the customer waiting effects, development costs can be reduced.

In addition, if dedicated video data is prepared for the customer waiting effect, it may be necessary to lower the resolution of the customer waiting effect due to limitations in the memory capacity of the memory unit. However, since the video data for the effect displayed during the variable display is reused, the customer waiting effect can be displayed at the same high resolution as the effect.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during a non-play state, a variable display (variable presentation) in a manner selected under the same selection conditions as when a start winning of a special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) occurs is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, so that the variable display that appears based on the start winning of a special pattern can be made to appear during a non-play state with the same appearance probability as when the start winning occurs.

This allows the player to simulate, during a non-play state, what kind of variable display will appear with what frequency (probability) in an actual game (i.e., while playing), and what the content of the variable display will be depending on the level of expectation for a transition to a special game state. This can increase the player's interest in the gameplay brought about by the variable display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, which can increase the attention paid to the pachinko machine 100.

In addition, during the period from when a push operation device such as push operation device 261 is pressed during a non-play state until the variable display (variable presentation) ends, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to stop (not execute) some of the functions executed during the period from when a start winning of a special pattern occurs until the variable display based on the start winning ends.

For example, when the push operation device is operated during a non-play state, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to stop at least one of the functions executed during the period from the initial winning of a special symbol to the end of the variable display based on the initial winning, such as the variable display of decorative symbols, the confirmation of a stop symbol (e.g., a jackpot symbol) by a decorative symbol, and the operation of a specified electric device that operates during the variable display based on the initial winning of a special symbol, thereby making it possible to not execute at least some of the effects.

In addition, if an input operation is possible on the input operation device 260 (see FIG. 1 or FIG. 23) during the variable display, and a button effect in which the effect associated with the execution of the variable display changes depending on the presence or absence of the input operation is executed, the button effect associated with the input operation may be made non-executable. For example, if a display is displayed during the variable display encouraging an input operation such as "Press the button," the input operation on the input operation device 260 may be disabled, thereby stopping some of the functions executed during the period from the occurrence of the initial winning of the special pattern to the end of the variable display based on the initial winning.

When the display of the final stop pattern using the decorative pattern is stopped (i.e., the display of the final stop pattern is not executed), the sub-control board 940 may be configured to display on the decorative pattern display device 479 a display in place of the jackpot pattern suggesting that a jackpot has occurred (for example, a display using character strings such as "Hit?" or "Lucky" that can evoke the occurrence of a jackpot, or a pattern or image that can evoke the occurrence of a jackpot (for example, a character making a fist pump)) on the decorative pattern display device 479, or a display in place of the loss pattern suggesting that a loss has occurred (for example, a display using character strings such as "Too bad" that can evoke the occurrence of a loss, or a pattern or image that can evoke the occurrence of a loss (for example, a character with a drooping head)) on the decorative pattern display device 479.

In this way, by not executing some of the effects, there is an apparent difference between the period from when the press operation device is operated during a non-play state until the variable display ends and the period from when the initial winning of a special symbol occurs until the variable display based on that initial winning ends, in that some of the functions executed during the latter period are not executed during the former period. This allows the player to easily recognize, based on this difference, that the variable display (variable display) displayed when a press operation device such as the press operation device 261 is operated during a non-play state is different from the variable display displayed based on the initial winning of a special symbol, and is a pseudo variable display with no possibility of a special play state occurring after the variable display ends.

In other words, when a player operates the push operation device while in a non-playing state, it is possible to prevent the player or the amusement facility staff from mistaking an impossible event after the pseudo-changing display, such as the occurrence of a special game state after the changing display (changing presentation) displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 based on the operation. This makes it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of unfavorable situations for players and amusement facility staff, such as players mistaking the changing display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 after operating the push operation device while in a non-playing state, and thereby expecting the occurrence of a special game state that should not occur.

In addition, in a configuration in which a variable display (variable performance) that can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 when a special pattern is initiated and a variable display that can cause a specified suggestive performance to appear by performing a push operation on a push operation device (for example, the push operation device 1261 (see Figure 23)) during a specified operable period is provided, when the variable display (variable display configured to allow operation input) is displayed during a non-play state by a push operation of the push operation device 1261, the variable display may be configured to automatically (i.e., without the player's operation) move up and down during the operable period of the variable display by control of the sub-control board 940 as if the push operation device 1261 had been pushed by the player (i.e., so that the appearance of the variable display is the same as when it has been pushed).

Specifically, when a variable display configured to be operable by inputting an operation is displayed during a non-play state (standby), the sub-control board 940 controls the motor 863 (see FIG. 20) to operate the operating mechanism 860 during the operable period of the variable display, so that the push operation device 1261 automatically moves downward from the neutral position, which is the push direction (operation direction) of the push operation device 1261, and then moves upward to return to the neutral position. In this way, when a variable display configured to be operable by inputting an operation by pressing the push operation device 1261 during a non-play state is displayed, it is possible to simulate a situation in which the player operates the push operation device during the operable period of the variable display, without the player actually operating the push operation device.

In this configuration, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to automatically move the push operation device 1261 up and down, and then display a predetermined suggestive effect that can be made to appear by pressing the push operation device 1261. In this way, when a variable display that can be operated by pressing the push operation device 1261 during a non-play state is displayed, the player can virtually experience what kind of suggestive effect will appear if the push operation device is operated during the operable period of the variable display, without actually operating the push operation device.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a variable display configured to be operable is provided as a variable display that can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 when a special pattern is initiated and won, the player can virtually experience the variable display (variable display configured to be operable) while in a non-playing state, which can increase the player's interest in the gameplay brought about by the variable display in which a predetermined suggestive performance can be produced by the player's participation, such as by operating the push-in operation device, thereby increasing the attention paid to the pachinko machine 100.

In addition, the predetermined suggestive effects that can be made to appear by pressing the pressing operation device 1261 can be executed based on the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261, but only when a starting winning of a special symbol has actually occurred. Therefore, the gameplay of suggestive effects appearing in response to a pressing operation, which cannot be obtained through a simulated experience, can be added to the actual game that is executed based on the launch of the game ball, and a player who sees the variable display during a non-play state can be encouraged to start playing.

The sub-control board 940 may be configured to end the non-play state if the player performs a push operation on a push operation device such as push operation device 1261 while a variable display based on the player's push operation on the push operation device during the non-play state is being displayed. In such a case, after the non-play state ends, the sub-control board 940 may, for example, cause the display content of the decorative pattern display device 479 to re-display the content that was displayed before the non-play state began (for example, a confirmation display by decorative pattern 1621).

The end of the non-play state also ends the variable display that was displayed during that non-play state, so the player can easily end the variable display that was displayed by the player pressing the push operation device during the non-play state by pressing the push operation device again during that variable display.

This allows, for example, when a variable display based on a press operation on the press operation device during a non-play state, a player can force-terminate the variable display being displayed by operating the press operation device at the point when the player sees a part of the variable display that the player wants to see, thereby enabling the player to start playing immediately without having to wait until the display of the part that the player does not need has finished.

Ninth embodiment
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 25. In the pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment, in the same configuration as the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment described above, more specifically, in the case where a push operation is performed on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 (see Fig. 1) or the push operation device 1261 (see Fig. 23) during a non-play state (standby), a variable display according to a mode selected under the same selection conditions as when a start winning of a special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) occurs during a game is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, and an example of the display mode of the decorative pattern display device 479 during a non-play state is shown.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-mentioned first to eighth embodiments are given the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. In addition, the components described below as the ninth embodiment may be added to the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to eighth embodiments, or may be provided in place of a portion of the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to eighth embodiments.

Figure 25 (A) is a screen transition diagram showing an example of a screen transition in the variable display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 when a start winning of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) occurs, and Figure 25 (B) is a screen transition diagram showing an example of a screen transition in the variable display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 when a push operation is performed on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 (see Figure 1) during a non-play state.

As shown in FIG. 25(A), when a start winning of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs, a hold indicator 1622 indicating the hold of the right corresponding to the right of the unit game related to the special symbol generated based on the start winning is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 before the start of the unit game related to the special symbol based on the start winning (i.e., before the variable display of the special symbol based on the start winning starts). The hold indicator 1622 is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(A), on the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 479, specifically, below the decorative symbol 1621 that is displayed stationary before the variable display of the special symbol based on the start winning of the special symbol starts. The display control of the hold indicator 1622 is executed by the sub-control board 940.

The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment has a function that indicates to the player the degree of possibility (expectation) of transitioning to a special game state after the unit game related to the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends during the period from when the starting conditions are met to when the variable display (unit game) begins. As an example of this function, a case where the hold display 1622 is used will be explained.

The hold display 1622 indicates the expectation of a transition to a special game state set for that shape, depending on its shape. For example, if the hold display 1622 is shaped like a star as shown in FIG. 25(A), this indicates that the expectation of a jackpot win in a special symbol lottery held based on the initial winning of the special symbol corresponding to that hold display (the expectation of a transition to a special game state based on that initial winning) is a predetermined value (e.g., approximately 70%) set for that star shape.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, multiple types of hold displays 1622 with different shapes are prepared for display, and are configured to indicate different degrees of expectation (degree of expectation for transition to the special game state) depending on the difference in the shape of the hold display 1622.

For example, when the hold display 1622 is star-shaped, it indicates the highest expectation (e.g., approximately 70%) among all the shapes of the hold display 1622 that can be displayed, when the hold display 1622 is an equilateral triangle, it indicates a lower expectation (e.g., approximately 50%) than when the hold display 1622 is a star shape, when the hold display 1622 is an inverted triangle, it indicates a lower expectation (e.g., approximately 30%) than when the hold display 1622 is an equilateral triangle, and when the hold display 1622 is a circle, it indicates a lower expectation (e.g., approximately 10%) than when the hold display 1622 is an inverted triangle. The player can relatively recognize the level of expectation for transitioning to the special game state based on the difference in the shape of the hold display 1622.

The indication of the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state by the hold display 1622 does not necessarily have to be made by the shape of the hold display 1622, and may be made by using elements other than the shape, such as the color of the hold display 1622 or the display mode of the hold display 1622 (e.g., blinking, etc.), instead of or in addition to the shape of the hold display 1622.

The expectation of a transition to a special game state set for each shape of the reserved display 1622 is determined by the probability of winning in the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) held based on the initial winning of the special pattern corresponding to that reserved display, the selection probability in the selection table referenced if the special pattern lottery is won, and the selection probability in the selection table referenced if the special pattern lottery is not won.

The configuration may include a hold display 1622 with a shape indicating the expectation level for a transition to a special game state, and a hold display 1622 with a shape that does not indicate the expectation level (unrelated to the expectation level). In such a case, the sub-control board 940 may select, by a predetermined lottery, whether or not to indicate the expectation level with the hold display 1622, and if it is selected not to indicate the expectation level, display the hold display 1622 with a shape that does not indicate the expectation level (e.g., a star shape or an equilateral triangle shape), and if it is selected to indicate the expectation level, display the hold display 1622 with a shape that corresponds to the expectation level for a transition to a special game state (e.g., a circle shape).

The type of hold display 1622 may also have a function of changing shape from a hold display 1622 with a low expectation shape to a hold display with a high expectation shape.

In FIG. 25(A), an example is shown in which a start winning of a special pattern occurs when the number of reserved plays for a unit play related to a special pattern is zero, and as a result, one reserved display 1622 is displayed based on the occurrence of the start winning. One reserved display 1622 is displayed for each right to a unit play related to a special pattern.

In addition, when the number of reserved unit games related to a special pattern is 1 or more and a new start winning of the special pattern occurs, the shape of the reserved display 1622 corresponding to the new start winning may be displayed in a shape according to the degree of expectation. For example, the shape of the reserved display 1622 corresponding to the new start winning may be temporarily displayed in a shape according to the degree of expectation (for example, for a predetermined period such as 30 seconds, the period until the next start winning of the special pattern occurs, or the period until one unit game right related to the reserved special pattern is used up).

When the display of the special symbol based on the start winning of the special symbol starts, the reserved display 1622 corresponding to the start winning disappears and becomes invisible in the decorative symbol display device 479, and the display of the decorative symbol 1621 starts. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25(A), during the display of the decorative symbol 1621 (display of the special symbol), the suggestion display 1623 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability smaller than 100, such as 30% or 60%, or may be 100%).

Suggestion display 1623, like hold display 1622, functions as a display showing the expectation of transitioning to a special game state after the unit game related to the special pattern ends (expectation of transitioning to a special game state). In other words, suggestion display 1623 functions as a display suggesting the degree of possibility of transitioning to a special game state after the variable display of the decorative pattern 1621 currently being executed ends. Note that the display control of suggestion display 1623 is executed by the sub-control board 940.

In the example shown in FIG. 25(A), the suggestion display 1623 is configured in the shape of a speech bubble containing a comment such as "Super hot!". The suggestion display 1623 in the shape of a speech bubble indicates the expectation (reliability) of transitioning to a special game state after the ongoing variable display, depending on the content of the comment in the speech bubble (e.g., "Super hot!" or "Chance!"). For example, if the content of the comment included in the speech bubble constituting the suggestion display 1623 is "Super hot!" as shown in FIG. 25(A), it indicates that the expectation of transitioning to a special game state after the ongoing variable display is a predetermined value (e.g., approximately 80%) set for the content of the comment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, multiple types of suggestion displays 1623 with different comment content are prepared and can be displayed, and are configured to indicate different degrees of expectation (degree of expectation for transition to the special game state) depending on the differences in the content of the comments in the suggestion displays 1623. The player can relatively recognize the level of expectation for transition to the special game state based on the differences in the content of the comments in the suggestion displays 1623.

The expectation of a transition to a special game state, which is set for the content of the comment in the suggestion display 1623, is determined by the probability of winning in the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) conducted based on the initial winning of the special pattern corresponding to the suggestion display, the selection probability in the selection table that is referenced if the special pattern lottery is won, and the selection probability in the selection table that is referenced if the special pattern lottery is not won.

The degree of expectation (magnitude of expectation) of transitioning to the special game state indicated by the suggestion display 1623 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 may be the same as or different from the degree of expectation of transitioning to the special game state indicated by the pending display 1622 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 before the suggestion display 1623 (i.e., the pending display 1622 based on the initial winning of the same special pattern as the suggestion display 1623).

In addition, if the magnitude of the expectation level indicated by the suggestion display 1623 (expectation level of transitioning to a special game state) is different from the magnitude of the expectation level indicated by the pending display 1622 corresponding to the suggestion display 1623, the former may be a value greater than the latter, or the former may be a value smaller than the latter.

The suggestion display 1623 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 while the decorative pattern 1621 is being displayed (while the special pattern is being displayed), does not necessarily have to be in the form of a speech bubble as shown in FIG. 25(A), but may be a character indicating the expected degree of transition to a different special game state depending on its type, or a combination of the character and the speech bubble described above, or may be displayed as a still image, or may be a video in which the character's movements and the text in the speech bubble are gradually displayed.

When a reach display occurs in the variable display of the decorative pattern 1621, similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment described above, after the reach display is displayed, a suggestive effect in which a specified character appears is executed with a specified probability (for example, a probability smaller than 100, such as 30% or 60%, or it may be 100%). The display control of the suggestive effect is executed by the sub-control board 940. The suggestive effect in which a specified character appears may be an effect executed (displayed) only for a specific reach display such as a so-called super reach, or may be displayed before the reach display, or may be displayed after the start winning and before the unit game starts.

As with the first suggestive effect in the fifth embodiment, multiple types of effect patterns are prepared for the suggestive effect after the reach display according to the expectation (reliability) of the transition to the special game state. The expectation of the transition to the special game state set for each effect pattern is determined by the probability of winning in the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) performed based on the initial winning of the special pattern corresponding to the reach display, the selection probability in the selection table referenced if the special pattern lottery is won, and the selection probability in the selection table referenced if the special pattern lottery is not won.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, each presentation pattern in the suggestive presentation after the reach display is configured to differ according to the expectation level for a transition to a special game state set for that presentation pattern, and examples of presentation patterns include multiple types of characters with different aspects such as character type, clothing, belongings, and behavior.

For example, if a character CA11 appears holding a sword in its right hand in a suggestive performance after a reach indication, this indicates that the likelihood of transitioning to a special game state thereafter is a predetermined value (e.g., approximately 90%) set for that character CA11. The player can relatively recognize the likelihood of transitioning to a special game state based on the type of character that appears in the suggestive performance.

When a suggestive effect is executed after a reach display in the varying display of the decorative pattern 1621, after the end of the suggestive effect, a confirmed display of the decorative pattern 1621 corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery conducted based on the initial winning of the special pattern corresponding to the reach display is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. For example, if the lottery result of the special pattern lottery conducted based on the initial winning of the special pattern corresponding to the reach display is a jackpot win, the decorative pattern 1621 is confirmed and displayed as "777" or the like as shown in FIG. 25(A).

When a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started during play, the decorative symbol 1621 corresponding to the change pattern selected based on the values of the various change type counters is displayed from start to finish (determined display) in the change display time (change time) corresponding to the selected change pattern. In other words, when a special symbol is started during play, the period (time) from the start to the end of the decorative symbol 1621 change display is the change time corresponding to the change pattern of the change display (i.e., the selected change pattern).

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a push operation is performed on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during a non-play state (standby), a variable display selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol is initiated during play is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 as a pseudo variable display for demonstration purposes, similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment.

In addition, the selection conditions for the variable display when a push operation is performed on a push operation device such as push operation device 261 during a non-play state and the selection conditions for the variable display when a special pattern is initially won during play do not necessarily have to be identical or approximately identical, and the selection conditions for the variable display may be different between when a push operation is performed on a push operation device during a non-play state and when a special pattern is initially won during play.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-play state, the period (time) from the start (beginning) to the end (confirmation display, which is the end of the variable display) of the decorative pattern 1621 corresponding to the variable pattern selected under the same selection conditions as when the initial winning of a special pattern occurs during play is shorter than the variable display time corresponding to the variable display's variable pattern (i.e., the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern).

For example, as shown in FIG. 25(B), when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during a non-playing state, after the display of the hold display 1622, a pseudo-changing display for demonstration purposes using the decorative pattern 1621 is started, and during the period from the start of the changing display to the appearance of the suggestive performance after the reach display, the changing display is displayed faster (i.e., the playback speed of the video is increased) than the corresponding period in the changing display based on the initial winning of the special pattern (i.e., the period from the start of the changing display based on the initial winning of the special pattern to the appearance of the suggestive performance after the reach display), thereby making it possible to make the time from the start to the end of the pseudo-changing display for demonstration purposes shorter than the changing time corresponding to the changing pattern of the changing display.

As a specific example of making the time from the start of the variable display based on the push operation device during a non-play state (i.e., a pseudo variable display for demo purposes) to the appearance of the suggestive performance after the reach display shorter than the corresponding period in the variable display based on the initial winning of a special symbol, for example, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-play state, the content displayed during the period from the start of the variable display based on the push operation (i.e., a pseudo variable display for demo purposes) to the appearance of the suggestive performance after the reach display may be displayed faster than the variable display during the period from the start of the variable display based on the initial winning of a special symbol to the appearance of the suggestive performance after the reach display (i.e., the video playback speed is made faster than when an initial winning of a special symbol occurs).

Alternatively, for example, when a push operation is performed on a push operation device such as push operation device 261 during a non-play state, the display of the content of the variable display based on the push operation that should be displayed between the start of the variable display and the appearance of the suggestive performance after the reach display may be omitted (i.e., the suggestive performance after the reach display is displayed after the start of the variable display).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a suggestive effect is displayed after a reach display in a pseudo variable display for demonstration (i.e., a variable display based on a push operation on the push operation device during a non-play state), two or more suggestive effects (i.e., two or more suggestive effects that can be displayed by a variable display executed separately by two start wins as a variable display based on a start win) with different expectations for a transition to a special play state depending on the display content are configured to be displayed simultaneously on the decorative pattern display device 479. Note that the control of this display is executed by the sub-control board 940.

For example, if multiple types of characters with different expectations for transitioning to a special game state are prepared as characters that can appear during a suggestive performance, two or more suggestive performances in which at least some of these multiple types of characters appear are configured to be displayed simultaneously on the decorative pattern display device 479.

Specifically, for example, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device during a non-play state, if four types of characters CA11 to CA14, each with a different expectation for a transition to a special play state, are prepared as characters that can appear in a suggestive performance after a reach display in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern, as shown in Figure 25 (B), suggestive performances including each of these four types of characters CA11 to CA14 are displayed in each of display areas 479D to 479G, which divide the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479 into approximately four parts vertically and horizontally.

As a result, two or more suggestive effects, which have different expectations for a transition to a special game state depending on the type of character that appears, are simultaneously displayed in each of the display areas 479D to 479G in a reduced size compared to when the image (frame image) that constitutes the variable display, such as a variable display based on the initial winning of a special pattern, is displayed across the entire display area of the decorative pattern display device 479.

The suggestive effects (post-reach suggestive effects) that can appear in the change display corresponding to the selected change pattern and that have different expectations for a transition to a special game state do not necessarily have to be of four types corresponding to the four types of characters mentioned above, but may be of three or less types, or five or more types.

In addition, if the number of suggestive effects (post-reach suggestive effects) with different expectations for transition to a special game state that can be displayed in the change display corresponding to the selected change pattern is greater than the number of display areas divided in the decorative pattern display device 479 to display each post-reach suggestive effect (for example, four in the example shown in FIG. 25(B)), the configuration may be such that only the number of suggestive effects that can be displayed in the divided display areas is selected and displayed from the suggestive effects that can be displayed.

In addition, the number of display areas divided in the decorative pattern display device 479 to display each suggestive performance after a reach does not necessarily have to be four as described above, and may be three or less, or five or more. In addition, the number of display areas divided in the decorative pattern display device 479 to display each suggestive performance after a reach may be variable according to the selected variation pattern (i.e., according to the number of suggestive performances after a reach that can appear in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-play state, before the start of the pseudo variable display for demonstration, as shown in FIG. 25(B), a reserve display 1622 is displayed as a pseudo reserve display corresponding to the pseudo variable display. More specifically, the reserve display 1622 is configured so that at least a portion of the reserve displays 1622 of different shapes (two or more types of reserve displays 1622) that differ depending on the level of expectation (magnitude of expectation) for a transition to the special play state is displayed simultaneously on the decorative pattern display device 479. Note that the control of the display is executed by the sub-control board 940.

For example, if four types of shapes (e.g., a star, an equilateral triangle, an inverted triangle, and a circle) are prepared as the shape of the pending display 1622 corresponding to the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state, as shown in FIG. 25(B), these four types of pending display 1622 are simultaneously displayed in each of the display areas 479D to 479G obtained by dividing the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479 before the start of the pseudo variable display for the demo.

As a result, the display images including two or more types of reserved displays 1622, which have different expectations for transition to a special game state depending on their shapes, are displayed in the respective display areas 479 in a reduced size compared to the case where an image (frame image) constituting the variable display, such as a variable display based on a start winning of a different pattern, is displayed over the entire display area of the decorative pattern display device 479.
Displayed simultaneously on D to 479G.

In addition, if the number of differently shaped pending displays 1622 is greater than the number of display areas divided in the decorative pattern display device 479 to display each of the pending displays 1622 (for example, four in the example shown in FIG. 25(B)), the configuration may be such that only the number of differently shaped pending displays 1622 that can be displayed in the divided display areas is selected and displayed.

In addition, the number of display areas divided in the decorative pattern display device 479 to display the different shapes of reserved displays 1622 does not necessarily have to be four as described above, and may be three or less, or five or more. In addition, the number of display areas divided in the decorative pattern display device 479 to display the different shapes of reserved displays 1622 and the number of display areas divided to display each character that can appear in the suggestive performance do not necessarily have to be the same, and the former number and the latter number may be different.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-play state, as shown in FIG. 25(B), a pseudo confirmation display for demo using decorative patterns 1621 (more specifically, a confirmation display of decorative patterns 1621 consisting of a combination of patterns corresponding to the stop patterns determined based on the demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number) that is displayed after the variable display based on the push operation (pseudo variable display for demo) is completed is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 in a size smaller than the confirmation display by decorative patterns 1621 that is displayed after the variable display based on the start winning of a special pattern is completed (see FIG. 25A). Display control of the size of the confirmation display is performed by the sub-control board 940.

When a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-play state, as shown in FIG. 25(B), in addition to a pseudo confirmation display for demonstration purposes using decorative pattern 1621, display 1624 including information that can remind the player that the game is in a non-play state is displayed. Display control of display 1624 is performed by sub-control board 940.

A player who sees display 1624 can recognize, based on the content of display 1624 (i.e., information that allows the player to recall that the player is in a non-playing state), that the confirmation display by decorative pattern 1621 displayed on decorative pattern display device 479 is not a confirmation display that is displayed after the variable display based on the initial winning of a special pattern has ended, but a pseudo confirmation display for demonstration purposes.

In the example shown in FIG. 25(B), display 1624 includes the character string "Demo in progress" as information that can be used to evoke the non-play state, but any character string other than "Demo in progress" may be used as long as it can evoke the non-play state. In addition, the information that can evoke the non-play state included in display 1624 does not necessarily have to be the character string "Demo in progress" as described above, but may also be a picture or design (for example, a picture such as a cross) that can evoke the non-play state.

In addition, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-play state, after the variable display based on the push operation (pseudo variable display for demonstration) ends, instead of the pseudo fixed display for demonstration using the decorative pattern 1621, a pseudo fixed display for demonstration using the alternative display 1625 not including the decorative pattern 1621 as shown in FIG. 25(B) may be displayed. Note that the display control of the alternative display 1625 is executed by the sub-control board 940.

The substitute display 1625 is composed of a display that substitutes for a jackpot symbol to indicate that a jackpot has occurred, and a display that substitutes for a miss symbol to indicate that a miss has occurred.

Examples of substitute displays 1625 that take the place of a jackpot pattern to suggest that a jackpot has occurred include character strings such as "Atari?" or "Lucky" that can evoke the occurrence of a jackpot, and pictures or images that can evoke the occurrence of a jackpot (such as a character making a fist pump as shown in FIG. 25(B)).

On the other hand, examples of substitute displays 1625 that replace the losing symbol and suggest that a loss has occurred include a character string such as "unfortunate" that can evoke the occurrence of a loss, or a pattern or image that can evoke the occurrence of a loss (for example, a character with a drooping head).

Next, we will explain the operation and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, by performing a push operation on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 during a non-play state, it is possible to display a pending display 1622, the shape of which can suggest the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state, and a variable display including a suggestive performance after a reach display, as a pseudo-variable display for demonstration purposes. Therefore, even if a starting winning of a special pattern does not occur (even if a starting winning of a special pattern does not occur), the player can visually see what kind of display can suggest the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state, such as the suggestive performance after a reach or the pending display 1622.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a variable display including a display that can suggest the degree of expectation, such as a suggestive performance after a reach, can be displayed as a variable display based on the initial winning of a special symbol, or in which the degree of expectation can be suggested by a pending display 1622 for the initial winning when a special symbol starts winning, it is possible to improve the playability of inferring an expected event (for example, the degree of ease of transition to a special game state) from the content of the variable display after the variable display based on the initial winning of a special symbol, thereby increasing the attention paid to the gaming machine.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during a non-play state, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(B), the time from the start of the pseudo-changing display for demonstration by the decorative pattern 1621 to the appearance of the suggestive performance after the reach display is displayed in a shorter time than the time from the start of the changing display to the appearance of the suggestive performance after the reach display in the changing display based on the initial winning of the special pattern, thereby making it possible to display the pseudo-changing display for demonstration within a time shorter than the changing display time (changing time) corresponding to the changing pattern of the changing display.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a variation pattern corresponding to a variation display including a display (effect) that can suggest the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state, such as a suggestive effect after a reach, is prepared as a selectable variation pattern, a player can efficiently view a display that can suggest the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state (for example, a suggestive effect after a reach display) that is included in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern, within a time that is shorter than the variation display time corresponding to that variation pattern (i.e., the variation time for the variation display including that display), by operating (pressing) the pressing operation device during a non-game state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-play state, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(B), a hold display 1622 capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state by its shape is displayed before the start of the pseudo-variable display for the demo. Therefore, by pushing the push operation device during a non-play state, the player can visually recognize the display image including the hold display 1622 of a predetermined shape before (at the start of) the pseudo-variable display for the demo. As described above, the pseudo-variable display for the demo is configured to be shorter than the variation time of the variable display based on the start winning of the special pattern, so that the display image including the display (e.g., the hold display 1622) capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state is displayed before the start of the pseudo-variable display for the demo, thereby making it possible for the player to efficiently visually recognize the display capable of suggesting the degree of expectation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a suggestive effect is displayed after a reach display in a variable display (a pseudo variable display for demonstration purposes) based on a push operation on the push operation device during a non-play state, two or more suggestive effects with different expectations for a transition to a special play state depending on the display content are simultaneously displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479.

By pressing the pressing device during a non-play state, the player can simultaneously view two or more displays (e.g., suggestive effects after a reach display) that can suggest the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state that can appear in a variable display corresponding to the same pattern (e.g., a super reach). Therefore, during a non-play state, the player can efficiently recognize the difference between two or more displays that can suggest the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state that can appear in a variable display corresponding to the same pattern, and can play while being aware of the difference in the degree of expectation that corresponds to the difference in the display that can suggest the degree of expectation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-play state, two or more types of hold displays 1622, whose shapes indicate different expectations for a transition to a special play state, are simultaneously displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 before the start of the simulated variable display for demonstration purposes.

As a result, the player can view the two or more types of reserve displays 1622 at the same time by pressing the pressing operation device during a non-play state. Therefore, during a non-play state, the player can efficiently recognize the difference in the shape of the reserve displays 1622 contained in the display image before the start of the pseudo variable display for the demo, and therefore, during play, the player can play while being aware of the difference in the expectation for a transition to the special game state according to the difference in the shape of the reserve displays 1622 contained in the display image before the start of the variable display based on the initial winning of the special pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, during the period from the start to the end of the variable display (pseudo variable display for demonstration) based on the pressing operation of the pressing operation device during a non-playing state (i.e., while the variable display is being executed) or before the start of the variable display (at the start), displays that can suggest the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state, such as a display image including a suggestive performance after a reach or a display image including a hold display 1622, are displayed in a reduced size compared to when an image (frame image) constituting the variable display is displayed over the entire display area of the decorative pattern display device 479, such as a variable display based on the initial winning of a special pattern.

This allows the player to easily recognize, based on the display size, that displays that can suggest the likelihood of a transition to a special game state, such as a display image of a suggestive performance after a reach or a display image including a hold display 1622, which are displayed based on a press operation on the press operation device during a non-game state, are displays that are unlikely to result in a special game state after they are displayed (more specifically, after a variable display based on a press operation on the press operation device during a non-game state).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-play state, the pseudo confirmation display for demo using the decorative pattern 1621 that is displayed after the variable display based on the push operation (pseudo variable display for demo) ends is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 in a size smaller than the confirmation display using the decorative pattern 1621 that is displayed after the variable display based on the initial winning of the special pattern ends.

Therefore, in this respect, the display size of the demo pseudo confirmation display can be used to conveniently allow the player to recognize that there is no possibility of a special game state occurring after the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during a non-game state (more specifically, after the demo pseudo confirmation display is displayed).

Tenth Embodiment
Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 26. In the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment, when the start winning of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs, the display mode of the variable display and the fixed display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is devised.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-mentioned first to ninth embodiments are given the same reference numerals and will not be described. In addition, the components described below as the tenth embodiment may be added to the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to ninth embodiments, or may be provided in place of a portion of the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to ninth embodiments.

Figure 26 (Figure 26 (A) and Figure 26 (B)) is a screen diagram showing an example of a variable display and a fixed display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 in the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as one form of the variable display executed when a special symbol is initiated, the machine is configured to be able to display a variable display as shown in FIG. 26, which is displayed as if it were displayed on the display screen of the pachinko machine indicated by the gaming machine image 1701 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 (hereinafter, this variable display is also referred to as a "variable display using a gaming machine image").

When a special symbol starts winning and a variable pattern corresponding to the variable display is selected, the variable display using the gaming machine image is selected for execution (display) with a predetermined selection probability set for the variable display. The selection probability may be a value greater than 0% and less than 100%, or may be 100%. Note that the variable display using the gaming machine image may be configured to be selected (displayed, executed) with a predetermined selection probability only when the variable display is a variable pattern accompanied by a specific reach display (for example, a super reach).

As shown in FIG. 26, the variable display using the gaming machine image includes a gaming machine image 1701 and a player image 1702. Note that the display control of the variable display using the gaming machine image, including the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702, is performed by the sub-control board 940.

The gaming machine image 1701 is an image corresponding to a pachinko machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 played by a player). The gaming machine image 1701 is preferably displayed as a reduced image of a pachinko machine having the same shape as the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 etc., and in the example shown in FIG. 26, the pachinko machine is shown diagrammatically. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 26, the gaming machine image 1701 is an image corresponding to a pachinko machine viewed from the left diagonal front side. Note that the pachinko machine shown by the gaming machine image 1701 does not necessarily have to be a pachinko machine viewed from the diagonal front side, but may be a pachinko machine viewed from the front.

The variable display using the game machine image is displayed in the game machine image 1701 on the display screen of the display device corresponding to the decorative pattern display device 479 in the pachinko machine indicated by the game machine image 1701. Therefore, when the game machine image 1701 is an image corresponding to the pachinko machine viewed from the diagonally forward side (for example, the diagonally forward left side) as shown in Fig. 26, the variable display using the game machine image is displayed in a substantially parallelogram area 1701A corresponding to the substantially rectangular display screen of the display device (display device corresponding to the decorative pattern display device 479) of the pachinko machine indicated by the game machine image 1701 in the game machine image 1701, in a manner as if the variable display was viewed from the diagonally forward side.

The variable display that can be displayed (appeared) for the variable pattern corresponding to the variable display using the gaming machine image may be configured to be only the variable display using the gaming machine image, or may be configured to include not only the variable display using the gaming machine image, but also other variable displays that do not display the gaming machine image 1701 (for example, the variable display shown in FIG. 25(A)). Hereinafter, other variable displays that do not display the gaming machine image 1701 are also simply referred to as "other variable displays."

The player image 1702 is an image corresponding to a player located in front of the pachinko machine indicated by the game machine image 1701. Note that the player image 1702 (image corresponding to a player) may be an image of a drawn character representing a player, as shown in FIG. 26, or may be a photographed image of a player actually playing the pachinko machine 100, photographed by a camera or the like provided on the pachinko machine 100.

When a start winning of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs and execution of a variable display using a gaming machine image is selected, as shown in FIG. 26(A), a variable display using the gaming machine image is started in area 1701A (area corresponding to the display screen of the display device provided in the pachinko machine shown by gaming machine image 1701) in the gaming machine image 1701 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. Note that the example shown in FIG. 26(A) illustrates a state in which the decorative pattern 1621 is changing.

The variable display using the gaming machine image is displayed as a final display after the variable display time (variation time) for the variable pattern corresponding to the variable display has elapsed since the variable display started. The final display may be configured to display a combination of decorative patterns 1621 corresponding to the results of the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery), or may display the lottery result using an alternative display 1625. Note that the example shown in FIG. 26(B) illustrates a state in which an alternative display 1625 (specifically, an alternative display 1625 of a character making a fist pump) that takes the place of a jackpot pattern suggesting that a jackpot has occurred is displayed as the final display.

When the variable display that can be displayed for the variable display pattern corresponding to the variable display using the gaming machine image is configured to include a variable display using the gaming machine image and another variable display (i.e., another variable display that does not display the gaming machine image 1701), the variable display using the gaming machine image may be displayed by reusing video data corresponding to the other variable display without preparing dedicated video data (image data) corresponding to the variable display using the gaming machine image. Note that a configuration in which dedicated video data corresponding to the variable display using the gaming machine image is prepared may also be used.

Specifically, the images (unit images) of each frame constituting the video data corresponding to the other variable displays are processed, such as by deformation or reduction, so that the images fit the shape of area 1701A, which is an approximate parallelogram, and a series of videos (images) composed of the processed images are displayed sequentially in area 1701A. This makes it possible to display a variable display using game machine images in area 1701A without having to prepare special video data corresponding to the variable display using game machine images. Note that the control of the processing (deformation, reduction, etc.) of the images of each frame described above, and the display control of the video composed of the processed images (i.e., the variable display using game machine images) are performed by the sub-control board 940.

When video data corresponding to other variable displays is reused to display a variable display using game machine images, the content of the variable display using game machine images is the same as the content of the other variable displays corresponding to the video data from which it was reused, but the variable display using game machine images (including the final display) is composed of images that have been processed by transforming, reducing, or otherwise modifying the images of the frames that make up the video data corresponding to the other variable displays, and is therefore a variable display with a display mode that differs from the display mode of the other variable displays.

Therefore, by displaying a variable display using game machine images by reusing video data corresponding to other variable displays, it is possible to increase the variety of variable display modes (display modes) while suppressing the amount of video data (image data) stored. Also, it is possible to easily reduce the need to develop multiple types of variable displays, such as variable displays using game machine images and other variable displays, and the suggestive effects that appear in each of these multiple types of variable displays, and development costs can be suppressed accordingly.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a definitive display is made in the variable display using the gaming machine image, the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the definitive display is suggested by the appearance of the player shown in the player image 1702.

For example, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot win, when the confirmation display corresponding to the lottery result is made, as shown in FIG. 26(B), a player image 1702 corresponding to a player in an appearance that can evoke the occurrence of a jackpot (for example, the player smiling or making a fist pump) is displayed. On the other hand, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss (not a jackpot win), a player image 1702 corresponding to a player in an appearance that can evoke the occurrence of a miss (for example, the player looking down) is displayed when the confirmation display corresponding to the lottery result is made.

When a final display is made in the variable display using the gaming machine image, in addition to or instead of a configuration in which the result of the lottery for the special pattern corresponding to the final display is suggested by the appearance of the player shown by the player image 1702, a configuration may be used in which, after a reach display in the variable display using the gaming machine image, the degree of possibility of transitioning to a special gaming state after the variable display ends (expectation level for transition to the special gaming state) is suggested by the appearance of the player shown by the player image 1702. For example, a configuration may be used in which the expectation level for transitioning to the special gaming state is changed depending on the difference in the facial expression of the player shown by the player image 1702.

In addition, for example, the expectation level (expectation level for transition to a special game state) in the suggestive effect displayed on the pachinko machine shown by the game machine image 1701 may be varied depending on the state of the player shown by the player image 1702. For example, the higher the expectation level for the suggestive effect, the larger the player image 1702 corresponding to the player who makes a larger fist pump (raising his hand higher) may be displayed, and the lower the expectation level for the suggestive effect, the larger the player image 1702 corresponding to the player who appears to be bowing his head. In this way, the player image 1702 can clearly suggest an effect with a high expectation level for transitioning to a special game state.

In addition, in a variable display that allows input of operations using various input operation devices 260 including pressure operation devices such as the pressure operation device 1261, depending on the movements and appearance of the player shown by the player image 1702, the display may be configured to suggest the method of operation of the input operation device 260 during the variable display, the time of operation (operation timing), and the result of the operation (for example, the appearance of a character or a change in the display content).

The variable display including the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 may also be used to display a part of the variable display executed during the non-play state in the pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment (for example, a part including the final part of the variable display that displays the stopped pattern) or the entire variable display, thereby making it easy for players and arcade staff to understand that this is a different variable display from the one displayed when a special pattern is started.

The variable display including the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 may be displayed together with the suggested performance when the suggested performance is displayed in the customer waiting performance in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment, and the variable display can clearly suggest a performance that will be advantageous to the player by the actions of the player in the player image 1702.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a special symbol is activated, the sub-control board 940 causes the decorative symbol display device 479 to display the game machine image 1701, which is an image corresponding to the pachinko machine, and the player image 1702, which is an image corresponding to the player located in front of the pachinko machine indicated by the game machine image 1701, and also displays the contents of other variable displays that can be displayed when a special symbol is activated in an area of the game machine image 1701 that corresponds to the display screen of the display device provided with the pachinko machine indicated by the game machine image 1701.

Therefore, through the actions and appearance of the player (player image 1702) playing the pachinko machine (game machine image 1701) displayed in the decorative pattern display device 479, a player playing the pachinko machine 100 can be informed of various information, such as the degree of expectation of a transition to a special game state in response to the current varying display displayed based on the initial winning of a special pattern, the player's emotions according to the expectation indicated by the suggestive performance, and how to operate the pachinko machine.

In the above-mentioned tenth embodiment, when a special symbol is initially won, a variable display using a gaming machine image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, when a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 is pushed during a non-play state (standby), and the execution of a variable display using a gaming machine image is selected, a variable display using a gaming machine image may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the same manner as when a special symbol is initially won.

By displaying a change display using the gaming machine image during a non-playing state (a change display including a gaming machine image 1701 and a player image 1702), a player who sees the change display can experience the changes in behavior and emotions that occur when playing the pachinko machine 100 through the actions and appearance of the player (player image 1702) playing the pachinko machine (gaming machine image 1701) displayed in the decorative pattern display device 479, and can also learn how to operate the pachinko machine before playing.

The sub-control board 940 may be configured to control, when displaying the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 on the decorative pattern display device 479, to display at least one of the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 with at least a portion of the image being different depending on whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot win or not. With this configuration, the result of the special pattern lottery can be suggested to the player by a difference in at least a portion of at least one of the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be capable of executing a first lottery result display control for displaying the lottery result of the special pattern lottery in a predetermined manner (e.g., a combination of three patterns) when a special pattern is initially won, and a second lottery result display control for displaying the lottery result of the special pattern lottery in a manner different from the predetermined manner (e.g., a display manner in which the combination of three patterns corresponding to the lottery result, including the game machine image 1701 and the player image 1702, has been modified, reduced, or otherwise processed), or for displaying a predetermined image corresponding to a jackpot win (e.g., an alternative display 1625 of a character making a fist pump) that is an image with content different from the lottery result of the predetermined manner.

The lottery results displayed by the second lottery result display control therefore have a different display format or content than the lottery results displayed by the first lottery result display control, which increases the variety in the display of lottery results and makes it difficult to understand the lottery results due to images that are distorted, reduced, or have different content. This provides a gameplay experience that allows players to focus on the lottery results when they are displayed.

In particular, as illustrated in this embodiment, when a gaming machine image 1701 corresponding to a pachinko machine viewed from diagonally forward is used, the results of the special pattern lottery are also displayed as if viewed from diagonally forward, making it possible to effectively make the display of the lottery results difficult to grasp.

In addition, if a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 is pushed during a non-play state (standby) and execution of a variable display using a gaming machine image is selected, and the configuration is such that a variable display using a gaming machine image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 in the same manner as when a special pattern is initiated and won, it can be known in advance, such as before playing, that the pachinko machine 100 has the playability to focus on the lottery result when the lottery result is displayed.

In the above tenth embodiment, all of the contents of the other variable displays are displayed in the variable display using the gaming machine image, but this is not limited to all of the contents of the other variable displays being displayed in the variable display using the gaming machine image, and only a portion of the contents of the other variable displays (for example, only the suggestive performance) may be displayed in the variable display using the gaming machine image.

In addition, when a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 is pressed during a non-play state (standby), a variable display is executed by lottery result display control using the gaming machine image and the player image, and when a start winning of a special pattern occurs, the lottery result may be displayed by normal lottery result display control using a combination of three patterns.

In addition, when a gaming machine image and a player image are displayed together with the image of the changing display, the portion where the changing display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern is displayed (for example, the portion where a number pattern is displayed) may be displayed in the same location and in the same manner (appearance) as when the gaming machine image is not displayed, without changing the orientation of the pattern to deform it, and the sub-control board 940 may control the effects displayed in conjunction with the changing display so that they are displayed at an angle in accordance with the orientation of the gaming machine image.

Eleventh Embodiment
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 27. In the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment, as a variable display (variable performance) that can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 when a special pattern is started, a variable display that can be operated and input (i.e., a variable display that can produce a predetermined performance by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 during a predetermined operable period) is provided, and the device is designed to allow the player to operate the pressing operation device in a suitable manner.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-mentioned first to tenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. Also, the components described below as the eleventh embodiment may be added to the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to tenth embodiments, or may be provided in place of a portion of the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to tenth embodiments.

Figure 27 (Figure 27 (A) and Figure 27 (B)) is a screen diagram showing an example of the display content displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during an operable period in a variable display configured to allow operational input in a pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment.

For reference, in FIG. 27(A), the right hand 1712C is shown by a dashed line as the hand touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A when the operation surface is in the neutral position.

Here, the "operation surface of the push operation device 1712A" refers to the surface that corresponds to the surface that the player touches when operating the push operation device 1261 that corresponds to the push operation device 1712A. Therefore, in the push operation device 1712A, which is an image that corresponds to the push operation device 1261 that can be pushed downward, the upper side surface (top end surface) of the push operation device 1712A becomes the operation surface.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, during an operable period in the variable display configured to allow operation input, a presentation image 1711 corresponding to a predetermined presentation (e.g., a presentation in which a predetermined change occurs in response to the pressing operation) that appears when the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed, a presentation image 1712 corresponding to a presentation related to the movement of the pressing operation device 1261, and display information 1713 corresponding to information related to the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 (e.g., text information in the form of a string of characters such as "Continuous Press!" or "PUSH!") are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479.

The performance image 1711 is an image (more specifically, a moving image) including images corresponding to the character 1711A, the balloon 1711B, and the foot pump 1711C for pumping air into the balloon 1711B. The performance image 1711 is a moving image corresponding to the performance in which the character 1711A steps on the foot pump 1711C in response to a pressing operation performed on the pressing operation device during an operable period, thereby causing the balloon 1711B to inflate. The moving image data corresponding to the performance image 1711 is stored in a specified area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940, and the display control of the performance image 1711 is performed by the sub-control board 940.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the effect of the effect image 1711 is configured as a suggestive effect that indicates the degree of expectation for a transition to the special game state depending on the size of the balloon 1711B that gradually expands until it pops. For example, the larger the size of the balloon 1711B when it pops, the higher the expectation for a transition to the special game state.

The performance image 1712 is an image (more specifically, a moving image) that includes images corresponding to a pressing operation device 1712A corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261 and a hand (e.g., the left hand) 1712B touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A.

More specifically, the performance image 1712 is a moving image corresponding to a performance in which a left hand 1712B touches the operation surface of a pressing operation device 1712A whose operation surface is located in a neutral position (see FIG. 27(A)), and then the pressing operation device 1712A is pressed downward by the action of left hand 1712B (pushing downward) (see FIG. 27(B)), and then a series of reciprocating actions is performed at least once (repeated multiple times) in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A moves upward (rises) until it reaches the neutral position.

When the effect image 1712 is an image corresponding to the left hand 1712B pressing downward on the pressing operation device 1712A with the operation surface in the neutral position as shown in FIG. 27(A), text information in the form of the strings "Press repeatedly!" and "(PUSH!)" is displayed as the display information 1713, and when the effect image 1712 is an image corresponding to the state in which the pressing operation device 1712A is pressed downward as shown in FIG. 27(B), text information in the form of the strings "Press repeatedly!" and "(One more time)" is displayed as the display information 1713.

As a result, when the operation surface of the push operation device 1712A is in the neutral position, the player can refer to the text information "(PUSH!)" in the display information 1713 to recognize that the operation surface of the push operation device 1712A needs to be pressed, and when the push operation device 1712A is subsequently pressed downward, the player can refer to the text information "(Once more)" in the display information 1713 to recognize that the operation surface of the push operation device 1712A needs to be pressed repeatedly.

Therefore, the player can recognize that in response to the text information "Press repeatedly!" displayed as display information 1713, it is necessary to repeatedly perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1712A.

When the reaction force against the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is output by power from the motor 863, etc., it is preferable that the degree of change in the operation feel in the pressing operation is such that the player presses down on the button operation unit 850 while touching it, rather than tapping the button operation unit 850 on the pressing operation device 1261, because this makes it easier for the player to feel the difference in the control of the operation feel by the sub-control board 940. For this reason, it is preferable to display the method of operating the pressing operation device 1261 on the screen using the display information 1713, etc., so that the player can easily experience the presentation intended by the developer.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the left hand 1712B touching the operation surface of the push operation device 1712A moves downwards to display a performance image 1712 on the decorative pattern display device 479, which indicates a push operation on the push operation device 1712A. Therefore, depending on the content of the displayed performance image 1712, it is possible to suggest to the player the operation method for the push operation device 1261 corresponding to the push operation device 1712A.

In addition, in the performance image 1712, the left hand 1712B does not necessarily need to be touching (contacting) the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A, but may be configured so that the operation surface is in close proximity to the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A so that the operation surface can be operated.

In addition, if the reaction force against the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is configured to be variable, the configuration may be such that, depending on the magnitude of the reaction force, the performance image 1712 corresponding to the case where only the left hand 1712B is touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A is switched to the performance image 1712 corresponding to the case where both the left hand 1712B and the right hand 1712C (dotted line) are touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A.

For example, in a configuration in which the higher the expectation for a transition to a special game state, the greater the reaction force, the greater the reaction force (i.e., the greater the expectation), so that more hands are touching the operation surface of the press operation device 1712A (i.e., from only the left hand 1712B to both the left hand 1712B and the right hand 1712C), thereby making it possible to clearly indicate the expectation for a transition to a special game state depending on the number of hands touching the operation surface of the press operation device 1712A.

The configuration of the eleventh embodiment described above may be applied when the pressing operation device 261 is used as the pressing operation device instead of the pressing operation device 1261.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 28. In the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment, as a variable display (variable performance) that can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 when a special pattern is started, a variable display that can be operated and input (i.e., a variable display that can produce a predetermined performance by performing a push operation on the push operation device 1261 during a predetermined operable period) is provided, and in the same manner as the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment described above, a device is provided so that the player can preferably operate the push operation device.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-mentioned first to eleventh embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the components described below as the twelfth embodiment may be added to the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to eleventh embodiments, or may be provided in place of a portion of the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to eleventh embodiments.

Figure 28 (Figure 28 (A) and Figure 28 (B)) is a screen diagram showing an example of the display content displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during an operable period in a variable display configured to allow operational input in a pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment.

In addition, in FIG. 28(A), for reference, the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261, which is a press operation device actually provided in the pachinko machine 100 and corresponds to the press operation device 1715A, is illustrated by a dashed dotted line XA, relative to the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1715A depicted as an image in the performance image 1715.

Here, the "operation surface of the push operation device 1715A" refers to the surface that corresponds to the surface that the player touches when operating the push operation device 1261 that corresponds to the push operation device 1715A. Therefore, in the push operation device 1715A, which is an image that corresponds to the push operation device 1261 that can be pushed downward, the upper side surface (top end surface) of the push operation device 1715A becomes the operation surface.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, during an operable period in the variable display configured to allow operation input, a performance image 1711 and display information 1713 similar to those of the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment described above are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, and a performance image 1715 corresponding to the performance related to the movement of the pressing operation device 1261 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479.

The performance image 1715 is an image (more specifically, a moving image) including an image corresponding to the pressing operation device 1715A corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261. More specifically, the performance image 1715 is a moving image corresponding to a performance in which a series of reciprocating motions is performed at least once (repeated multiple times) in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A moves downward from a state in which the operation surface is in a neutral position (see FIG. 28(A)), and then the pressing operation device 1715A moves upward (rising) until the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A reaches the neutral position (see FIG. 28(B)).

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the distance LA from the position Q1 of the operation surface of the push operation device 1715A depicted as an image in the performance image 1715 when the operation surface is located in the neutral position to the reference position Q0 (for example, the position of at least a part of the periphery of the opening R (see FIG. 24) that houses the push operation device 1261) is configured to be longer than the distance LB from the position Q2 of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 that corresponds to the push operation device 1715A, which is actually provided in the pachinko machine 100, to the reference position Q0 when the operation surface is located in the neutral position. Note that the ratio of the distance LA to the distance LB may be, for example, approximately 1.2 times or more, preferably approximately 1.5 times or more, and preferably approximately 2 times or more.

In a configuration in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at a predetermined neutral position, an image corresponding to the pressing operation device 1715A, in which position Q1 corresponding to the neutral position (position Q2) is the neutral position of the operation surface, is prepared in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940, and the sub-control board 940 uses the image to control the display of the performance image 1715.

In a configuration in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 can be positioned in multiple neutral positions, images corresponding to multiple types of pressing operation devices 1715A with different positions Q1 corresponding to each neutral position (position Q2) as the neutral position may be prepared. In such a configuration, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to detect the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the operation surface is positioned in the neutral position based on the detection result by the encoder provided in the operating mechanism 860 of the pressing operation device 1261, and to execute display control of the performance image 1715 using the image of the pressing operation device 1715A corresponding to the detected position.

Alternatively, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to detect the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at the neutral position whenever the neutral position changes, and to depict the pressing operation device 1715A in the performance image 1715, where the position corresponding to the detected position is the neutral position of the operation surface.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the reciprocating speed when the press operation device 1715A (more specifically, the operation surface of the press operation device 1715A) reciprocates in the vertical direction in the performance image 1715 is configured to be faster than the reciprocating speed when the actual press operation device 1261 (more specifically, the operation surface of the press operation device 1261) corresponding to the press operation device 1715A reciprocates in the vertical direction. Note that the ratio of the reciprocating speed of the press operation device 1715A to the reciprocating speed of the press operation device 1261 may be, for example, approximately 1.5 or more, preferably approximately 2 or more, and preferably approximately 3 or more.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the reciprocating speed at which the press operation device 1261 moves in the up and down direction is preset by the control of the sub-control board 940, and the ratio of the reciprocating speed of the press operation device 1715A to the reciprocating speed of the press operation device 1261 is preset to a ratio greater than approximately 1, and the sub-control board 940 executes display control of the performance image 1715 so that the press operation device 1715A moves reciprocatingly in the up and down direction at a reciprocating speed according to the predetermined reciprocating speed of the press operation device 1261 and the ratio.

Alternatively, a ratio of the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1715A to the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261 that is greater than approximately 1 may be predefined, and when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261, the control board 940 may detect the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261 based on the detection result by an encoder provided in the operating mechanism 860 of the pressing operation device 1261, and perform display control on the performance image 1715 so that in the performance image 1715, the pressing operation device 1715A reciprocates in the up and down direction at a reciprocating speed that corresponds to the detected reciprocating speed and the predefined ratio.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the performance image 1715 is configured so that expectation information 1715B that can suggest the expectation of a transition to a special game state is displayed with a predetermined probability on a part of the side of the push operation device 1715A (for example, the lower end side of the area visible to the player when the operation surface of the push operation device 1715A is located in the neutral position).

The expectation information 1715B may be, for example, information including a character string that can suggest the expectation for a transition to a special game state (e.g., "Hot!" or "Maybe it's hot!?"), or an image that can suggest the expectation for a transition to a special game state (e.g., an image of a character with a different facial expression according to the level of expectation). There are multiple types of expectation information 1715B prepared according to the level of expectation they suggest. In the example shown in FIG. 28(A), the expectation information 1715B is composed of the character string "Hot!", which can suggest that the expectation for a transition to a special game state is relatively high.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the distance LA from the position (position Q1) of the operation surface of the press operation device 1715A when the operation surface is located in a predetermined neutral position to the reference position (position Q0) is configured to be longer than the distance LB from the position (position Q2) of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 when the operation surface is located in the predetermined neutral position to the reference position, and the reciprocating speed when the operation surface of the press operation device 1715A reciprocates in the vertical direction is configured to be faster than the reciprocating speed when the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 reciprocates in the vertical direction.

Therefore, when a starting winning of a special symbol occurs and a variable display configured to be operable is selected, the sub-control board 940 can display a moving image (presentation image 1715) including at least one of the following states: the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1715A has a displacement amount different from the displacement amount of the press operation device 1261 controlled by the sub-control board 940, or the reciprocating speed different from the reciprocating speed of the press operation device 1261 controlled by the sub-control board 940, during the operable period of the press operation on the press operation device 1261. This makes it possible to easily suggest to the player the operation of the press operation device 1261.

The sub-control board 940 may be configured to control the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 to change the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the performance image 1715 (moving image) is displayed on the display unit. With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the performance image 1715 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 that changes the position of the operation surface, thereby allowing the player to specifically grasp the operating mode of the pressing operation device 1261.

Thirteenth Embodiment
Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 29. In the pachinko machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment, in the configuration in which a variable display that can be operated and inputted (i.e., a variable display that can cause a predetermined effect to appear by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 during a predetermined operable period) is provided as a variable display (variable performance) that can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 when a special pattern is started and won, the device is designed to allow the player to conveniently grasp the remaining amount of the operable period.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-mentioned first to twelfth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. Also, the components described below as the thirteenth embodiment may be added to the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to twelfth embodiments, or may be provided in place of a portion of the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to twelfth embodiments.

Figure 29 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining operable period in a variable display configured to allow operation input and the state of the press operation device 1261. More specifically, Figure 29(A) is a diagram showing the display content of the decorative pattern display device 479 and the state of the press operation device 1261 at the start timing of the operable period, Figure 29(B) is a diagram showing the display content of the decorative pattern display device 479 and the state of the press operation device 1261 at a specified timing within the operable period, and Figure 29(C) is a diagram showing the display content of the decorative pattern display device 479 and the state of the press operation device 1261 at the end timing of the operable period.

As shown in FIG. 29, during an operable period in a variable display configured to allow for operational input, display information 1721 indicating that the period is operable and remaining period information 1722 indicating the remaining amount of the operable period are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. When the player operates the pressing operation device 1261 during this operable period, a presentation corresponding to the success or failure of the special pattern lottery and the expectation of transitioning to a special game state is executed in synchronization with the operation.

The display information 1721 may be, for example, information including a character string (e.g., "PUSH!" or "Push!") that can prompt a user to press the pressing operation device 1261, or information including an image corresponding to an operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (e.g., an image of the pressing operation device corresponding to the pressing operation device 1261 being repeatedly pressed). In the example shown in FIG. 29, the display information 1721 is composed of the character string "PUSH!" that can prompt a user to press the pressing operation device 1261.

The remaining period information 1722 may be, for example, a progress bar that indicates the decrease in the remaining operable period over time, or a numerical value that changes according to the change in the remaining operable period. In the example shown in FIG. 29, the display information 1721 and the remaining period information 1722 are configured by progress bars.

Specifically, at the start of the operable period, the progress bar as the period remaining information 1722 indicates that the remaining amount of the operable period is the entire amount of the operable period, as shown in FIG. 29(A). Once the operable period starts, the progress bar gradually shortens as time passes, as shown in FIG. 29(B), to indicate that the remaining amount of the operable period decreases. Then, at the end of the operable period, the progress bar indicates that the remaining amount of the operable period has reached zero, as shown in FIG. 29(C).

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 (more specifically, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261) is configured to descend (move) at a substantially constant speed from the neutral position to a predetermined end position set below the neutral position during the period from the start to the end of the operable period. The movement control of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed by the sub-control board 940.

Specifically, at the start of the operable period, as shown in FIG. 29(A), the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located in a predetermined neutral position (position Q11), and after the start of the operable period, as shown in FIG. 29(B), the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 gradually descends at a substantially constant speed in accordance with the decrease in the remaining operable period over time. Then, at the end of the operable period, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches a predetermined end position that has been set in advance.

The sub-control board 940 determines the speed at which the pressing operation device 1261 descends during the operable period based on the distance between the position Q11 of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the operation surface is located in the neutral position and the position Q10 of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the operation surface is located in the end position, and the length of the operable period.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a specific variable display including an operable period during which the player can operate the push operation device 1261 during the period of the variable display selected by the sub-control board 940 is provided as the content (mode) of the variable display selected by the sub-control board 940, and in that specific variable display, the position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is displaced downward from the neutral position during the period from the start to the end of the operable period by the control of the sub-control board 940. Therefore, the player can grasp the remaining time of the operable period through the height position of the operation surface. For example, even in a situation where the player is playing without visually checking the decorative pattern display device 479, the player can grasp through the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 that an operable period has occurred and the length of time remaining.

Note that the remaining period information 1722 does not necessarily need to be displayed and may be omitted. In other words, the player may be made aware of the remaining time of the operable period only from the height of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261.

In addition, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be changed during a portion of the period from the start to the end of the operable period. For example, the control of the sub-control board 940 may be configured so that the operation surface gradually moves when the remaining time is less than half.

In addition, if the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 protrudes from the surrounding area, letters (scales) corresponding to the time may be included in the protruding part.

The period from the start to the end of the operable period may include a period in which the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 gradually rises. For example, it may rise from the start of the operable period to a predetermined neutral position to inform the player of the end of the period, or it may rise once and then gradually descend, indicating the operable period when it is higher than the initial position.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 30. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourteenth embodiment, a device is provided that allows a player to conveniently grasp the remaining time of the variable display being executed.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-mentioned first to thirteenth embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the components described below as the fourteenth embodiment may be added to the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to thirteenth embodiments, or may be provided in place of a portion of the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to thirteenth embodiments.

Figure 30 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining time of the variable display and the state of the press operation device 1261. As shown in Figure 30, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, during the period from the start to the end of the variable display, the press operation device 1261 (more specifically, the operation surface of the press operation device 1261) is configured to descend (move) at a substantially constant speed from the neutral position to a predetermined end position set below the neutral position. The movement control of the press operation device 1261 is performed by the sub-control board 940.

Specifically, when the variable display starts, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located in a predetermined neutral position (position Q11), and after the operable period starts, the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 gradually descends at a substantially constant speed in accordance with the decrease in the remaining time of the variable display over time. Then, when the variable display ends, the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches a predetermined end position that has been set in advance.

The sub-control board 940 determines the speed at which the pressing operation device 1261 descends during the variable display based on the distance between the position Q11 of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the operation surface is in the neutral position and the position Q10 of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the operation surface is in the end position, and the length of the operable period.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a special symbol is initiated and a variable display is executed, the sub-control board 940 executes control such that the position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 gradually shifts downward from the neutral position according to the progress of the variable display during the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (variable period). This provides the player with a gameplay experience that allows them to recognize the progress of the variable display by visually checking the change in height of the operation surface or by the sensation of touching the operation surface.

In addition, the sub-control board 940 controls the operation surface so that it gradually descends at a substantially constant speed in response to the decrease in the remaining time of the varying display over time, making it easier for the player to understand the progress of the varying display and the remaining time.

The operation of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descending (moving) at a substantially constant speed from the neutral position to the end position does not necessarily have to be set from the start to the end of the variable display, but may be set to the period after the reach state is reached, or may be set to another period, such as the period from the start of the variable display to the reach state.

In addition, the speed at which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 advances does not necessarily have to be approximately constant, and may be different depending on the situation. For example, the speed before the reach state is reached may be different from the speed after the reach state is reached.

The speed of movement of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 does not necessarily have to be a substantially constant speed, and instead, or in addition, may include a section in which the operation surface progresses in stages. For example, the speed may decrease by a certain amount (e.g., 5 mm) every time a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed.

In addition, the control relating to the remaining time of the variable display and the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 may be executed by lottery when the variable display starts, or may be set by the player as one of the functions when the player is allowed to select a function of the press operation device 1261 as a variable display effect.

In addition, as a control relating the remaining time of the variable display and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, the operation surface of the pressing operation device may be caused to rise (move) at a substantially constant speed from the neutral position to the end position.

In addition, as a control relating the remaining time of the variable display to the operation surface of the press operation device 1261, when a specified operation is performed during the non-play state (standby) described above, the operation surface of the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to operate in response to the remaining time of the variable display in response to the variable display (variable presentation) of the decorative pattern display device 479 in a manner (content of the variable display, variable pattern) selected under the same selection conditions as when a special pattern is initiated during play.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 31 and Fig. 32. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fifteenth embodiment, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device 1261 during a variable display, the time required for a part of the variable display to elapse is shorter than when the push operation is not performed.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-mentioned first to fourteenth embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the components described below as the fifteenth embodiment may be added to the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to fourteenth embodiments, or may be provided in place of a portion of the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to fourteenth embodiments.

Figure 31 is a time chart for explaining an example of the progress of the variable display when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the variable display. More specifically, Figure 31 (A) is a time chart of the variable display when a pressing operation is not performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the variable display, and Figure 31 (B) is a time chart of the variable display when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 31(A), if the pressing operation device 1261 is not pressed during the changing display (i.e., if the changing display ends without the pressing operation being performed on the pressing operation device 1261), the changing display that started at time T0 ends at time T1 (a confirmed display is displayed). In the changing display, content A appears at time T2, content B appears at time T3 after time T2, and content C appears at time T4 after time T3. Examples of contents A to C include the occurrence of a reach state, the execution of effects such as the appearance of characters or letters, and character actions (for example, victory or defeat after a battle).

As shown in FIG. 31(B), in a variable display that starts at time T0, if a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 at time T2 when content A appears, the sub-control board 940 advances the progress of the variable display according to the amount of operation of the pressing operation device 1261 until the pressing operation ends.

As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 31(B), if a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with a predetermined first operation amount (displacement amount or movement speed) during the period from time T2 to time T5, content B that appears at time T3 when the pressing operation is not performed appears at time T5 when the pressing operation ends.

In other words, when the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed with the first operation amount in the period from time T2 to time T5, the contents of the variable display that would be displayed in the period from time T2 to time T3 if the pressing operation was not performed (i.e., a series of display contents from content A to content B) are fast-forwarded (played back in fast-forward) in the period from the start to the end of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., the period from time T2 to time T5).

Therefore, when the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed with the first operation amount during the period from time T2 to time T5, the content of the variable display that would have been displayed during the period from time T2 to time T3 if the pressing operation had not been performed progresses over a period shorter than that period (i.e., the period from time T2 to time T5), and the timing of the appearance of content C is accordingly advanced.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31(B), when the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is ended at time T5, content C appears at time T6, which is earlier than time T4. Note that the interval from time T5 to time T6, when content C appears, is equal to the interval from time T3 to time T4 (the difference between time T4 and time T3).

After content C appears at time T6, at time T7, when a time equal to the interval from time T4 to time T1 (the difference between time T1 and time T4) has elapsed, the result of the change is displayed by a frozen display, after which the frozen display continues until time T1, at which time a confirmation display is displayed (the change display ends).

In this way, even if a part of the varying display is played back in fast forward by a press operation on the pressing operation device 1261, by continuing the stopped display displayed at time T7 until time T1, the varying display period when a press operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the varying display (i.e., the period from when the varying display starts to when it ends) can be made the same as the varying display period when a press operation is not performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the varying display.

Therefore, even if a portion of the varying display is played back in fast forward by a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261, the varying display of the pattern by the main control board 920 and the varying display of the pattern (decorative pattern) by the sub-control board 940 can be synchronized without changing the control of the varying display of the pattern by the main control board 920.

On the other hand, if a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is performed with a predetermined second operation amount different from the first operation amount (for example, a displacement amount larger than the displacement amount corresponding to the first operation amount, or a movement speed faster than the movement speed corresponding to the first operation amount) during the period from time T2 to time T5, the content C that would appear at time T4 after time T3 if the pressing operation was not performed can be made to appear at time T5 when the pressing operation is completed.

As a result, when the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed with the second operation amount during the period from time T2 to time T5, a series of display contents from content A through content B to content C in the variable display during the period from time T2 to time T5 progresses (plays) at a faster fast forward speed than when the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed with the first operation amount during the period from time T2 to time T5 (i.e., when a series of display contents from content A to content B are displayed during the period from time T2 to time T5).

In addition, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the changing display, the progress of the changing display may be advanced according to the amount of operation of the pressing operation device 1261 until the pressing operation is ended, and then, at the timing when the pressing operation is ended, the progress of the changing display may be returned to the timing when the changing display has progressed without the pressing operation being performed.

Figure 32 is a time chart for explaining this configuration, and is a time chart for explaining an example of the progress of the variable display when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the variable display. More specifically, Figure 32 (A) is a time chart of the variable display when a pressing operation is not performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the variable display, and Figure 32 (B) is a time chart of the variable display when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 32(A), if the pressing operation device 1261 is not pressed during the changing display (i.e., if the changing display ends without the pressing operation being performed on the pressing operation device 1261), the changing display that started at time T0 ends at time T1 (a confirmation display is displayed). In the changing display, content A appears at time T2, content B appears at time T3 after time T2, and content C appears at time T4 after time T3.

As shown in FIG. 32(B), in a variable display that starts at time T0, if a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 at time T2 when content A appears, the sub-control board 940 advances the progress of the variable display according to the amount of operation of the pressing operation device 1261 until the pressing operation ends, as in the case of FIG. 31 described above.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 32(B), if a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with a predetermined first operation amount (amount of displacement or movement speed) during the period from time T2 to time T5, content B that appears at time T3 when the pressing operation is not performed appears at time T5 when the pressing operation ends.

As a result, the contents of the variable display that are displayed during the period from time T2 to time T3 when no pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., a series of display contents from content A to content B) are fast-forwarded (played back in fast-forward) during the period from the start to the end of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., the period from time T2 to time T5).

When the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is terminated at time T5, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the playback position of the changing display is rewound from the position corresponding to content B (the position corresponding to time T3 in the changing display) to the position corresponding to time Tm before time T3 in the changing display. Then, the progression of the changing display proceeds (is played) normally from time Tm.

Therefore, if the pressing operation with the first operation amount on the pressing operation device 1261 is completed at time T5, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the variable display proceeds normally from time Tm, content B appears again at time T3, and then content C appears at time T4. Thereafter, the variable display ends at time T1 (a confirmation display is displayed) in the same manner as when the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is not performed.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated as control of the variable display executed in the decorative pattern display device 479 by the sub-control board 940, the state of the variable display that would end after a predetermined time if the operation was not performed is advanced by the control of the sub-control board 940 from the state when the operation was performed according to the amount of operation by the operation. Therefore, when a player wants to advance the progress of the variable display, the player can easily advance to the desired section, providing a gameplay that allows the player to view in advance the effects that were planned to be viewed later.

In the above fifteenth embodiment, the progress of the variable display is illustrated as being in accordance with the amount of pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261, but the progress of a predetermined period (e.g., an operable period) timed during a game may be configured to be in accordance with the amount of pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261.

Also, under the control of the sub-control board 940, the progress of the variable display progresses from the timing when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated according to the speed and amount of operation by the operation, and when the operation is completed, the progress of the variable display returns to the timing when the progress would have progressed without the operation (see FIG. 32). Therefore, while synchronizing the control of the progress of the variable display in the main control board 920 and the control of the progress of the variable display in the sub-control board 940, it is possible to fast-forward the variable display, adding a game feature that allows the player to recognize events that will occur later in advance.

When the push operation device 1261 is operated, the sub-control board 940 controls the state of an event that would end after a predetermined time if no operation is performed on the push operation device 1261 to progress through that operation, as an effect using a timer with a remaining time set (for example, when a mission (command) occurs such as "a jackpot will occur if a reach is made with the number "6" within three minutes," the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 rises to a height according to the remaining time of the command, and the player can visually determine whether or not a reach will occur in the next or subsequent variable display by pressing the operation surface.

In addition, the sub-control board 940 may be controlled so that the progress of the variable display progresses from the timing when the operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 according to the speed and amount of the operation, and when the operation is completed, the progress of the variable display may be configured to return to the timing when the operation was performed. For example, when a specified operation is performed during a non-play state (waiting), the progress of the variable display (variable presentation) executed by the mode (content of the variable display, variable pattern) selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol is started to win during play may be configured to return to the timing when the operation was performed, which makes it easier to avoid a situation where some presentations progress only at high speed and the player misses them.

In addition, as a control relating the remaining time of the variable display and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, the operation surface of the pressing operation device may be configured to rise (move) at a substantially constant speed from the neutral position to the end position, and a function may be added in which the progress of the variable display is rewound from the timing when the operation was performed on the pressing operation device 1261 according to the speed and amount of operation by the operation, by the control of the sub-control board 940. In this case as well, after the pressing operation, the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises to approach the original state, and the variable display may be resumed in the progressed state for the amount of time that has progressed, or the variable display may be started by returning to the original timing before the operation.

In addition, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be configured to return to its original height position as it would be if no operation had been performed after fast-forwarding and viewing the changing display, or the fast-forward function may be disabled when an operation corresponding to fast-forwarding has been performed a preset number of times (e.g., once), or when the fast-forward function has been used a predetermined number of times (e.g., three times), control relating to the remaining time of the changing display and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be terminated.

In addition, when the varying display is fast-forwarded, the varying display of the decorative pattern (for example, the portion in which the numerical pattern is displayed) that is displayed in response to the varying display of the special pattern may continue to be displayed so as to be identifiable without being fast-forwarded, or, for example, the varying display of the decorative pattern may be displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the display screen to continue the varying display without being fast-forwarded, and may be controlled by the sub-control board 940 so that it is displayed in its original size at the timing (time Tm) when it returns to its original state.

<16th embodiment>
Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 33 to Fig. 35. In the pachinko machine 100 of the sixteenth embodiment, a plurality of height positions of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 are configured to be associated with the performance executed in the variable display.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the above-mentioned first to fifteenth embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, the components described below as the sixteenth embodiment may be added to the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to fifteenth embodiments, or may be provided in place of a portion of the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-mentioned first to fifteenth embodiments.

Figures 33 and 34 are diagrams for explaining the control in which the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to multiple different height positions from the initial position as a trigger for the performance executed in the variable display.

Figure 33 (A) is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 during a variable display rises to the height of position Q1 as the initial position, and then displaces to position Q11, a distance LC lower, and to position Q12, a distance LD lower. The displacement from position Q1 to the lowered position may be due to a push operation by the player, or alternatively or in addition, the position may be changed by control of the sub-control board 940.

Figures 33(B) and 33(C) are diagrams illustrating a situation in which the same presentation is started when the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced from position Q1 to either position Q11 or position Q12, and illustrate a case in which the execution of the same presentation is determined by the sub-control board 940 in a situation in which separate starting wins occur and separate variable displays are started.

As shown in FIG. 33(B), during the variable display, for example, a "7" reach state may occur, after which the word "PUSH!" may be displayed to prompt the player to perform a push operation, thereby indicating that a valid operation period has occurred during which operations on the push operation device 1261 are valid. Here, the "PUSH!" display may prompt the player to place their hand on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 and push it down, or other expressions such as "push", "PRESS", or "press gently" may be displayed, or multiple expressions may be displayed by switching between them every short period of time, or expressions indicating multiple operation methods may be displayed simultaneously.

The operation surface of the push operation device 1261 rises to the height of position Q1. In this situation, if the player presses the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, when it reaches position Q11, which corresponds to approximately half of the range in which the push operation is possible, a school of fish effect is displayed, indicating to the player that a variable display is being executed that indicates a high probability (for example, 50%) of transitioning to a special game state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33(C), even in a variable display where a school of fish effect is displayed, the amount of pushing operation may not cause the school of fish effect to be displayed even if position Q11 is reached as a result of the pushing operation. If the pushing operation is continued beyond position Q11 and position Q12 is reached, the school of fish effect may be displayed, and this control is performed by the sub-control board 940. The height position at which this effect is executed is selected from multiple types as one of the aspects of the effect for the variable display to be executed. This makes it difficult for the player to determine how far the pushing operation needs to be performed to execute the effect, and provides a gameplay in which the trigger for the same effect to be executed is associated with multiple types of operation amounts.

In addition, when the same effect is displayed for a variable display having a different amount of pushing operation, the expectation level for a transition to a special game state due to the occurrence of that effect may be the same expectation level or may be different expectation levels.

In addition, the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 does not necessarily need to be displaced by the player's operation. Alternatively, or in addition, the position of the operation surface may be changed by the control of the sub-control board 940. That is, an effect image is displayed to the player to encourage the player to place his/her hand on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 (for example, the word "PUT!" is displayed or an image showing the hand lightly placed on the operation surface is displayed), and the fact that the player has placed his/her hand on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is detected by the power of the push operation device 1261 (motor 863) and the displacement amount of the encoder, and the operation surface is controlled to move in the push direction in a predetermined operation pattern (for example, a constant speed), and when it reaches position Q11 or position Q12, a predetermined effect is executed.

Figure 34 illustrates an example in which different effects are executed depending on the amount of displacement of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 from the initial position. Similar to Figure 33(A), Figure 34(A) illustrates an example in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 during variable display rises to the height of the initial position Q1 and then displaces to position Q11, which is a distance LC lower, and to position Q12, which is a distance LD lower. Figures 34(B) and 34(C) illustrate an example in which different effects are started according to the respective displacement positions when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 displaces from position Q1 to either position Q11 or position Q12.

As shown in FIG. 34(B), during the variable display, for example, a "7" reach state may occur, after which the word "PUSH!" may be displayed to prompt the player to perform a push operation, indicating that a valid operation period has occurred during which operations on the push operation device 1261 are valid. At this time, the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 rises to the height of position Q1. In this situation, if the player presses the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, when it reaches position Q11, which corresponds to approximately half of the section in which a push operation is possible, a character CA13 with a clenched fist appears, indicating to the player that the variable display indicates a medium expectancy (for example, 10%) of a transition to a special game state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34(C), even in a variable display in which a character is displayed, the amount of pushing operation may reach position Q11, but the character may not yet be displayed. If the pushing operation is continued beyond position Q11 and position Q12 is reached, character CA11 holding a sword may be displayed, and this control is performed on the sub-control board 940. This combination of height position and character is selected from multiple types as one of the modes of presentation for the variable display to be executed. This provides the player with a gameplay experience in which different modes of presentation are triggered depending on the amount of pushing operation performed.

Figure 35 is a diagram to explain several types of control that are performed in the variable display when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed down, the operation surface goes down once, and then returns to its original position.

Figure 35 (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a case in which the operation feeling becomes lighter and easier to operate after a certain amount of operation from the initial position during the operable period of the pressing operation device 1261, and a case in which the operation feeling becomes heavier after the same certain amount of operation. This control of the operation feeling is performed by the sub-control board 940 detecting the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 by an encoder, and controlling the power of the pressing operation device 1261 (motor 863) according to the height position.

By providing a section in which the operation feels the same for a certain section from the initial position, the player can feel the amount of force required to press the pressing operation device 1261 to operate. It is preferable to set the section in which the operation feels the same to less than half of the entire movable range. In addition, after the section in which the operation feels the same, it is preferable to provide a section in which the operation feel (strength of the reaction force) becomes higher (heavier) and a section in which the reaction force becomes lower (lighter), so that the player can more easily recognize that multiple types of operation feel are set.

After a certain section of the operation surface has progressed, the sub-control board 940 executes control to vary the strength of the operation feeling according to the degree of expectation. FIG. 35(A) illustrates an example in which a variable display with a higher degree of expectation changes to a heavier operation feeling. It is preferable that this variable display with a heavier operation feeling is set to appear less frequently than a variable display with a lighter operation feeling, thereby reducing the opportunity for excessive load to be input to the pressing operation device 1261. Note that it is not always necessary to make the operation feeling heavier when the degree of expectation is high, and the degree of expectation may be indicated to the player by other control. For example, the length of the section with a heavy operation feeling may be changed, or the degree of expectation may be indicated to the player by the pattern of the operation feeling (the number of heavy sections in a pattern in which heavy sections occur intermittently).

Figure 35 (B) is a diagram illustrating the return position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 after the pressing operation in Figure 35 (A), where the diagram on the left shows the initial position before the pressing operation, and the diagram on the right shows the height position (return position) to which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 returns after the operation.

After the push operation device 1261 is operated, the height to which the operation surface returns changes depending on the degree of expectation. FIG. 35(B) illustrates an example in which a variable display with a higher degree of expectation has a higher return position. It is preferable that the frequency of appearance of such a variable display with a higher return position is set lower than that of a variable display with a lower return position. Note that it is not necessary to control the return position to be higher when the degree of expectation is high, and the degree of expectation may be suggested to the player by other control. For example, the number of operations when the operation surface moves up or down after a push operation may be changed, or the faster it returns to a preset height position (for example, the initial position), the higher the degree of expectation may be suggested to the player.

Here, the control of the operational feel of the push operation shown in FIG. 35(A) and the control of the return position shown in FIG. 35(B) do not necessarily need to be executed in combination. In the sub-control board 940, only the operational feel of the push operation may be different, and the operation after the push operation may be common, or the push operation may be possible with the same operational feel, and the subsequent return position may be different to indicate the degree of expectation, or the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 may be made to protrude from a lowered state without being raised to the initial height position, and the difference in the degree of expectation may be indicated to the player depending on the height position, and even if the weight of the player's hand changes due to the push operation device 1261, the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 may be displaced to a height position according to the degree of expectation by controlling the power of the push operation device 1261 (motor 863).

Thus, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a player performs a push operation on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 arranged at an elevated position as a predetermined neutral position, and the sub-control board 940 executes a variable display accompanied by a predetermined performance (for example, a school of fish) on the decorative pattern display device 479, and then, when a combination of patterns according to the lottery result is stopped and displayed as a result display, a predetermined performance is executed by triggering the displacement of the operation surface to a different height position. That is, the sub-control board 940 executes a control to make a predetermined performance appear when the position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is displaced to a first position that is a small amount of movement from the neutral position, and a control to make a predetermined performance appear when the position of the operation surface is displaced to a second position that is different from the first position and has moved a large amount (see FIG. 33). For this reason, it is possible to provide a game in which the correspondence between the amount of operation and the performance to be executed is made difficult for the player to understand, and the trigger for executing the same performance is associated with multiple types of amount of operation.

The sub-control board 940 is also configured to be capable of controlling the displacement of the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and using this displacement control, in a variable display in which a variable display accompanied by a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish) is executed, a control is executed to make a predetermined effect appear when the operation surface is displaced to a first position that is a small amount of movement from the neutral position, and a control is executed to make a predetermined effect appear when the position of the operation surface is displaced to a second position different from the first position (see FIG. 33). In this case, the player cannot easily recognize the height position by visually checking the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, or place his/her hand on the operation surface to feel the change in height position, and it is difficult to understand the correspondence between the amount of operation and the trigger for the effect to be executed, and a playability can be provided in which the trigger for the execution of the same effect is associated with the height positions of multiple types of operation surfaces.

The sub-control board 940 also executes control to make a predetermined first effect appear when the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced to a first position, which is a small amount of movement from the neutral position, and control to make a second effect appear that is different from the predetermined first effect appear when the position of the operation surface is displaced to a second position, which is a large amount of movement different from the first position (see FIG. 34). This provides the player with a gameplay experience that allows them to expect the execution of different effects that are set according to the amount of operation.

The sub-control board 940 is also configured to be capable of controlling the displacement of the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and uses this displacement control to execute control to make a predetermined first effect appear when the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced to a first position that is a small amount of movement from the neutral position, and control to make a predetermined effect appear when the position of the operation surface is displaced to a second position different from the first position (see FIG. 34). In this case, a game can be provided in which the player can visually check the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to recognize the height position, or place their hand on the operation surface to feel the change in height position, while expecting the execution of different effects that are set according to the amount of operation.

The sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to select and execute a specific variable display including an operable period during which the push operation device 1261 can be operated during the period of the variable display, and when a start winning of a special symbol occurs and a specific variable display is selected and the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is operated to move downward a certain amount during the operable period, control is executed for separate variable displays to make the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the certain amount of movement a light first magnitude, and control to make the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the certain amount of movement a second magnitude larger than the first magnitude. Therefore, the player can feel in advance how much force the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 needs to be pressed down to operate the operation surface, and then can easily feel the degree of the operation feeling that is different from that feeling. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize the difference in operation feeling when multiple types of operation feeling are provided, and the information to be conveyed to the player by the difference in operation feeling, such as a change in expectation level, can be accurately conveyed.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a player performs a pressing operation on the operation surface (operated portion) of the pressing operation device 1261 arranged at an elevated position, after the operation, the height of the operation surface is changed according to the expectation level (expectation level of transition to a special game state) by the control of the sub-control board 940.

That is, the sub-control board 940 executes control to make a predetermined first effect (for example, a variable display or character display showing a predetermined expectation) appear when the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced to a first position in a direction opposite to the operation direction of the pressing operation (downward in this embodiment) (i.e., upward in this embodiment), and control to make a predetermined second effect (for example, a variable display or character display showing a higher expectation than the first effect) appear when the position of the operation surface is displaced to a second position different from the first position in a direction opposite to the operation direction of the pressing operation (for example, a return position higher than the first position) (see FIG. 34). Therefore, it is possible to provide a game in which the player expects the execution of different effects set according to the return position (return amount) of the operation surface after operating the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261.

The control is also configured to be capable of displacing the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and using this displacement control, when the position of the operation surface is displaced to a first position in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the pressing operation after a pressing operation on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, a control is executed to present a predetermined first effect, and when the position of the operation surface is displaced to a second position different from the first position in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the pressing operation, a control is executed to present a predetermined second effect different from the first effect (see FIG. 34). In this case, a game can be provided in which the player can visually check the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to recognize the return position, or place his/her hand on the operation surface to feel the change in the return position, while expecting the execution of different effects set according to the amount of return.

Note that FIG. 35(B) shows an example of a case where a variable display with different expectations (expectations of transition to a special game state) is executed depending on the difference in the return position of the operation surface after a push operation on the push operation device 1261, but the configuration may be such that a predetermined effect (e.g., a school of fish) is executed in either case where the return position of the operation surface after a push operation on the push operation device 1261 is a predetermined first position, or where the return position is a second position different from the first position (e.g., a return position higher than the first position).

That is, in a configuration in which the sub-control board 940 executes a variable display accompanied by a predetermined effect (e.g., a school of fish) on the decorative pattern display device 479, and then displays a combination of patterns corresponding to the lottery result as a static display of the result, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to execute control to cause a predetermined effect (e.g., a school of fish) to appear when, after the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed, the position (height) of the operation surface is displaced to a first position in a direction opposite to the operation direction of the pressing operation (downward in this embodiment) (i.e., upward in this embodiment), and control to cause a predetermined effect to appear when the position of the operation surface is displaced to a second position different from the first position in a direction opposite to the operation direction of the pressing operation (e.g., a return position higher than the first position) (see, for example, FIG. 33). In this case, it is difficult for the player to understand the correspondence between the return position (return amount) of the operation surface after pressing the pressing operation device 1261 and the effect that is executed, and gameplay can be provided in which the trigger for executing the same effect is associated with multiple types of return positions.

In addition, when the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to control the displacement of the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to use the displacement control to execute a control to make a predetermined effect (e.g., a school of fish) appear when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced to a first position in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the pressing operation after the pressing operation, and a control to make a predetermined effect appear when the position of the operation surface is displaced to a second position different from the first position in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the pressing operation (see, for example, FIG. 33). In this case, the player can visually check the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to recognize the return position, or place his/her hand on the operation surface to feel the change in the return position, but it is difficult to understand the correspondence between the return amount and the trigger for the effect to be executed, and a playability can be provided in which the trigger for the execution of the same effect is associated with the return positions of multiple types of operation surfaces.

Seventeenth Embodiment
Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 36 to Fig. 41. In the pachinko machine 100 of the seventeenth embodiment, a pressing operation device 1261 having an operating mechanism 860 (see Fig. 20) is configured to control the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 according to a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for the operating mechanism 860.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each of the first to sixteenth embodiments described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described. In addition, the components described below as the seventeenth embodiment may be added to the components of the pachinko machine 100 in combination with any one or more components of the first to sixteenth embodiments described above, or may be provided in place of a portion of the components of the pachinko machine 100 of any one of the first to sixteenth embodiments described above. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 of the seventeenth embodiment will be described in the case where multiple types of patterns shown in Figures 36 to 41 are set as control conditions for the operating mechanism 860, but it is not necessary for the pachinko machine 100 to be configured to have all of these patterns, and the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to have control corresponding to one or more partial patterns.

Figures 36 to 41 are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the sub-control board 940 changes the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to a predetermined pattern set as a condition for the control of the actuation mechanism 860 (more specifically, the control of the motor 863). Each figure will be explained in detail below.

Figure 36 (A) is a graph showing an example of a pattern (hereinafter, this pattern is also referred to as a "condition pattern") set as a condition for control of the actuation mechanism 860. The horizontal axis of the graph shown in Figure 36 (A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the vertical axis shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261. In other words, the condition pattern shown in Figure 36 (A) is defined by the relationship between the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261. In the following explanation, a pattern in which the position of the operating surface and the operating force are defined to control the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is described as a position vs. operating force control pattern.

The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 includes an operating force acting in the opposite direction to the direction of the pressing operation (pressing direction) of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., a reaction force that resists the pressing direction on the pressing operation device 1261), and an operating force acting in the same direction as the direction of the pressing operation (hereinafter, this operating force is also referred to as a "relief force").

In the pressing operation device 1261, the reaction force is generated by driving the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860 in a predetermined rotational direction. On the other hand, the escape force is generated by driving the motor 863 in a rotational direction opposite to that in which the reaction force is generated. Therefore, the sub-control board 940 can switch the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 between a reaction force or escape force by changing the rotational direction of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860.

The magnitude of the reaction force and the escape force increases as the power supplied to the motor 863 increases. Therefore, the sub-control board 940 can change the magnitude of the operating force (reaction force, escape force) of the pressing operation device 1261 by changing the power supplied to the motor 863.

The magnitude of the reaction force and the escape force increases as the power supplied to the motor 863 increases. Therefore, the sub-control board 940 can change the magnitude of the operating force (reaction force, escape force) of the pressing operation device 1261 by changing the power supplied to the motor 863.

In the graph shown in FIG. 36(A), the vertical axis has zero (0) as the origin, with positive values greater than zero indicating the reaction force of the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and negative values less than zero indicating the escape force of the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261. The reaction force and escape force are greater the larger their absolute values are (i.e., the further they are from the origin in the positive or negative direction).

On the other hand, on the horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36(A), position Bmax indicates the position of the operating surface when rack 861 is located at the uppermost side (the endmost side in the direction of the reaction force) of the movement range of rack 861 relative to pinion 862 in operating mechanism 860. Position Bmin indicates the position of the operating surface when rack 861 is located at the lowermost side (the endmost handle in the pressing direction due to the pressing operation) of the movement range of rack 861 relative to pinion 862 in operating mechanism 860.

Figure 36 (A) illustrates condition patterns JA11, JA12, JA13, and JA14 as four types of position vs. action force control patterns. Note that these condition patterns JA11 to JA14 are merely examples of condition patterns, and condition patterns of various shapes may be applied.

The multiple condition patterns JA11 to JA14 are each associated with a specific situation (the type of effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479). When one of the situations associated with each of the condition patterns JA11 to JA14 occurs, the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition pattern corresponding to that situation.

For example, the condition patterns JA11 to JA14 are each associated with an effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, and when one of the effects associated with a condition pattern is selected as the effect to be executed, the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition pattern corresponding to that effect.

Condition pattern JA11 (solid line) is a pattern in which, at position Bmax, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from zero to reaction force Ma1 or from reaction force Ma1 to zero, and in the section between positions Bmax and Bmin, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is kept at a substantially constant reaction force Ma1, and at position Bmin, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from reaction force Ma1 to zero or from zero to reaction force Ma1.

In condition pattern JA12 (dotted line), the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from zero to reaction force Ma1 or from reaction force Ma1 to zero at position Bmax, and in the section between position Bmax and position B3 below position Bmax (position Bmax side), the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is kept substantially constant at reaction force Ma1, and in the section between position B3 and position B2 below position B3, the operating force becomes reaction force Ma1 at position B3, and at position H2, the operating force becomes reaction force Ma2, which is greater than reaction force Ma1, so that the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 is kept substantially constant at reaction force Ma1 at position B3 and at position H2, the operating force becomes reaction force Ma2, which is greater than reaction force Ma1. 61, the operating force is kept substantially constant at reaction force Ma2 in the section between position B2 and position B1 below position B2, and in the section between position B1 and position Bmin, the reaction force changes substantially linearly with the change in the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261, so that at position B1 the operating force becomes reaction force Ma2 and at position Bmin the operating force becomes reaction force Ma1, and at position Bmin the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from reaction force Ma1 to zero or from zero to reaction force Ma1.

Condition pattern JA13 (dotted line with a wider pitch than condition pattern JA12) is a pattern in which, at position Bmax, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from zero to reaction force Ma1, or from reaction force Ma1 to zero, and in the section between position Bmax and position B3, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is kept approximately constant at reaction force Ma1, and in the section between position B3 and position Bmin, the reaction force changes approximately linearly so that the operating force becomes reaction force Ma1 at position B3 and becomes zero at position Bmin.

Condition pattern JA14 (two-dot chain line) is a pattern in which at position Bmax, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from zero to reaction force Ma1, in the section between position Bmax and position B3, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is kept substantially constant at reaction force Ma1, at position B3, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from reaction force Ma1 to escape force Mb1, in the section between position B3 and position Bmin, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is kept substantially constant at escape force Mb1, and at position Bmin, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from escape force Mb1 to zero.

Figures 36(B) to 36(D) show an example of a case where the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force (reaction force, escape force) of the pressing operation device 1261 according to a set condition pattern (the condition under which the sub-control board 940 controls the operating mechanism 860) when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is lowered from position Bmax, which is the initial position (neutral position), by the player's operation.

Figure 36 (B) is a graph showing an example of a displacement pattern of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in a situation where the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends over time. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 36 (B) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time. In the position vs. operating force control pattern, it is the player who lowers the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the displacement speed and displacement amount vary depending on the player's intention.

Displacement pattern JB11 (solid line) is a pattern in which, when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmax, the operation surface descends at a substantially constant displacement speed from time t1 and reaches position Bmin at time te. More specifically, displacement pattern JB11 is a pattern in which, due to the player's operation, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 begins to descend from position Bmax at time t1, reaches position B3 at time t2, reaches position B2 at time t3, reaches position B1 at time t4, and descends at a displacement speed such that it reaches position Bmin at time te.

Displacement pattern JB12 (dash-dotted line) is a pattern in which, when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmax, the operation surface descends from time t1 to time t2 at a substantially constant displacement speed, and then the downward displacement speed increases to reach position Bmin at time t3.

Figure 36 (C) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing the change over time of the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the set condition pattern. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 36 (C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

Specifically, the action force pattern JC11 (solid line) is the action force pattern when the condition pattern JA11 shown in FIG. 36(A) is set and the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 to lower the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the displacement pattern JB11 shown in FIG. 36(B) (i.e., a pattern in which the position is lowered from position Bmax to position Bmin at a substantially constant displacement speed).

According to the operating force pattern JC11, when the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 displaces according to the displacement pattern JB11, the sub-control board 940, according to the condition pattern JA11, sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero from time t0 to time t1, generates a reaction force MaA at time t1, maintains the reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time te, and sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time te during the period from time t0 to time t1.

In addition, since a force in the direction of gravity (downward) is applied to the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 due to the weight of the pressing operation device 1261, in order to maintain (hold) the operation surface at a predetermined height, it is necessary to generate a reaction force that balances the weight. Therefore, even if the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 is zero, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 that balances the operating force needs to be a positive value rather than zero. In the following explanation, for ease of understanding, the weight of the pressing operation device 1261 is not taken into consideration, and it is explained that when the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is zero, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained.

The action force pattern JC12 (dotted line) is the action force pattern when the condition pattern JA12 shown in FIG. 36(A) is set and the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 to lower the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the displacement pattern JB11 shown in FIG. 36(B).

According to the operating force pattern JC12, when the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JB11, the sub-control board 940, according to the condition pattern JA12, sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, maintains reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t2, increases the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 approximately linearly from reaction force Ma1 to reaction force Ma2 from time t2 to time t3, maintains reaction force Ma2 from time t3 to time t4, decreases the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 approximately linearly from reaction force Ma2 to reaction force Ma1 from time t4 to time te, and sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time te.

The action force pattern JC13 (dotted line with a wider pitch than action force pattern JC12) is the action force pattern when the condition pattern JA13 shown in FIG. 36(A) is set and the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 to lower the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the displacement pattern JB11 shown in FIG. 36(B).

According to the operating force pattern JC13, when the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 displaces according to the displacement pattern JB11, the sub-control board 940, according to the condition pattern JA13, sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, maintains the reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t2, and reduces the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 approximately linearly from reaction force Ma1 to zero from time t2 to time te.

The action force pattern JC14 (dash-dotted line) is the action force pattern when the condition pattern JA14 shown in FIG. 36(A) is set and the player presses the pressing device 1261 to lower the position of the operation surface of the pressing device 1261 according to the displacement pattern JB12 shown in FIG. 36(B).

According to the operating force pattern JC14, when the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 displaces according to the displacement pattern JB12, the sub-control board 940, according to the condition pattern JA14, sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, and maintains the reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t2.

The sub-control board 940 generates an escape force Mb1 at time t2. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the escape force Mb1 is a force that lowers (displaces) the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (in the pressing direction), and is of a magnitude that can lower the operation surface at the same descent speed as the descent speed at which the operation surface displaces from position B2 to position Bmin from time t2 to time t3 when the player places his/her hand lightly on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., when the operation surface is pressed with an operating force MpX). As a result, when the escape force Mb1 occurs at time t2, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position Bmin at time t3, as shown in the displacement pattern JB12.

Therefore, since the escape force Mb1 occurs at time t2, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position Bmin at time t3, and the sub-control board 940 reduces the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time 3, as shown in the operating force pattern JC14.

Figure 36 (D) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing the change over time in the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., the pressing force applied to the operating surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 36 (D) shows the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

Operation force pattern JD11 (solid line) is an example of the change over time in the operating force of a push operation when the player operates (pushes) the push operation device 1261 so that the position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 descends according to the displacement pattern JB11 shown in FIG. 36(B) (i.e., a pattern in which the position descends from position Bmax to position Bmin at a substantially constant displacement speed) when the condition pattern JA11 shown in FIG. 36(A) is set.

Operation force pattern JD11 is a pattern in which the operation force is zero from time t0 to time t1, the operation force changes (increases) from zero to operation force Mp1 at time t1, the operation force is Mp1 from time t1 to time te, and the operation force becomes zero at time te.

The case where the "operating force of the player operating the pressing operation device 1261 is zero" does not only mean a case where the player is not touching the operation surface, but also includes a case where the pressing operation device 1261 cannot be pressed from the initial position (e.g., position Bmax).

In the examples shown in Figures 36(B) to 36(D), the operating force Mp1 is greater in absolute value than the reaction force Ma1. Therefore, at time t1, the operating force applied by the player becomes operating force Mp1, which is greater than the reaction force Ma1, and the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 begins to displace in the pressing direction (pushing direction).

Therefore, when condition pattern JA11 is set, if a player performs a push operation so that the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 displaces according to displacement pattern JB11 (i.e., so that it displaces at a substantially constant push speed (the position speed of the operation surface in the pushing direction)), the player can feel an operation sensation that corresponds to the change in operation force according to operation force pattern JD11, that is, an operation sensation of operating with a substantially constant operating force from when the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 starts to descend from position Bmax, which is the initial position, until it reaches position Bmin, which is the end point of the push operation.

The operating force pattern JD12 (dotted line) is an example of the change over time in the operating force of a push operation when the condition pattern JA12 shown in Figure 36 (A) is set and the player operates (pushes) the push operation device 1261 so that the position of the operating surface of the push operation device 1261 descends according to the displacement pattern JB11 shown in Figure 36 (B).

Operation force pattern JD12 is a pattern in which the operation force is zero from time t0 to time t1, changes from zero to Mp1 at time t1, is maintained at Mp1 from time t1 to time t2, increases approximately linearly from Mp1 to Mp2 from time t2 to time t3, is maintained at Mp2 from time t3 to time t4, decreases approximately linearly from Mp2 to Mp1 from time t4 to time te, and becomes zero at time te.

Note that the operating force Mp2 is greater than the reaction force Ma2 in absolute value. Therefore, the operating force in the section from time t2 to time te is greater than the reaction force at each time, and as a result, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 can be moved in the pressing direction by the player's operation (pressing operation) from time t2 to time te.

Therefore, when condition pattern JA12 is set as the control condition, if a player operates the pressing operation device 1261 at a substantially constant pressing speed, the player can feel a series of operation sensations that correspond to the change in operating force according to operating force pattern JD12, that is, after the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 starts to descend from the initial position Bmax, it can be operated up to a certain position with a first operating force, but at a certain position a second operating force greater than the first operating force is required, and while operating with the second operating force, it can be operated again with the first operating force at a certain position.

Operation force pattern JD13 (dotted line with a wider pitch than operation force pattern JD12) is an example of the change in operation force over time when condition pattern JA13 is set as the control condition and the player presses the pressing operation device 1261 to lower the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 according to displacement pattern JB11.

Operation force pattern JD13 is a pattern in which the operation force is zero from time t0 to time t1, changes from zero to Mp1 at time t1, is maintained at Mp1 from time t1 to time t2, and decreases approximately linearly from Mp1 to zero from time t2 to time te.

Therefore, when condition pattern JA13 is set as the control condition, if a player operates the push operation device 1261 at a substantially constant pushing speed, the player can feel a series of operation sensations that correspond to the change in operating force according to operating force pattern JD13, that is, after the operating surface of the push operation device 1261 starts to descend from the initial position Bmax, it can be operated up to a certain position with a predetermined operating force, but the operating force required for the push operation gradually decreases from the certain position to position Bmin.

Operation force pattern JD14 (dash-dotted line) is an example of the change in operating force over time when condition pattern JA14 is set as the control condition, the player presses the pressing operation device 1261 to lower the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 according to displacement pattern JB11 until time t2, and then changes to a state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operating surface.

The operating force pattern JD14 is a pattern in which the operating force is zero from time t0 to time t1, the operating force changes from zero to Mp1 at time t1, the operating force is maintained at Mp1 from time t1 to time t2, the operating force changes (decreases) from Mp1 to MpX at time t2, and the operating force is maintained at MpX from time t2 to time te.
The operating force when the player places his/her hand lightly on the operating surface is defined as MpX.

Therefore, when condition pattern JA14 is set as the control condition, if a player presses the pressing operation device 1261 to lower the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 according to displacement pattern JB11 until time t2, and then changes to a state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operation surface, the player can feel an operation sensation corresponding to the change in operation force according to operation force pattern JD13, that is, after the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 begins to descend from the initial position Bmax, it suddenly descends at a certain position at a descending speed greater than the previous descending speed, so that the hand placed on the operation surface also moves suddenly downward along with the descent, or the hand placed on the operation surface is unable to keep up with the descent of the operation surface and is removed from the operation surface, etc.

Note that, in the operating force pattern JD14, an example is shown in which the hand remains on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 even after time t3 when the operating surface reaches position Bmin, but the pattern may also be such that the hand is removed from the operating surface at time t3.

Figures 36 (E) and 36 (F) show an example of a case where the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force (reaction force) of the pressing operation device 1261 according to a set condition pattern (the condition under which the sub-control board 940 controls the actuation mechanism 860) in a situation where the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from position Bmin, which is the initial position (neutral position) (i.e., the hand operating the operating surface can be pushed back upward).

Figure 36 (E) is a graph showing an example of a displacement pattern of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in a situation where the position of the operation surface rises over time. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 36 (E) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

Displacement pattern JE11 (solid line) is a pattern in which, when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmin, the operation surface rises at a substantially constant displacement speed from time t1 and reaches position Bmax at time te. More specifically, displacement pattern JE11 is a pattern in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises at a displacement speed such that it starts to rise from position Bmin at time t1, reaches position B1 at time t2, reaches position B2 at time t3, reaches position B3 at time t4, and reaches position Bmax at time te.

Figure 36 (F) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing the change over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 controlled according to a condition pattern set for the pressing operation device 1261. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 36 (F) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

Specifically, the operating force pattern JF11 (solid line) is a pattern of the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 controlled by the sub-control board 940 when the condition pattern JA11 shown in FIG. 36(A) is set and the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is raised according to the displacement pattern JE11 shown in FIG. 36(E) (i.e., a pattern in which the position is raised from position Bmin to position Bmax at a substantially constant displacement speed).

According to the operating force pattern JF11, when the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 displaces according to the displacement pattern JE11, the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero in the period from time t0 to time t1 in accordance with the condition pattern JA11, generates an operating force of reaction force Ma1 at time t1, maintains the operating force at reaction force Ma1 in the period from time t1 to time te, and sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time te.

Therefore, when condition pattern JA11 is set and the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 rises at a substantially constant speed (displacement speed of the operation surface), a player who places their hand on the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 or presses the operation surface with an operation force smaller than the generated reaction force can experience the sensation of being pushed back by a substantially constant reaction force from the time when the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 begins to rise from position Bmin, which is the initial position, until it reaches position Bmax, which is the end point of the movement destination, due to the action force (reaction force) generated according to action force pattern JF11.

The action force pattern JF12 is a pattern of the action force of the pressing operation device 1261 controlled by the sub-control board 940 when the condition pattern JA12 shown in FIG. 36(A) is set and the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 in an attempt to raise the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the displacement pattern JE11 shown in FIG. 36(E).

According to the operating force pattern JF12, when the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JE11, the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero in the period from time t0 to time t1 in accordance with the condition pattern JA12, generates an operating force of reaction force Ma1 at time t1, increases the operating force from reaction force Ma1 to reaction force Ma2 approximately linearly from time t1 to time t2, maintains the operating force at reaction force Ma2 in the period from time t2 to time t3, decreases the operating force from reaction force Ma2 to reaction force Ma1 approximately linearly from time t3 to time t4, maintains the operating force at reaction force Ma1 in the period from time t4 to time te, and sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time te.

Therefore, when condition pattern JA12 is set and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises at a substantially constant speed (displacement speed of the operation surface), a player who places his/her hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 or presses the operation surface with an operation force smaller than the generated reaction force will feel a predetermined first reaction force pushing the operation surface back up to a certain position after the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 begins to rise from the initial position Bmin due to changes in the action force (reaction force) generated according to the action force pattern JF12, but then the feeling of being pushed back gradually becomes stronger, the operation surface feels like it is being pushed back by a predetermined second reaction force larger than the first reaction force, and as the second reaction force pushing back the operation surface is felt, the feeling of being pushed back weakens again, allowing the player to experience a series of changes in the feeling of the operation surface being pushed back.

The action force pattern JF13 is a pattern of the action force of the pressing operation device 1261 controlled by the sub-control board 940 when the condition pattern JA13 shown in FIG. 36(A) is set and the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 in an attempt to raise the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the displacement pattern JE11 shown in FIG. 36(E).

According to the operating force pattern JF13, when the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 displaces according to the displacement pattern JE11, the sub-control board 940, according to the condition pattern JA13, controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero in the period from time t0 to time t1, increases the operating force approximately linearly from zero to reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t4, maintains the operating force at reaction force Ma1 in the period from time t4 to time te, and sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time te.

Therefore, when condition pattern JA13 is set and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises at a substantially constant speed (displacement speed of the operation surface), a player who places their hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 or presses the operation surface with an operation force smaller than the generated reaction force will feel a gradually increasing feeling of being pushed back to a certain position due to the change in the action force (reaction force) generated according to the action force pattern JF13 as the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 begins to rise from the initial position Bmin, and then will be able to experience a feeling of being pushed back by a substantially constant pushing force.

Figure 37 (A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the operating mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 37 (A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time. The condition pattern shown in Figure 37 (A) is a pattern in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves in a direction opposite to the pressing direction (push-in direction) when the player's hand touches the operation surface (hereinafter, the direction is also referred to as the "return direction"), and then the operation surface moves in the pressing direction. In the following explanation, a pattern in which the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled by specifying the elapsed time and the position of the operation surface is described as a time-to-position control pattern. Note that the control of moving the operating surface using a time-position control pattern is not limited to application to the control of a device that operates an operating surface as an operated part that can be operated by a player, but may instead be applied to the control of an effect device that performs an effect in which a part of the player's body that comes into contact with the operating surface is moved through the operating surface as a moving part that can be contacted with a part of the player's body.

Figure 37 (A) illustrates condition patterns JA21 and JA22 as two types of time-position control patterns. Note that these condition patterns JA21 and JA22 are merely examples of condition patterns, and condition patterns of various shapes according to control conditions may be applied.

The multiple condition patterns JA21, JA22 are each associated with a specific situation (the type of performance displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479). When one of the situations associated with each of the condition patterns JA21, JA22 occurs, the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition pattern corresponding to that situation.

For example, the condition patterns JA21 and JA22 are each associated with an effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, and when one of the effects associated with the condition patterns is selected as the effect to be executed, the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition pattern corresponding to that effect.

Condition pattern JA21 (solid line) is a pattern in which, when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmin, the operation surface starts to rise from position Bmin at time t1, reaches position B2 at time t2, and then starts to descend from position B2, reaching position Bmin at time t3.

In other words, condition pattern JA21 is a pattern in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced in the return direction during the period from time t1 to time t2, regardless of whether the player's hand is touching the operation surface or not, and then the movement direction of the operation surface changes to the pressing direction at time t2.

In the condition pattern JA22 (dotted line), when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmin, the operation surface starts to rise from position Bmin at time t1 and reaches position B2 at time t2,
This is a pattern in which the signal is maintained at position B2 during the period from time t2 to time t3, starts to descend from position B2 at time t3, and reaches position Bmin at time te.

In other words, condition pattern JA2w is a pattern in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced in the return direction during the period from time t1 to time t2, regardless of whether the player's hand is touching the operation surface or not, and then the position of the operation surface at time t2 (position B2) is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then the movement direction of the operation surface changes to the pressing direction at time t4.

Figure 37 (B) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern that indicates the change over time in the operating force (i.e., the pressing force on the operating surface) of the player's operation on the pressing operation device 1261. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 37 (B) shows the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JB21 shown in FIG. 37(B), after the player is able to perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 at time t0, at time t1, the player presses the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with an operating force MpX corresponding to a state in which the player's hand is lightly placed on the operating surface, and then continues to lightly place the hand on the operating surface until time te, at which time the player removes the hand from the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

Figure 37 (C) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing the change over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition patterns JA21 and JA22 shown in Figure 37 (A). The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 37 (C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC21 (solid line) is the operating force pattern when the condition pattern JA21 shown in FIG. 37(A) is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB21 shown in FIG. 37(B).

According to the operating force pattern JC21, when the condition pattern JA21 is set and an operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB21, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, and maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t2.

In the example shown in FIG. 37, the reaction force Ma1 is a value greater than the operating force MpX in absolute value, and is of a magnitude that can raise the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at the same rising speed as the rising speed at which the operating surface moves from position Bmin to position B2 from time t1 to time t2 when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is MpX. As a result, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin from time t0 to time t1, and rises from position Bmin to position B2 from time t1 to time t2, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA21.

The sub-control board 940 generates an escape force Mb2 at time t2. In the example shown in FIG. 37, the escape force Mb2 is large enough to move the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 down at the same speed as the speed at which the operation surface moves from position B2 to position Bmin from time t2 to time t3 when the player places his/her hand lightly on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., when the operation surface is pressed with an operation force MpX). As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves down from position B2 to position Bmin from time t2 to time t3 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA21.

Note that because the escape force Mb2 occurs at time t2, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position Bmin at time t3, so the sub-control board 940 reduces the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time t3, as shown in the operating force pattern JC21.

The operating force pattern JC22 (dotted line) is the operating force pattern when the condition pattern JA22 shown in FIG. 37(A) is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB21 shown in FIG. 37(B).

According to the operating force pattern JC21, when the condition pattern JA22 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB21, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, and maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at reaction force Ma1 between time t1 and time t2. As a result, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin between time t0 and time t1, according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA22, and rises from position Bmin to position B2 between time t1 and time t2.

At time t2, the sub-control board 940 changes the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a reaction force MaX, and maintains the reaction force MaX from time t2 to time t3. Note that the reaction force MaX is set to a magnitude approximately equal to the operating force MpX. As a result, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at position B2 during the period from time t2 to time t3.

The sub-control board 940 generates an escape force Mb1 at time t2. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 37, the escape force Mb1 is a value smaller in absolute value than the escape force Mb1, and is of a magnitude that can cause the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to descend at the same descent speed as the descent speed at which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 displaces from position B2 to position Bmin from time t3 to time te when the player places his/her hand lightly on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., when the operation surface is pressed with an operation force MpX). As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from time t3 to time te, and reaches position Bmin at time te.

Fig. 38(A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism 860. The horizontal axis of the graph shown in Fig. 38(A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the vertical axis shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261. The condition pattern shown in Fig. 38(A) is a pattern that includes control (hereinafter also referred to as constant position control) that outputs an operating force so that the position (height) of the operation surface is maintained at a predetermined position (height) when the position (height) of the operation surface becomes a predetermined position (height), and is defined by the relationship between the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261.

In the condition pattern JA31 shown in FIG. 38(A), at position Bmax, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force (operation force) of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero, and in the section between position Bmax and position B2, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a predetermined reaction force MaA. The control pattern in this section between position Bmax and position B2 may be control using a position vs. operating force control pattern or control using a time vs. position control pattern, and FIG. 38(A) describes a case where control using a position vs. operating force control pattern is combined.

The condition pattern JA31 is a pattern in which constant position control is performed at position B2, and the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a value within a range from zero to Ma2 and to be a reaction force corresponding to the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261. This constant position control only needs to end when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the end condition can be set in various ways, such as the lapse of time held at a constant position, the lapse of progress time from the start of the performance in the variable display, or the input of a certain operating force or a predetermined operation pattern, or the satisfaction of any of a plurality of conditions. Note that the constant position control does not necessarily need to be controlled to be maintained at a single position such as position B2, and may be controlled to output a reaction force corresponding to the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 so that the position is maintained within a certain range.

For condition pattern JA31, if the end condition of the constant position control is met after performing the constant position control at position B2, the subsequent control pattern may be a combination of control using a position vs. operating force control pattern or a combination of control using a time vs. position control pattern. In the following explanation, a case where control using a position vs. operating force control pattern is combined will be explained.

In condition pattern JA31, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 when the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is at position B2. When the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261 is equal to or greater than zero and less than Ma2, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to be equal to the operating force, and when the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261 exceeds Ma2, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to be equal to Ma2 and the operating surface to be lowered. This Ma2 is set, for example, as a maximum allowable operating force that is preset so that the pressing operation device 1261 does not break down, and when an excessive operating force is input, the constant position control is released by suppressing the increase in the reaction force, and the operating surface is lowered to protect the pressing operation device 1261.

Figure 38 (B) is a graph showing an example of a displacement pattern indicating the change over time in the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when condition pattern JA31 is set. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 38 (B) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

As shown by the displacement pattern JB31 (solid line), the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax between time t0 and time t1, and descends from position Bmax to position B2 between time t1 and time t2. When the operation surface reaches position B2, the height position is maintained at position B2 by constant position control.

After the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position B2, at time t4, which is the end condition for the constant position control, the sub-control board 940 moves the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 according to a number of types of time-position control patterns. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 performs control to generate a reaction force so that the operation surface descends at a predetermined descending speed as in the three types of displacement patterns JB31A to JB31C, or ascends as in the dashed line JB31D.

Here, the control of the pressing operation device 1261 by the sub-control board 940 during periods other than the period during which constant position control is being performed (times t2 to t4) is controlled by a position vs. operating force control pattern and a time vs. position control pattern, and as this control is explained using Figures 38 and 39, its explanation will be omitted.

At time t2, the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches height position B2 where constant position control is performed, and from this time, the sub-control board 940 performs constant position control, and generates a reaction force equal to the operating force for an operating force greater than or equal to zero and less than Mp2.

Figure 38 (C) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing the change over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., the pressing force on the operating surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 38 (C) shows the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JC31 shown in FIG. 38(C), the player presses the operating surface of the press operation device 1261 with an operating force MpA from time t0 to time t1, and then continues to press with the operating force MpA until time t2a. If the player continues to press the operating surface of the press operation device 1261 with the operating force MpA until time t2a even after time t2 when the operating surface of the press operation device 1261 reaches position B2, the sub-control board 940 increases the reaction force after time t2, causing the operating surface of the press operation device 1261 to remain in position B2.

Figure 38 (D) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing the change over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 that occurs according to condition pattern JA31 when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JC31 shown in Figure 38 (C). The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 38 (D) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

As shown in FIG. 38(D), the sub-control board 940 increases the reaction force from the current value of reaction force MaA to a value equal to the operating force MpA from time t2 onwards. As a result, even if the player presses the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with operating force MpA during the period from time t2 to time t2a, the operating surface will remain at position B2.

After time t2a has passed, operating force pattern JC31 illustrates a case in which the player performs a push operation with a force greater than the operating force MpA because the player was not able to lower the operating surface by time t2a. Specifically, this illustrates a case in which the operating forces for each push at times tA, tB, and tC become greater as the operating time becomes later.

At each time tA, tB, and tC, when the player performs a push operation (a short push on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 and then immediately releases the hand), a reaction force of the same magnitude as the operating force is generated by constant position control by the sub-control board 940. As a result, the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 cannot be lowered, and the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 remains at position B2, as shown in FIG. 38 (B).

If a pressing operation is performed after time t2 with a certain excessive operating force (e.g., operating force Mpe) that exceeds the operating force Mp2, the sub-control board 940 releases the constant position control and controls the operation surface to lower. This control can protect the pressing operation device 1261 from damage, etc.

In addition, in condition pattern JA31, when the player stops the pushing operation (i.e., removes his/her hand from the operation surface of the push operation device 1261), the sub-control board 940 may perform control so that a reaction force is generated with an action force pattern different from that when the pushing operation is continued. For example, if the player starts to lower the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 at time t1, but stops the pushing operation before it descends to position B2, the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 may be configured to return to position Bmax without performing constant position control, or control may be included to change the height position at which constant position control is performed so that the operation surface remains at that position when the player stops the pushing operation before it descends to position B2.

Figure 38 (E) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism 860. The horizontal axis of the graph shown in Figure 38 (E) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the vertical axis shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261.

The condition pattern JA32 shown in FIG. 38(E) is a pattern in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 operates according to the displacement pattern JB32 shown in FIG. 38(B), and is a pattern in which the operation surface is controlled to rise from the initial position toward a position where constant position control is performed.

In condition pattern JA32, at position B2, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a value within the range from zero to Ma2 and to a reaction force corresponding to the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261, and in the section between position B2 and position Bmin, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a predetermined reaction force MaA.

In condition pattern JA32, the control of the reaction force when the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is position B2 is the same as in condition pattern JA31. In other words, when the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 is equal to or greater than zero and less than Ma2, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to be the same as the operating force, and when the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 is Ma2, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to Ma2.

When condition pattern JA32 is set, the sub-control board 940 controls the position of the operation surface so that the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) becomes position Bmin. If the player then continues to lightly place his/her hand on the operation surface (for example, pressing with an operating force MpX) until time t2a, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, and generates a reaction force in the section from time t1 to t2 to raise the position of the operation surface.

When the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position B2, the sub-control board 940 starts constant position control. After starting this constant position control, the same control as condition pattern JA31 can be performed, and the explanation of this is omitted.

Figure 39 (A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the operating mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 39 (A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time. The condition pattern shown in Figure 39 (A) is a pattern in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 automatically moves in a predetermined direction when the player's hand is released from the operation surface at a predetermined time (time t4 in the example shown in Figure 39 (A)) after the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 pushes back the player's hand that is in contact with the operation surface, and is an example of a time-to-position control pattern.

Condition pattern JA41 (solid line) is a pattern in which, when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmax, the operation surface starts to descend from position Bmax at time t1, reaches position B2 at time t4, then starts to descend from position B2, and reaches position Bmin at time te.

Condition pattern JA42 (dotted line) is a pattern in which, when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is position Bmax, the operation surface starts to descend from position Bmax at time t1, reaches position B2 at time t4, and then starts to descend from position B2, reaching position Bmin at time t4b, which is before time te.

Condition pattern JA43 (two-dot chain line) is a pattern in which, when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is position Bmax, the operation surface starts to descend from position Bmax at time t1, reaches position B2 at time t4, and then starts to rise from position B2, reaching position B3 at time te.

Figure 39 (B) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing the change over time in the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., the pressing force applied to the operating surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 39 (B) shows the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JB41 shown in FIG. 39(B), after the player is able to perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 at time t0, the player presses (presses) the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with an operating force Mp1 at time t1, and then continues pressing with the operating force Mp1 until time t4, at which time the player releases his/her hand from the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time t4.

Figure 39 (C) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern that indicates the change over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 that occurs according to a set condition pattern when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB41 shown in Figure 39 (B). The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 39 (C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The action force pattern JC41 (solid line) in FIG. 39(C) is the action force pattern when the condition pattern JA41 shown in FIG. 39(A) is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the action force pattern JB41 shown in FIG. 39(B).

According to the operating force pattern JC41, when the condition pattern JA41 is set and an operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB41, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, and then maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t4.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, the reaction force Ma1 is smaller in absolute value than the operating force Mp1, and is of a magnitude that can cause the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to descend at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which the operating surface moves from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t4 when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp1. As a result, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and descends from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t4, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA41.

At time t4, when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface, the sub-control board 940 generates a runaway force Mb1 as shown in the operating force pattern JC41, and maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at the runaway force Mb1 from time t4 to time te.

39, the escape force Mb1 is a force that lowers (displaces) the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in the pressing direction, and is of a magnitude that can lower the operation surface at the same descent speed as the descent speed at which the operation surface displaces from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 to time te when the operating force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is zero. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface to time te, according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA41.

The action force pattern JC42 (dashed line) in FIG. 39(C) is the action force pattern when the condition pattern JA42 shown in FIG. 39(A) is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the action force pattern JB41 shown in FIG. 39(B).

According to the operating force pattern JC42, when the condition pattern JA41 is set and an operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB41, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, and maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at reaction force Ma1 for the period from time t1 to time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced in the same manner as when condition pattern JA41 is set, according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA42. In other words, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and descends from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t4.

When the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface at time t4, the sub-control board 940 generates an escape force Mb2 as shown in the action force pattern JC42. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 39, the escape force Mb2 is a force that lowers the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and is of a magnitude that can lower the operation surface at the same descent speed as the descent speed at which the operation surface is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 to time t4b (a time before time te) when the operating force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is zero.

In other words, the speed at which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends when the escape force Mb2 is set is faster than the speed at which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends when the escape force Mb1 is set. The greater the magnitude of the escape force generated by the control of the sub-control board 940 after time t4, the faster the speed at which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from time t4 to time te.

Because the escape force Mb2 occurs at time t4, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position Bmin at time t4b, which is before time te, so the sub-control board 940 sets the action force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time t4b, as shown in action force pattern JC42. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4, when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface, to time t4b, in accordance with the conditions set as condition pattern JA42.

The action force pattern JC43 (dashed line) in FIG. 39(C) is the action force pattern when the condition pattern JA43 shown in FIG. 39(A) is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the action force pattern JB41 shown in FIG. 39(B).

According to the operating force pattern JC43, when the condition pattern JA41 is set and an operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB41, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, and maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at reaction force Ma1 for the period from time t1 to time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced in the same manner as when the condition pattern JA41 is set, according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA43. That is, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and descends from the position Bmax to the position B2 from time t1 to time t4.

When the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface at time t4, the sub-control board 940 generates a reaction force Ma1A as shown in the action force pattern JC43. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 39, the reaction force Ma1A is large enough to raise the operation surface at the same rising speed as the rising speed at which the operation surface is displaced from position B2 to position B3 from time t4 to time te when the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 on the operation surface is zero.

Since the reaction force Ma1A is generated at time t4, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position B3 at time te, so the sub-control board 940 sets the action force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time t4b, as shown in the action force pattern JC42. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from position B2 to position B3 between time t4, when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface, and time te, in accordance with the conditions set as condition pattern JA43.

In a condition pattern similar to condition pattern JA43, in which the force reaches position B2 at time t4 and then starts to rise from position B2, various rising speeds may be applied as the rising speed from time t4 to time te. As a result, depending on the slope of the line segment from time t4 to time te in the condition pattern, the magnitude of the reaction force generated in the period from time t4 to time te in the action force pattern may be, for example, Ma1, which is the same as the reaction force before time t4 (more specifically, the period from time t1 to time t4), or may be a value greater than 0 and less than Ma1. The greater the magnitude of the reaction force generated after time t4 by the control of the sub-control board 940, the faster the rising speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 from time t4 to time te.

Figure 40 (A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 40 (A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time. The condition pattern shown in Figure 40 (A) is a moving pattern in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves in a direction to push back the player's hand touching the operation surface (i.e., upward), and then when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface at a predetermined time (time t4 in the example shown in Figure 40 (A)), the operation surface automatically moves in a predetermined direction, and is an example of a time-to-position control pattern.

Condition pattern JA51 (solid line) is a pattern in which, when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmin, the operation surface starts to rise from position Bmin at time t1, reaches position B2 at time t4, and then starts to descend from position B2, reaching position Bmin at time te.

Condition pattern JA52 (dotted line) is a pattern in which, when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is position Bmin, the operation surface starts to rise from position Bmin at time t1, reaches position B2 at time t4, and then starts to descend from position B2, reaching position Bmin at time t4c, which is before time te.

Condition pattern JA53 (two-dot chain line) is a pattern in which, when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is position Bmin, the operation surface starts to rise from position Bmin at time t1, reaches position B2 at time t4, then starts to rise from position B2, and reaches position B3 at time te.

Figure 40 (B) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing the change over time in the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., the pressing force applied to the operation surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 40 (B) shows the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JB51 shown in FIG. 40(B), after the player is able to perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 at time t0, at time t1 the player presses the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with an operating force MpX corresponding to a state in which the player's hand is lightly placed on the operating surface, and then continues to lightly place the hand on the operating surface until time t4, at which time the player removes the hand from the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time t4.

Figure 40 (C) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern that indicates the change over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 that occurs according to a set condition pattern when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB51 shown in Figure 40 (B). The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 40 (C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC51 (solid line) in FIG. 40(C) is the operating force pattern when the condition pattern JA51 shown in FIG. 40(A) is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB51 shown in FIG. 40(B).

According to the operating force pattern JC41, when the condition pattern JA51 is set and an operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB51, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, and generates a reaction force Ma1 at time t1.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the reaction force Ma1 is a value greater than the operating force MpX in absolute value, and is of a magnitude that can raise the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at the same rising speed as the rising speed at which the operating surface moves from position Bmin to position B2 from time t1 to time t4 when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is MpX. As a result, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin from time t0 to time t1, and rises from position Bmin to position B2 from time t1 to time t4, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA51.

At time t4, when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface, the sub-control board 940 generates a runaway force Mb1 as shown in the operating force pattern JC51, and maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at runaway force Mb1 for the period from time t4 to time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the escape force Mb1 is a force that lowers (displaces in the pressing direction) the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and is of a magnitude that can lower the operation surface at the same descent speed as the descent speed at which the operation surface displaces from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 to time te when the operating force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is zero. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 to time te when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA51.

The action force pattern JC52 (dotted line) in Figure 40 (C) is the action force pattern when the condition pattern JA52 shown in Figure 40 (A) is set and an operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with the action force pattern JB51 shown in Figure 40 (B).

According to the operating force pattern JC52, when the condition pattern JA52 is set and an operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB51, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, and maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at reaction force Ma1 for the period from time t1 to time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced in the same manner as when condition pattern JA51 is set, according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA52. In other words, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin from time t0 to time t1, and rises from position Bmin to position B2 from time t1 to time t4.

When the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface at time t4, the sub-control board 940 generates an escape force Mb2 as shown in the action force pattern JC52. In the example shown in FIG. 40, the escape force Mb2 is a force that lowers the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and is a value greater than the escape force Mb1 in absolute value, and is a magnitude that can lower the operation surface at the same descent speed as the descent speed at which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 displaces from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 to time t4c (a time before time te) when the operating force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is zero. In other words, the descent speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the escape force Mb2 is set is faster than the descent speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the escape force Mb1 is set.

Because the escape force Mb2 occurs at time t4, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position Bmin at time t4b, which is before time te, so the sub-control board 940 sets the action force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time t4c, as shown in action force pattern JC52. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4, when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface, to time t4c, in accordance with the conditions set as condition pattern JA42.

The operating force pattern JC53 (dash line) in FIG. 40(C) is the operating force pattern when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB51 shown in FIG. 40(B) when the condition pattern JA53 shown in FIG. 40(A) is set.

According to the operating force pattern JC53, when the condition pattern JA53 is set and an operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB51, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, and maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at reaction force Ma1 for the period from time t1 to time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced in the same manner as when condition pattern JA51 is set, according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA53. In other words, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin from time t0 to time t1, and rises from position Bmin to position B2 from time t1 to time t4.

When the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface at time t4, the sub-control board 940 generates a reaction force Ma1A as shown in the action force pattern JC53. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 40, the reaction force Ma1A is large enough to raise the operation surface at the same rising speed as the rising speed at which the operation surface is displaced from position B2 to position B3 from time t4 to time te when the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 on the operation surface is zero.

Because the reaction force Ma1A is generated at time t4, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position B3 at time te, so the sub-control board 940 sets the action force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time t4c, as shown in the action force pattern JC52. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from position B2 to position B3 between time t4, when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface, and time te, in accordance with the conditions set as condition pattern JA53.

In a condition pattern similar to condition pattern JA53, in which the movement starts to rise from position B2 after reaching position B2 at time t4, various rising speeds may be applied as the rising speed from time t4 to time te. As a result, depending on the slope of the line segment from time t4 to time te in the condition pattern, the magnitude of the reaction force generated in the period from time t4 to time te in the action force pattern may be, for example, Ma1, which is the same as the reaction force before time t4 (more specifically, the period from time t1 to time t4), or may be a value greater than 0 and less than Ma1. The greater the magnitude of the reaction force generated after time t4 by the control of the sub-control board 940, the faster the rising speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 from time t4 to time te.

Figure 41 (A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 41 (A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

Condition pattern JA61 (solid line) is a pattern in which, when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmax, the operation surface descends at a substantially constant descending speed from time t1 to time te and reaches position Bmin at time te, and is an example of a time-position control pattern.

Condition pattern JA62 (dotted line) is a pattern in which, when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is position Bmax, the operation surface descends at a substantially constant descending speed from time t1 to time t3, and then descends at a substantially constant descending speed from time t3 to time te that is different from the descending speed during the period from time t1 to time t3, and reaches position Bmin at time te.

Figure 41 (B) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing the change over time in the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., the pressing force applied to the operating surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 41 (B) shows the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JB61 (solid line), after the player is able to perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 at time t0, the player presses (presses) the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with an operating force Mp1 at time t1, and then continues pressing with the operating force Mp1 until time te, at which time the player releases his/her hand from the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

According to the operating force pattern JB62 (two-dot chain line), after the player is able to perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 at time t0, at time t1 the player presses the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with an operating force MpX corresponding to a state in which the player's hand is lightly placed on the operating surface, and then continues to lightly place the hand on the operating surface until time te, at which time the player removes the hand from the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

According to the operating force pattern JB63 (dotted line), at time t0, the player is able to perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261, and then at time t1, the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 with a maximum operating force of Mp1A, which is an approximately isosceles triangular pressing operation with a time width Wp1 (a pressing operation corresponding to pressing pattern FA1), and then removes his/her hand from the operating surface, and at time t2, the player performs a pressing operation with a maximum operating force of Mp0A, which is an approximately rectangular pressing operation with a time width Wp2 (a pressing operation corresponding to pressing pattern FA2). After performing this on the pressing operation device 1261, the hand is temporarily removed from the operation surface, and at time t3, a pressing operation of a substantially isosceles trapezoid shape with a maximum operating force of Mp1A and a time width of Wp3 (a pressing operation corresponding to pressing pattern FA3) is performed on the pressing operation device 1261, and the hand is temporarily removed from the operation surface, and at time t4, a pressing operation of a trapezoid shape with a maximum operating force of Mp2 and a time width of Wp3 (a pressing operation corresponding to pressing pattern FA4) is performed on the pressing operation device 1261, and the hand is temporarily removed from the operation surface.

Figure 41 (C) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing the change over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 that occurs according to condition pattern JA61 when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using any of the operating force patterns JB61, JB62, and JB63 shown in Figure 41 (B) when condition pattern JA61 is set. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 41 (C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC61 (solid line) shown in FIG. 41(C) is the operating force pattern when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB61 shown in FIG. 41(B) when the condition pattern JA61 shown in FIG. 41(A) is set.

According to the operating force pattern JC61, when the condition pattern JA61 is set and an operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB61, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, and then maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time te, and sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma1 is smaller in absolute value than the operating force Mp1, and is of a magnitude that can cause the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to descend at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which the operating surface moves from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3 when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp1. As a result, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and descends from position Bmax to position Bmin from time t1 to time te, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61.

The operating force pattern JC62 (dashed two-dot line) shown in FIG. 41(C) is the operating force pattern when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB62 shown in FIG. 41(B) when the condition pattern JA61 shown in FIG. 41(A) is set.

According to the operating force pattern JC62, when the condition pattern JA61 is set and an operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB62, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a breakaway force Mb1 at time t1, and then maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at the breakaway force Mb1 from time t1 to time te, and sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb1 is a force that lowers (displaces) the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in the pressing direction, and is of a magnitude that can lower the operation surface at the same descent speed as the descent speed at which the operation surface is displaced from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3 when the operating force on the operation surface is MpX.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, descends from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3, and further descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t3 to time te, in accordance with the conditions set as condition pattern JA61.

The action force pattern JC63 (dashed line) shown in FIG. 41(C) is the action force pattern when the condition pattern JA61 shown in FIG. 41(A) is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the action force pattern JB63 shown in FIG. 41(B).

According to the operating force pattern JC63, when the condition pattern JA61 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB63, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1. Therefore, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax between time t0 and time t1, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61.

At time t1, the sub-control board 940 generates a recoil force Mb0A, then generates an operating force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FB1) corresponding to the pressing pattern FA1, in which the maximum reaction force is Ma1A and the time width is Wp1, and maintains the recoil force of the pressing operation device 1261 at Mb0A during the period from the time that is the time width Wp1 after time t1 to time t2.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb0A is a force that lowers (displaces in the pressing direction) the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and is of a magnitude that can lower the operation surface at the same descent speed as the descent speed at which the operation surface displaces from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3 when the operating force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is zero. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma1A is of a magnitude that can lower the operation surface at the same descent speed as the descent speed at which the operation surface displaces from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3 when the operating force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp1A.

Since the pressure pattern FA1 and the reaction force pattern FB1 have corresponding shapes, the operation surface of the pressure operation device 1261 descends from position Bmax to position B3 between time t1 and time t2, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61.

At time t2, the sub-control board 940 generates an operating force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FB2) corresponding to the pressing pattern FA2, in which the maximum reaction force is Ma0A and the time width is Wp2, and maintains the escape force of the pressing operation device 1261 at Mb0A during the period from the time width Wp2 after time t2 to time t3.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma0A is large enough to cause the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to descend at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which the operation surface moves from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3 when the operating force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp0A. Since the pressing pattern FA2 and the reaction force pattern FB2 have corresponding shapes, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B3 to position B2 from time t2 to time t3 in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61.

At time t3, the sub-control board 940 generates an operating force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FB3) corresponding to the pressing pattern FA3, with a maximum reaction force of Ma1A and a time width of Wp3, and maintains the escape force of the pressing operation device 1261 at Mb0A from the time that is the time width Wp3 after time t3 until time t4. Because the pressing pattern FA3 and the reaction force pattern FB3 have corresponding shapes, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B2 to position B1 from time t3 to time t4, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61.

At time t4, the sub-control board 940 generates an operating force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FB4) corresponding to the pressing pattern FA4, with a maximum reaction force of Ma2 and a time width of Wp4, and maintains the escape force of the pressing operation device 1261 at Mb0A during the period from the time width Wp4 that has elapsed from time t4 to time te, and then reduces the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma2 is smaller in absolute value than the operating force Mp2, and is of a magnitude that can cause the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to descend at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which the operating surface moves from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3 when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp2. Since the pressing pattern FA4 and the reaction force pattern FB4 have corresponding shapes, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 to time te in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61.

Figure 41 (D) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing the change over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 that occurs according to condition pattern JA62 when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with any of the operating force patterns JB61, JB62, and JB63 shown in Figure 41 (B) when condition pattern JA62 is set. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 41 (D) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The action force pattern JD61 (solid line) shown in FIG. 41(D) is the action force pattern when the condition pattern JA62 shown in FIG. 41(A) is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the action force pattern JB61 shown in FIG. 41(B).

According to the operating force pattern JD61, when the condition pattern JA62 is set and an operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB61, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, and then maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t3, changes the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to reaction force Ma0B at time t3, and then maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at reaction force Ma0B from time t3 to time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma0B is smaller in absolute value than the operating force Mp1, and is of a magnitude that can cause the operating surface to descend at the same descent speed as the descent speed at which the operating surface is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin from time t3 to time t4 when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is the operating force Mp1.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and descends from the position Bmax to the position B2 from time t1 to time t3, according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA62.
In the action force pattern JD61, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position Bmin at time t4, so the sub-control board 940 makes the action force of the pressing operation device 1261 zero at time t4.

The action force pattern JD62 (dashed two-dot line) shown in FIG. 41(D) is the action force pattern when the condition pattern JA62 shown in FIG. 41(A) is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the action force pattern JB62 shown in FIG. 41(B).

According to the operating force pattern JD62, when the condition pattern JA62 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB62, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a runaway force Mb1 at time t1, and then maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at runaway force Mb1 from time t1 to time t3, changes the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to runaway force Mb1A at time t3, and then maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at runaway force Mb1A from time t3 to time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb1A is a force that lowers (displaces) the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in the pressing direction, and is of a magnitude that can lower the operation surface at the same descent speed as the descent speed at which the operation surface is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin from time t3 to time t4 when the operating force on the operation surface is MpX.

As a result, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and descends from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3, according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA62, and then descends from position Bmax to position B2 from time t3 to time 4. Note that in the operating force pattern JD61, the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position Bmin at time t4, and therefore the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time t4.

The action force pattern JD63 (dashed line) shown in FIG. 41(D) is the action force pattern when the condition pattern JA62 shown in FIG. 41(A) is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the action force pattern JB63 shown in FIG. 41(B).

According to the operating force pattern JD63, when the condition pattern JA62 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB63, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1. Therefore, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax between time t0 and time t1, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA62.

At time t1, the sub-control board 940 generates a recoil force Mb0B, then generates an operating force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FC1) corresponding to the pressing pattern FA1, with a maximum reaction force of Ma1B and a time width of Wp1, and maintains the recoil force of the pressing operation device 1261 at Mb0B during the period from the time width Wp1 after time t1 to time t2.

In the example shown in Fig. 41, the escape force Mb0B is a force that lowers the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and is a magnitude that can lower the operation surface at the same lowering speed as the lowering speed at which the operation surface displaces from position B2 to position Bmin from time t3 to time t4 when the operating force on the operation surface is MpX. Since the pressing pattern FA1 and the reaction force pattern FC1 have shapes corresponding to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position Bmax to position B3 from time t1 to time t2 according to the condition set as the condition pattern JA62.

At time t2, the sub-control board 940 generates a reaction force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FC2) corresponding to the pressing pattern FA2, with the maximum reaction force being Ma0C and the time width being Wp2, and maintains the escape force of the pressing operation device 1261 at Mb0B during the period from the time width Wp2 that has elapsed from time t2 to time t3.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb0B is a force that lowers (displaces) the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in the pressing direction, and is of a magnitude that can lower the operation surface at the same descent speed as the descent speed at which the operation surface is displaced from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3 when the operating force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is zero.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, when the operating force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp1A, the reaction force Ma1A is large enough to cause the operation surface to descend at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which the operation surface moves from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3. Since the pressing pattern FA2 and the reaction force pattern FC2 have corresponding shapes, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B3 to position B2 from time t2 to time t3 in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA62.

At time t3, the sub-control board 940 changes the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a slippage force Mb0C, then generates a reaction force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FC3) corresponding to the pressing pattern FA3, with a maximum reaction force of Ma1B and a time width of Wp3, and maintains the slippage force of the pressing operation device 1261 at Mb0B during the period from the time width Wp3 after time t3 to time t4.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb0C is a force that lowers (displaces) the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in the pressing direction, and is of a magnitude that can lower the operation surface at the same descent speed as the descent speed at which the operation surface is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin from time t3 to time t4 when the operating force on the operation surface is zero.

Since the pressure pattern FA3 and the reaction force pattern FC3 have corresponding shapes, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B2 to position B1 from time t3 to time t4, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA62. Note that in the operating force pattern JD63, the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position Bmin at time t4, so the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time t4.

Figure 42 (A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 42 (A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

Condition pattern JA71 (solid line) is a pattern in which, when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmin, the operation surface rises at a substantially constant rate of increase from time t1 to time te and reaches position Bmax at time te, and is an example of a time-position control pattern.

Fig. 42(B) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a change over time in the operating force (i.e., the pressing force on the operating surface) applied to the pressing operation device 1261. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Fig. 42(B) shows the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JB71 (solid line), after the player is able to perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 at time t0, at time t1, the player presses the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with an operating force MpX corresponding to the state in which the player's hand is lightly placed on the operating surface, and then continues to lightly place the hand on the operating surface (i.e., pressing with an operating force MpX) until time te, at which time the player removes the hand from the operating surface. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

According to the operating force pattern JB72 (dotted line), after the player is able to perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 at time t0, at time t1 the player presses the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with an operating force MpX corresponding to the state in which the player's hand is lightly placed on the operating surface, and then continues to lightly place the hand on the operating surface until time t3, at which time the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 changes to Ma1, and then continues to press with an operating force Mp1 until time te, at which time the player releases the hand from the operating surface. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

According to the operating force pattern JB73 (two-dot chain line), after the player is able to perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 at time t0, at time t1, the player presses the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with an operating force MpX corresponding to a state in which the player's hand is lightly placed on the operating surface, and then continues to lightly place the hand on the operating surface until time t2, at which time the player increases the pressure on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and from time t2 to time te, the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 increases approximately linearly from MpX to Mp1, and at time te the player removes the hand from the operating surface. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

Figure 42 (C) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing the change over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 that occurs according to the condition pattern JA71 when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with any of the operating force patterns JB71, JB72, and JB73 shown in Figure 42 (B) when the condition pattern JA71 is set. The vertical axis of the graph shown in Figure 42 (C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC71 (solid line) shown in FIG. 42(C) is the operating force pattern when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB71 shown in FIG. 42(B) when the condition pattern JA71 shown in FIG. 42(A) is set.

According to the operating force pattern JC71, when the condition pattern JA71 is set and an operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB71, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1, generates a reaction force Max at time t1, and then maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at the reaction force Max from time t1 to time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 42, the reaction force Max is a value greater than the operating force MpX in absolute value, and is a magnitude that can raise the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at the same rising speed as the rising speed at which the operating surface moves from position Bmin to position Bmax from time t1 to time te when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is MpX. As a result, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin from time t0 to time t1, and rises from position Bmin to position Bmax from time t1 to time te, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

The operating force pattern JC72 (dashed line) shown in FIG. 42(C) is the operating force pattern when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB72 shown in FIG. 42(B) when the condition pattern JA71 shown in FIG. 42(A) is set.

According to the operating force pattern JC72, when the condition pattern JA71 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB72, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1. Therefore, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin between time t0 and time t1, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

After generating a reaction force Max at time t1, the sub-control board 940 maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at the reaction force Max from time t1 to time t3. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from position Bmin to position B2 from time t1 to time t3, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

After changing the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to Ma1 at time t3, the sub-control board 940 maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at reaction force Ma1 from time t3 to time te. In the example shown in FIG. 42, the reaction force Ma1 is a value greater than the operating force Mp1 in absolute value, and is of a magnitude that can raise the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at the same rising speed as the rising speed at which the operating surface moves from position Bmin to position Bmax from time t1 to time te when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp1. As a result, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from position B2 to position Bmax from time t3 to time te in accordance with the conditions set as condition pattern JA71.

The operating force pattern JC73 (dashed line) shown in FIG. 42(C) is the operating force pattern when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB73 shown in FIG. 42(B) when the condition pattern JA71 shown in FIG. 42(A) is set.

According to the operating force pattern JC73, when the condition pattern JA71 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB73, the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero between time t0 and time t1. Therefore, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin between time t0 and time t1, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

After generating a reaction force Max at time t1, the sub-control board 940 maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at the reaction force Max from time t1 to time t2. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from position Bmin to position B2 from time t1 to time t2, in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

The sub-control board 940 increases the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 from MpX to Ma1 in a substantially linear manner from time t2 to time te. As a result, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from position B2 to position Bmax from time t2 to time te in accordance with the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 36 (A) to 36 (D), when a player performs a push operation (press) on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 and the operation surface can be moved in the downward direction, which is the direction of the push operation, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to execute at least a control in which the reaction force in the push operation direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition (e.g., condition pattern JA11), and a control in which the reaction force in the push operation direction (press operation direction) is controlled based on a predetermined second condition (e.g., condition pattern JA12) including a control section (e.g., a section from position Bmax to position B3) different from the first control when the control is the first control, in which the condition for controlling the reaction force in a certain section (e.g., a section from position Bmax to position B3) is common to the first control (e.g., a second control different from the first control).

The sub-control board 940 may be configured to be able to select and execute a specific variable display including an operable period during which the push operation device 1261 can be operated during the period of the variable display, and may be configured to be able to produce a plurality of effects with different expectations (expectations of transition to a special game state) when the push operation device 1261 is operated during the operable period of the specific variable display, and condition patterns JA11 to JA14 may be associated with each of the plurality of effects with different expectations, and the sub-control board 940 may be configured to execute the first control when a first effect is executed among the plurality of effects with different expectations, and to execute the second control when a second effect with a different expectation from the first effect is executed.

According to this configuration, when the first or second performance is executed in a specific variable display, the player can feel a similar reaction force in the push operation direction in at least some sections of each performance (i.e., sections where the conditions for controlling the reaction force are common), so that in that section, it is difficult for the player to tell from the feeling of the reaction force whether the performance being executed is the first performance or a second performance with a different expectation level from the first performance. This makes it possible to provide gameplay that allows players to expect the expectation level of a performance executed in a specific variable display that includes multiple performances with different expectation levels.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 36 (A), 36 (E), and 36 (F), when the player presses (presses) the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 downward, or when the player's hand (part of the body) is in contact with the operation surface and the operation surface can be moved in the opposite direction to the direction of the pressing operation (i.e., upward), the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to execute at least a control in which the reaction force of at least a portion of the section in the opposite direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition (e.g., condition pattern JA11), and a control in which the reaction force of a portion of the section (e.g., the section from position B3 to position Bmin) is controlled based on a predetermined second condition (e.g., condition pattern JA12) in which the reaction force of the portion of the section is different from that of the first control when the control is the first control (e.g., a second control different from the first control).

Here, the condition patterns JA11 to JA14 may be associated with each of a plurality of effects with different degrees of expectation, and the sub-control board 940 may be configured to execute the first control when a first effect is executed among the plurality of effects with different degrees of expectation, and to execute the second control when a second effect with a different degree of expectation from the first effect is executed.

According to this configuration, in the first and second effects executable in a specific variable display, the reaction force is different in at least a portion of the section in the opposite direction (the direction opposite to the direction of the push operation), so in a situation where the player's hand (part of the body) is in contact with the operating part, or in a situation where the player is pressing the operation surface in the direction of the push operation, it is difficult for the player to tell from the feeling of the reaction force in that portion of the section whether the effect being executed is the first effect or a second effect with a different expectation level from the first effect. This makes it possible to provide a gameplay that allows players to expect the expectation level of an effect executed in a specific variable display that includes multiple effects with different expectation levels.

Also, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 36 (A) to 36 (D), the sub-control board 940 is configured to be capable of at least executing the following control when a player presses (moves) the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 in a predetermined downward direction, in accordance with condition pattern JA14: control in which the operation surface moves in a downward direction while generating a reaction force (a reaction force resisting the press operation device 1261) acting in the opposite direction to the direction of the press operation; and control (for example, a second control different from the first control) in which, when this control is set as the first control, after the first control is performed, the operation surface moves in a downward direction (in the direction in which the operation surface moves in the direction in which the movement operation is performed).

Thus, after the player feels a reaction force resisting the push operation while moving the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 downward by a push operation (movement operation), the player feels the reaction force become smaller as the operation surface moves downward in the direction of the push operation due to control by the second control, and in some cases, the speed at which the operation surface moves downward due to the operation (movement in the direction of the push operation) may be too fast, causing the hand performing the push operation on the operation surface to move away from the operation surface. This makes it possible to add an element of surprise to the push operation on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 by the player, and to provide a variety of playability using the push operation device 1261.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to execute at least the following control operations when the hand, which is a part of the player's body, is in contact with the operation surface of the push operation device 1261: control that generates a reaction force that can move the operation surface in the upward direction, which is the opposite direction to the direction of the push operation on the push operation device 1261 (for example, control in the section from time t1 to time t2 performed according to condition pattern JA21); and control that controls the movement of the operation surface in a direction in which the operation surface moves in the direction of the push operation (i.e., downward) after the first control is performed when the control is set as the first control (for example, second control different from the first control, control in the section from time t2 to time t3 performed according to condition pattern JA21).

Therefore, when a part of the player's body is in contact with the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, the player feels a reaction force that can move the operation surface upward (in the opposite direction to the direction of the push operation), and then feels that the reaction force has become smaller as the operation surface moves in the direction of the push operation due to control by the second control, and in some cases, a situation may arise in which the speed at which the operation surface moves downward due to the action (movement in the direction of the push operation) is too fast, causing the hand (part of the player's body) that is in contact with the operation surface to leave the operation surface. This makes it possible to add an element of surprise to the feeling that the player receives from the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 that can move upward, which is the opposite direction to the direction of the push operation, when the player's hand is in contact with it, and to provide a variety of playability using the push operation device 1261.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 38 (A) to 38 (D), when a player presses (moves) the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in a predetermined downward direction, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to execute at least the following control operations: control in which the operation surface moves downward while generating a reaction force (a reaction force resisting the pressing operation device 1261) acting in the opposite direction to the direction of the pressing operation (for example, control in the section from position Bmax to position B2 performed according to condition pattern JA31); and control in which the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled so as to generate a reaction force that holds the operation surface in a fixed position (for example, position B2) in the downward direction (the direction in which the pressing operation is performed) after the first control is performed when the control is set as the first control (for example, control at position B2 performed according to condition pattern JA31, which is a second control different from the first control).

Thus, the player feels a reaction force resisting the push operation while moving the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 downward by the push operation, and then feels that the operation surface, which was moving in a predetermined direction by the player's push operation, has suddenly stopped moving because the operation surface is held in a fixed position downward (toward the direction of the push operation) by the reaction force generated by the control by the second control. This makes it possible to add an element of surprise to the movement operation of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 by the player, and to provide a variety of playability using the push operation device 1261.

In the condition pattern JA31 shown in FIG. 38(A), the sub-control board 940 is configured to control the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 in the second control performed after the first control to generate a reaction force that holds the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at a fixed position in the downward direction. However, the second control may be configured to control the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 to generate a reaction force that holds the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 within a fixed range in the downward direction. With this configuration, the player feels that the movement of the operation surface, which was moving downward in the direction of the pressing operation by the player's pressing operation, has suddenly worsened because the operation surface is held within a fixed range in the downward direction by the reaction force generated by the control by the second control. Similarly, it is possible to add an element of surprise to the movement operation of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 by the player.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38(B), the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to execute at least the following control operations when the player's hand (part of the body) is in contact with the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261: control to generate a reaction force capable of moving the operation surface upward (in the direction opposite to the direction of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261) (for example, control in the section from position Bmin to position B2 performed according to condition pattern JA31); and control to control the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 so as to generate a reaction force that holds the operation surface in a predetermined position (for example, position B2) after the first control is performed when the control is set as the first control (for example, second control different from the first control, control at position B2 performed according to condition pattern JA32).

Therefore, when a part of the player's body is in contact with the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, the player feels a reaction force that can move the operation surface in an upward direction, and then feels that the operation surface has suddenly stopped moving because the reaction force generated by the control of the second control holds the operation surface in a predetermined position. This makes it possible to add an element of surprise to the sensation that the player receives from the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 that can move upward (in the opposite direction to the direction of the push operation) when part of the player's body is in contact with it, and makes it possible to provide a variety of playability using the push operation device 1261.

In the condition pattern JA32 shown in FIG. 38(D), the sub-control board 940 is configured to control the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 in the second control performed after the first control to generate a reaction force that holds the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at a predetermined position, but the second control may be configured to control the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 to generate a reaction force that holds the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 within a predetermined range. With this configuration, the player can feel the unexpected sensation of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, which can move upward in the opposite direction to the direction of the pressing operation when the player's hand is in contact with it, because the reaction force generated by the second control holds the operation surface within a predetermined range.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be capable of at least executing operation control (for example, control in the section from time t4 to time te performed according to condition pattern JA41) for operating the operation surface in a first manner when a predetermined moving operation is performed in which the player's hand (part of the body) and the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, which is pushed by the hand, move downward in the direction of the push operation and then the hand is released from the operation surface, and operation control (for example, control in the section from time t4 to time te performed according to condition pattern JA42) for operating the operation surface in a second manner different from the first manner when the predetermined moving operation is performed.

Therefore, when a predetermined situation occurs in which the player's hand and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 on which the pressing operation is performed move downward and then the player's hand leaves the operation surface, the manner of operation of the operation surface can be made different between the case where the former operation control (e.g., first operation control) is performed and the case where the latter operation control (e.g., second operation control) is performed.

For example, if a specific situation occurs in which the player's hand and the operation surface of the press operation device 1261, which is pressed by the hand, move downward and then the player's hand leaves the operation surface, as in condition pattern JA41 and condition pattern JA43, the operation surface can be moved to different positions (for example, different positions in the vertical direction such as position Bmin or position B3), or the movement speed of the operation surface can be made different, as in condition pattern JA41 and condition pattern JA43. This can add an element of surprise to the player's operation of moving the operation surface of the press operation device 1261, and can provide a variety of playability using the press operation device 1261.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be capable of at least performing operation control (for example, control in the section from time t4 to time te according to condition pattern JA51) to operate the operation surface in a first manner when a predetermined situation occurs in which the player's hand (part of the body) and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 that the hand contacts are displaced upward, which is the opposite direction to the direction of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261, and then the hand is released from the operation surface, and operation control (for example, control in the section from time t4 to time t4c according to condition pattern JA52) to operate the operation surface in a second manner different from the first manner when the predetermined situation occurs.

Therefore, when a predetermined situation occurs in which the player's hand and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 that the player's hand contacts are displaced upward (in the direction opposite to the direction of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261) and then the player's hand is released from the operation surface, the manner of operation of the operation surface can be made different between the case where the former operation control (e.g., first operation control) is performed and the case where the latter operation control (e.g., second operation control) is performed.

For example, if a certain situation occurs in which the player's hand moves upwards between the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 that the player's hand is in contact with and then the player's hand leaves the operation surface, the operation surface can be moved to different positions (for example, different positions in the height direction, such as position Bmin or position B3) as in condition pattern JA51 and condition pattern JA53, or the movement speed of the operation surface can be made different as in condition pattern JA51 and condition pattern JA53. This can add an element of surprise to the sensation the player receives from the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 that can move upwards (the opposite direction to the direction of the pressing operation) when part of the player's body is in contact with it, and can provide a variety of playability using the pressing operation device 1261.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the sub-control board 940 is configured to at least execute control such that, when the player's operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is of a predetermined magnitude, the sub-control board 940 generates a predetermined reaction force that causes the operating surface to move in a predetermined moving operation pattern (for example, condition pattern JA61, which is a combination of moving speed and moving amount) downward, which is the direction of the pressing operation, and generates a reaction force of a magnitude different from the predetermined reaction force so that the operating surface moves in the moving operation pattern or the operation of the operating surface approaches the moving operation pattern when the player's operating force on the operating surface is different from the predetermined magnitude.

Therefore, even if a player operates the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with a predetermined operating force, or even if the player operates the operation surface with an operating force different from the predetermined force, the operation surface can be moved downward (in the direction of the pressing operation) in a predetermined movement operation pattern (for example, condition pattern JA61) or in a pattern similar or substantially the same as the movement operation pattern. As a result, even if there is variation in the operating force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 due to individual differences between players, each player can move the operation surface downward in a pattern that is the same or similar (substantially the same) as the predetermined movement operation pattern, so that it is possible to provide a playability in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 can be moved in the same or substantially the same pattern for all players.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the sub-control board 940 is configured to at least perform the following control: when the contact force of the player's hand (part of the body) contacting the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in the downward direction (predetermined direction) is a predetermined magnitude, or when the operation force on the operation surface in the downward direction is a predetermined magnitude, a predetermined reaction force is generated that moves the operation surface in a predetermined movement operation pattern (for example, condition pattern JA71, which is a combination of movement speed and movement amount) toward the upward direction (opposite to the predetermined direction); when the contact force is different from the predetermined magnitude, the operation surface moves in the movement operation pattern, or the operation of the operation surface approaches the movement operation pattern, or when the operation force is different from the predetermined magnitude, the operation surface moves in the movement operation pattern, or the operation of the operation surface approaches the movement operation pattern.

Therefore, even if the contact force or operation force applied by the player to the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is a predetermined magnitude or a magnitude different from the predetermined magnitude, the operation surface can be moved upward (opposite to the predetermined direction) in a predetermined movement operation pattern (for example, condition pattern JA71) or a pattern similar to or substantially the same as the movement operation pattern. As a result, even if the contact force or operation force applied to the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 varies due to individual differences between players, each player can move the operation surface upward in a pattern that is the same as or similar to (substantially the same as) the predetermined movement operation pattern, so that it is possible to provide a playability in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is moved in the same or substantially the same pattern for all players.

In addition, when the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to select and execute a specific variable display including an operable period during which the press operation device 1261 can be operated during the period of the variable display, and is configured to be able to produce a plurality of effects with different expectations (expectations of transition to a special game state) when the press operation device 1261 is operated during the operable period of the specific variable display, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to at least execute control to control the operation of the press operation device 1261 so that the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 can move downward (in a direction corresponding to a press operation) at a predetermined moving speed when a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in the specific variable display, and control to control the operation of the press operation device 1261 so that the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 can move downward at a speed different from the predetermined moving speed when a second effect with an expectation level different from that of the first effect is executed as an effect in the specific variable display.

According to this configuration, the moving speed of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, which moves downward (in the direction corresponding to the push operation), can be made different between when a first performance is executed and when a second performance is executed in a specific variable display, thereby providing a gameplay that allows the player to guess the expectation level of the performance executed in a specific variable display based on the moving speed of the operation surface.

In addition, when the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to select and execute a specific variable display including an operable period during which the press operation device 1261 can be operated during the period of the variable display, and is configured to be able to produce a plurality of effects with different expectations (expectations of transition to a special game state) when the press operation device 1261 is operated during the operable period of the specific variable display, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to at least execute control to control the operation of the press operation device 1261 so that the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 can move upward (in a direction corresponding to the opposite direction to the press operation) at a predetermined moving speed when a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in the specific variable display, and control to control the operation of the press operation device 1261 so that the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 can move upward at a speed different from the predetermined moving speed when a second effect with an expectation level different from that of the first effect is executed as an effect in the specific variable display.

With this configuration, the speed of movement of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, which moves in the upward direction (the direction opposite to the push operation) can be made different between when the first performance is executed and when the second performance is executed in a specific variable display, providing a gameplay that allows the player to guess the expectation of the performance executed in a specific variable display based on the speed of movement of the operation surface.

Next, an example of control of the sub-control board 940 described above, which combines control of the push operation device 1261 and control of the decorative pattern display device 479, will be described. Each control described below may be combined with one or more of the controls described in each of the above embodiments, and any part of the total control combining each control described below and the controls described in the above embodiments may be set in the pachinko machine 100, or all of the controls may be set in the pachinko machine 100.

First, the control of the sub-control board 940 may be configured to include control that varies the operating force (reaction force) of the pressing operation device 1261 according to multiple game states that are set.

Specifically, the operating force (reaction force) of the pressing operation device 1261 for the same display effect may be configured to be different between the normal game state and a game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state (for example, a time-saving game state or a special probability game state). For example, as shown in FIG. 33, the operating force required to display a "school of fish" may be controlled to be low in the normal game state, high in the time-saving game state, and even higher in the special probability game state.

In addition, the control of the sub-control board 940 may be configured to include control in which the pattern displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 and the height position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 operate in conjunction with each other.

For example, as shown in Fig. 7, when the decorative symbol display device 479 is composed of three rows of reels, during the variable display, the left and right symbols, except for the central symbol row, are in a reach state with the same symbol (reach symbol), and the central symbol row that finally stops may operate in association with the height position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261. In this case, in the reach state, the reach symbol may move up and down near the position where the left and right symbols are lined up, and the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 may move up and down in synchronization with this. In a situation where this reach symbol moves up and down near the position where the left and right symbols are lined up, when the player presses down on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, the reach symbol may be controlled to move downward in synchronization with (or in conjunction with) the press operation.

In addition, instead of or in addition to the pressing operation device 1261, an operation unit capable of transmitting a reaction force to the player may be configured to be operable in a rotational direction, and when the reach symbol moves up and down near the position where it is lined up with the left and right symbols, when the player rotates the operation unit, the reach symbol may be controlled to move up and down in sync with the rotation.

In addition, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to perform control including other conditions as conditions (operation amount difference conditions) for making the operating force (reaction force) of the pressing operation device 1261 different. Other operating force difference conditions may be the number of non-winning variable displays executed since the previous lottery (jackpot win) for the special pattern, or the amount of game value granted to the player when the lottery for the special pattern is won (for example, the number of rounds of the special game state set to multiple types).

As an operating force difference condition, the operating force may be varied depending on the type of pattern (for example, the numbers "1" to "9") that is set to multiple types and used in the variable display, or depending on whether the number is odd or even. As an operating force difference condition, the operating force may be varied depending on the type of character (for example, the numbers "1" to "9") that is set to multiple types and displayed with the variable display, or the character's possessions.

In addition, the control of the sub-control board 940 may be configured to include control for varying the operation force (reaction force) of the pressing operation device 1261 described above, or in addition to that control, for varying the operation of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (operation speed (operation speed), operation amount (operation amount), operation possibility (operation presence or absence), etc.). For example, when a performance in which a character imitating an adult male is displayed is executed in conjunction with a variable display, a large hand may be displayed on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 together with the reach pattern, making it possible to move the reach pattern, and when a performance in which a character imitating a girl is displayed on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 together with the reach pattern, the reaction force may be increased so that it is impossible to move the reach pattern.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be modified as described below. In this case, each of the configurations described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a combination of the configurations described below may be applied to the above embodiment.

(1) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 of the First Embodiment In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the configuration according to the first embodiment is applied to the pattern sheet 601, but the configuration according to the first embodiment may be applied to a resin product. For example, a resin product including a transparent resin plate, a layer containing a predetermined pattern or design corresponding to the decorative pattern 621, which is formed by coating or arranged on one side (back side) of the transparent resin plate, and a layer corresponding to the decorative part 622, which is formed by coating or arranged on the other side (front side) of the transparent resin plate on the periphery side of the predetermined pattern or design, may be configured to be the resin product to which the configuration according to the first embodiment is applied.

In the above first embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 is configured so that the decorative portion 622 does not overlap the peripheral edge of the decorative pattern 621 when viewed from the front, but the decorative portion 622 may also be configured so as to overlap the peripheral edge of the decorative pattern 621 when viewed from the front.

In the first embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 is configured to have the decorative portion 622 formed in almost all areas except the area on the front side of the base material 611 where the decorative pattern 621 is formed, but it is not necessary to form the decorative portion 622 in almost all of the area. For example, it may be configured to form a strip-shaped decorative portion 622 along the entire or part of the periphery of the decorative pattern 621.

In the first embodiment, the configuration was described in which the pattern sheet 601 has a decorative pattern 621 using a decorative portion 622, but the decoration by the decorative portion 622 is not limited to a pattern, and may be used to decorate other patterns such as characters used on the model or the display of the model name, and the decorative portion 622 may be formed not only from a thin sheet, but also from a resin part that has a thickness and can be molded by a mold. In addition, the decorative portion 622 may be formed using ink that becomes visible when the specified situation described in the second embodiment is met, and may be configured so that the peripheral side of the pattern is more likely to reflect light when the specified situation is met.

In the first embodiment described above, the pattern sheet 601 is configured so that only the decorative pattern 621 (main pattern 621A, secondary pattern 621B) is coated on the back side of the base material 611, but it may also be configured so that not only the decorative pattern 621 but also the background portion of the decorative pattern 621 is coated on the back side of the base material 611.

(2) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment In the above-described second embodiment, a pattern (e.g., pattern 701, etc.) that becomes visible when exposed to a specified light such as a flash light, and a pattern (e.g., pattern 721A, etc.) that becomes visible when heated or warmed, are provided on the pattern sheet 601, but a configuration in which either one of the patterns is provided on the pattern sheet 601 may also be used.

The pattern sheet 601 may be provided with either a pattern that is visible when exposed to a specific light such as a flash light, or a pattern that is visible when heated or warmed, and a pattern that is visible when exposed to a black light, as exemplified in the third embodiment. The pattern sheet 601 may be provided with a pattern that is visible when exposed to a specific light such as a flash light, a pattern that is visible when heated or warmed, and a pattern that is visible when exposed to a black light.

In the second embodiment described above, the pattern sheet 601 is provided with a pattern that becomes visible (i.e., changes from an invisible state to a visible state) when exposed to a specific light such as a flash light or when heated or warmed. However, the pattern may be configured so that a pattern in a state corresponding to the state (e.g., color or reflectivity) becomes visible when exposed to a specific light such as a flash light or when heated or warmed. For example, a pattern may be formed using ink that changes from a first color (e.g., blue) to a second color (e.g., red) when heated or warmed, and the pattern in a state corresponding to the state (i.e., the second color) becomes visible when heated or warmed.

In the second embodiment described above, a pattern (e.g., pattern 701, etc.) that is visible when a specific light such as a flash light is applied, or a pattern (e.g., pattern 721A, etc.) that is visible when heated or warmed is formed on the front side of the substrate 611, but these patterns may be formed on the back side of the substrate 611. When these patterns are formed on the back side of the substrate 611, the pattern may be formed on the back side of the substrate 611, and then the decorative pattern 621 may be formed on top of it.

In the second embodiment, the configuration according to the second embodiment is applied to the pattern sheet 601 in which the decorative portion 622 is not formed on the surface side of the substrate 611, but the configuration according to the second embodiment may be applied to the pattern sheet 601 in which the decorative portion 622 is formed on the surface side of the substrate 611. When the configuration according to the second embodiment is applied to the pattern sheet 601 in which the decorative portion 622 is formed on the surface side of the substrate 611, the decorative portion 622 may be formed on the surface side of the substrate 611, and then a pattern (e.g., pattern 701, etc.) that is visible when a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied thereto, or a pattern (e.g., pattern 721A, etc.) that is visible when heated or warmed may be formed thereon.

In the above second embodiment, a case has been described in which a pattern (e.g., pattern 701, etc.) that becomes visible when a predetermined situation is met is applied to pattern sheet 601, but it may also be applied to other parts, such as decorative parts such as central structure 420 attached to game board 400, or other parts constituting the front part of pachinko machine 100, such as at least a part of opening periphery 211 of front decorative body 210 in front block 102. In other words, a pattern that becomes visible when a predetermined situation is met may be added as a behavior-changing part that makes the behavior of a predetermined surface part visible in a different manner depending on the situation. Also, it is not necessary to configure the design sheet 601 to have a pattern (such as, for example, pattern 701) that becomes visible when a certain situation occurs directly attached to it. Instead, a pattern (such as, for example, pattern 701) that becomes visible when a certain situation occurs may be attached to a separate member that overlaps the front side of the design sheet 601. For example, a cylindrical rotating body that is slightly larger than the reels that make up the design sheet 601 may be molded from transparent resin and placed on the outside of each reel, and the pattern 701 or the like may be added to the rotating body. A mechanism may be provided to rotate the rotating body using the sub-control board 940, making it possible to change the position of the pattern 701 or the like relative to the patterns displayed on the design sheet 601.

(3) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 of the Third Embodiment In the above-mentioned third embodiment, among the main patterns 621A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the left pattern row Z1, a pattern 741A is provided around the main pattern 621A including numerical information corresponding to the number "7", among the main patterns 621A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern row Z2, a pattern 741B is provided around the main pattern 621A including numerical information corresponding to the number "9", among the main patterns 621A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern row Z2, a pattern 741C is provided around the main pattern 621A including numerical information corresponding to the number "8", among the main patterns 621A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the middle pattern row Z3, thereby making it possible to suggest the currently set game mode by a combination of specific main patterns 621A.

Alternatively, a pattern similar to pattern 741A may be provided around a specific sub-pattern 621B provided on each pattern sheet 601 corresponding to each pattern row Z1, Z2, Z3, thereby making it possible to suggest the currently set game mode based on the combination of sub-patterns 621B corresponding to that pattern.

In the third embodiment described above, a combination of specific main patterns 621A is used to suggest the currently set game mode. Alternatively, or in addition, a configuration may be adopted in which predetermined letters, patterns, etc. are formed on the pattern sheet 601 as patterns that become visible when heated or warmed, and the letters, patterns, etc. corresponding to the set game mode are displayed visibly by heating or warming, thereby suggesting the currently set game mode.

In the third embodiment, the currently set game mode is suggested by using a pattern that is visible under a heated or warmed condition, but instead of this, the currently set game mode may be suggested by using a pattern that is visible under a condition where a specific light such as a flash light is applied, or a pattern that is visible under a condition where a black light is applied. Alternatively, the currently set game mode may be suggested by using two or three patterns among the patterns that are visible under a heated or warmed condition, the patterns that are visible under a condition where a specific light such as a flash light is applied, or the patterns that are visible under a condition where a black light is applied.

(4) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment In the above fourth embodiment, the peripheral decorative portion 788 is configured to be provided around the entire peripheral side (outer side) of the decorative lens portion 786, but as long as the peripheral decorative portion 788 is configured to be provided on one side of the decorative lens portion 786, it is not necessarily necessary for the peripheral decorative portion 788 to be provided around the entire peripheral side of the decorative lens portion 786, and it may be configured to be provided, for example, in a partial section (e.g., the lower half) of the peripheral side of the decorative lens portion 786.

In the fourth embodiment described above, a protrusion 787 is provided between the exposed portion of the top surface 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front. However, the protrusion 787 may not be provided, and the top surface 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral decorative portion 788 may be adjacent to each other when viewed from the front.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 are adjacent to each other, but the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 may be adjacent to each other, that is, there may be an area between the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 where neither the direct light from the light emitter 782 nor the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B passes through.

In the fourth embodiment described above, a portion of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 does not enter the peripheral decorative portion 788, but travels outward from the peripheral decorative portion 788 (i.e., outward from the reflected light transmission area X2) as light that is directly visible to the player. However, the reflective component 790 may be provided so that the specific reflected light does not travel outward from the peripheral decorative portion 788 (i.e., does not travel as light that is directly visible to the player).

In the fourth embodiment described above, the reflective component 790 is arranged so that a portion of it does not overlap the peripheral decorative portion 788 in a front view (i.e., arranged so that a non-overlapping region X3 exists), but the reflective component 790 may be arranged so that the entire reflective component 790 overlaps the peripheral decorative portion 788 in a front view (i.e., arranged so that a non-overlapping region X3 does not exist). Alternatively, the reflective film portion 790B may be arranged so that the entire reflective film portion 790B overlaps the peripheral decorative portion 788 in a front view.

In the fourth embodiment, both the light passing through the direct light transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 are light (direct light or specific reflected light) corresponding to the light output from the light emitter 782, but the light passing through the reflected light transmission region X2 may be light corresponding to light output from a light source different from the light passing through the direct light transmission region X1 (for example, a light source such as a full-color LED similar to the light emitter 782). For example, a light emitting means different from the light emitter 782 may be provided at a position above the reflective film portion 790B where the output light can be reflected by the reflective film portion 790B and the reflected light can pass through at least the reflected light transmission region X2.

In the above fourth embodiment, after being output from the light-emitting body 782, the light is reflected off the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788, and then reflected off the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective part 790 and passes through the reflected light transmission region X2. However, a reflective portion may be provided that can reflect light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective part 790 and passing outward from the peripheral decorative portion 788 without entering the peripheral decorative portion 788, toward the reflective film portion 790B, and the light reflected by the reflective portion is reflected off the reflective film portion 790B and enters and passes through the reflected light transmission region X2.

(5) Modified Example of the Pachinko Machine 100 of the Fifth Embodiment In the above-mentioned fifth embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which, when a predetermined reach display (specifically, a reach display consisting of an odd number) is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621, a first suggestive effect in which a character that can suggest the expectation of a transition to a special game state appears is executable (selectable) with a predetermined probability, while, when a reach display that cannot appear by the predetermined reach display (specifically, a reach display consisting of an even number) is displayed, a second suggestive effect in which an image equivalent to (corresponding to) an excised image including a part of the character excised from the video data of the first suggestive effect appears is executable (selectable) with a predetermined probability.

In place of or in addition to this configuration, the suggestive effect that can be executed when a predetermined reach display (for example, a reach display consisting of an odd number) is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621 may be a suggestive effect in which an image including a part of a character that can suggest the expectation of a transition to a special game state appears, and the effect develops to finally show the entire image of the character, or a suggestive effect in which the entire image of the character appears without the appearance of an image including a part of the character, selected according to a selection probability that is preset for each suggestive effect.

Even in this modified example, video data corresponding to a suggestive performance in which the entire image of the character appears without the appearance of an image including a part of the character can be reused to generate an image that can be used as an image suggesting the character to be developed into in the suggestive performance (i.e., an image including a part of the character), thereby reducing the cost of developing images that suggest the character to be developed into and increasing the variety of suggestive performances.

Also, instead of or in addition to the above configuration, when the right to play a unit game related to a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is reserved, a configuration may be adopted in which an image including a part of a character that can appear in the variable display that is the subject of the pre-reading and can suggest the expectation level for the occurrence of a specific game state is displayed in a performance that predicts and announces a specific game state (e.g., a special game state) that will occur after one or more variable displays are executed based on the result of a lottery for the special symbol for the reservation (hereinafter, the performance is also referred to as a "pre-reading performance"). Even in such a modified example, the video data corresponding to the performance in which a character that can suggest the expectation level for the occurrence of a specific game state appears (suggestion performance) can be reused to generate an image used in the pre-reading performance (i.e., an image including a part of the character), so that the cost of developing images for the pre-reading performance can be reduced while the variety of performances can be increased.

In the fifth embodiment, an image generated based on an image cut out from video data of the first suggestive effect executed while the special symbol is changing is configured to appear in the second suggestive effect, but the image to be displayed in the second suggestive effect does not necessarily have to be generated based on video data of an effect executed while the special symbol is changing, such as the first suggestive effect. For example, an image to be displayed in an effect such as the second suggestive effect may be generated based on an image cut out from video data of an effect or video displayed other than the special symbol changing display, such as a jackpot effect displayed during a special game state, or a video on a so-called demo screen displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed without the player playing the pachinko machine 100.

In addition, images generated based on an image cut out from the video data of the first suggestion effect, or images generated based on an image cut out from the video data of an effect or video displayed other than the display of the changing special pattern, such as a jackpot effect, do not necessarily need to be displayed in an effect executed during the display of the changing special pattern, such as the second suggestion effect, and may be configured to be displayed, for example, on a demo screen or in an effect displayed other than the display of the changing special pattern, such as a jackpot effect.

In the fifth embodiment described above, the second suggestion performance is configured to display images corresponding to multiple cut-out images (e.g., images cut out of each of the areas AR1, AR2, and AR3) cut out from an image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion performance, but the number of images cut out from an image of a frame in the video data of the first suggestion performance does not necessarily have to be multiple and may be one.

In the fifth embodiment described above, the second suggestion performance is configured to have an image (e.g., images 821, 822, 823) that corresponds to an image cut out from an image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion performance appear, but the cut-out image used in the second suggestion performance does not necessarily have to be an image cut out from an image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion performance, and may be an image cut out from each image of multiple frames in the video data. In such a case, the second suggestion performance may be configured to have images that correspond to images cut out from images of different frames appear simultaneously.

In the fifth embodiment described above, the second suggestion performance is configured to display an image (e.g., images 821, 822, 823) that is generated from the video data of the first suggestion performance and includes a part of a character that can appear in the first suggestion performance. However, it may also be configured to prepare background data that is common to the second suggestion performance regardless of the type of character, and display an image that includes a part of a character in the background data.

In the fifth embodiment described above, an image generated based on an image cut out from the video data of the first suggestion performance is displayed in the second suggestion performance, but an image corresponding to the cut out image may be prepared in advance and stored in the sub-control board 940. Even in such a modified example, it is easier to reduce the need to develop video data to be used in the second suggestion performance, thereby reducing development costs.

In the fifth embodiment described above, the second suggestion performance is configured to have an image (e.g., images 821, 822, 823) that corresponds to an image cut out from an image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion performance appear, but the cut-out image used in the second suggestion performance does not necessarily have to be an image cut out from an image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion performance, and may be an image cut out from each image of multiple frames in the video data. In such a case, the second suggestion performance may be configured to have images that correspond to images cut out from images of different frames appear simultaneously.

In the fifth embodiment, the second suggestion performance is configured so that all of the images (e.g., images 821, 822, 823) corresponding to images cut out from an image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion performance are displayed simultaneously, but it is not necessary to display all images corresponding to the cut-out images simultaneously. For example, it may be configured so that images corresponding to multiple cut-out images are displayed one by one in sequence, or such that these images are divided into multiple groups and each group is displayed in sequence in a switched manner.

In the above fifth embodiment, a cut-out image is generated from an image of a frame constituting the video data of the first suggestion performance, but a cut-out image may also be generated from still image data used in the first suggestion performance.

In the fifth embodiment described above, each area to be cut out in the frame image constituting the video data of the first suggestion performance is configured to be set to the same position and size regardless of the type of character (e.g., characters CA1, CA2, CA3), but the position and size of the area to be cut out in the frame image may be different for each type of character.

In the above fifth embodiment, an example was given of an image that appears in the second suggestive performance (an image including a part of a character that suggests the expectation of a transition to a special game state) that is an image that has been cut out from an image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestive performance and that has been processed by deformation, enlargement, reduction, or other means (e.g., images 821, 822, 823). The image that appears in the second suggestive performance does not necessarily have to be a processed cut-out image, and may be an unprocessed cut-out image (i.e., an image cut out from an image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestive performance). Furthermore, the image that appears in the second suggestive performance may be a mixture of unprocessed cut-out images and processed cut-out images.

In the fifth embodiment, the image transformation and enlargement/reduction are exemplified as processing applied to the cut-out image, but the cut-out image may be processed to impart a predetermined effect such as blurring or mosaic. When a cut-out image to which a predetermined effect has been imparted is displayed in the second suggestion performance, the effect may be configured to fade over time (i.e., return to the original cut-out image).

In the fifth embodiment described above, when multiple processed cut-out images (images equivalent to cut-out images) are simultaneously constructed in the second suggestion performance, one processed cut-out image partially overlaps another processed cut-out image (for example, a part of image 822 overlaps a part of image 821), but a configuration in which multiple other processed cut-out images overlap one processed cut-out image is also possible. Also, a configuration in which at least one of the multiple processed cut-out images becomes completely invisible due to overlap with the other images is also possible.

In the above fifth embodiment, an example was given of a case in which the character appearing in the first suggestion performance suggests the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state, but what the character suggests does not necessarily have to be the degree of expectation for a transition to a special game state, but may also be the degree of expectation for a transition to another game state (such as a special game state).

In the fifth embodiment described above, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, which is an image display device capable of displaying the decorative pattern 1621, which is an image, in a variable manner. However, in a configuration in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by the reel device, a separate image display device may be provided, and the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be displayed on the image display device.

(6) Modifications of the Pachinko Machine 100 of the Sixth Embodiment In the sixth embodiment, the push operation device 1261 capable of being pushed downward is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the sixth embodiment, but the configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to a push operation device capable of being pushed in a direction other than the downward direction. For example, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to a push operation device capable of being pushed upward or in a substantially horizontal direction such as to the right, and the position of the operation unit in the substantially horizontal direction may be controlled, or a reaction force against a movement operation on the operation unit may be controlled.

In the sixth embodiment described above, a pressing operation device 1261 including a button operation unit 850 in which an operated unit 852 is supported on a base 851 via a spring member 853, and an actuation mechanism 860 that enables the button operation unit 850 to move in the vertical direction, is given as an example of a configuration according to the sixth embodiment. However, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to an input operation device that is capable of an input operation other than a pressing operation, and is not limited to an input operation device that is capable of a pressing operation such as the pressing operation device 1261.

For example, the characteristic configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to an input operation device such as a joystick equipped with an operating lever (rod-shaped body) that can be pushed or pulled relative to a predetermined fulcrum, or an input operation device such as a dial device that can rotate around an axis approximately at its center. In other words, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to an input operation device that can be restored to its initial position by the restoring force of an elastic body when moved from an initial position in a predetermined direction (for example, the operating direction of a lever centered on a fulcrum, or the circumferential direction around an axis). The configuration according to the sixth embodiment may also be applied to an operation device equipped with an operation unit that can be moved in multiple directions (for example, downward and rotated around the moving direction).

In the sixth embodiment, a coil spring is exemplified as the spring member 853, but it does not necessarily have to be a coil spring and may be a leaf spring or the like. Also, an elastic body other than a spring member (e.g., rubber) may be interposed between the base body 851 and the operated part 852 to support the operated part 852 relative to the base body 851.

In the sixth embodiment, the operated part 852 of the pressing operation device 1261 is a component of the button operation part 850 that can be moved up and down by the operating mechanism 860, and the button operation part 850 is configured to be movable (vibrate) up and down relative to the base 851 by the spring member 853, but an operated part similar to the operated part 852 may be provided on the upper end side of the rack 861 of the operating mechanism 860. In other words, the stroke amount of the pressing operation device 1261 may be configured to be the same as the stroke amount S2 by the operating mechanism 860. Even in such a configuration, the stroke amount by the pressing operation can be configured to be variable, similar to the pressing operation device 1261 in which the operated part 852 includes the button operation part 850 as exemplified in the sixth embodiment.

In the sixth embodiment, the operated part 852 of the pressing operation device 1261 is movable relative to the base 851 via the spring member 853. However, the spring member 853 may be omitted, and the position and reaction force may be controlled by the operating mechanism 860 while the operated part 852 and the base 851 are integrated.

In the sixth embodiment, the operated part 852 of the pressing operation device 1261 is configured to be operated via the operation cover member 870, but the operated part 852 and the operation cover member 870 may be integrated together so that the player can directly operate the operated part 852.

In the sixth embodiment, the button operation unit 850 is moved in the vertical direction by the actuation mechanism 860 to generate a reaction force, but another mechanism may be used to move the button operation unit 850 and generate a reaction force. For example, a cylindrical part having a central axis along the direction of movement may be provided on the base of the button operation unit 850, a spiral groove may be formed around the cylindrical part, and an engagement part that fits into the groove and can be rotated at a certain height may be provided rotatably by the motor 863, and the cylindrical part may be moved up and down by the rotation of the engagement part, thereby moving the button operation unit 850 in the vertical direction and generating a reaction force.

In the sixth embodiment, the height of the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 (neutral position of the button operation unit 850) is configured to change depending on the number of reserved unit games related to the special pattern, but the condition for the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 to change does not necessarily have to be when the number of reserved unit games related to the special pattern has changed. For example, the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 may be configured to change when the number of operations of the push operation device 1261 (operated unit 852) operated during a specified performance (for example, a performance executed in the variable display of decorative patterns) reaches a specified number. In other words, the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 may be configured to change depending on the number of operations of the push operation device 1261 operated during a specified performance.

In the sixth embodiment, a detection sensor 854 capable of detecting that the operated portion 852 has reached the maximum pressing position, and a detection sensor 890 capable of detecting that the button operation portion 850 has reached a position that is the lower end of the range of movement of the actuation mechanism 860 are provided, and the sub-control board 840 is configured to determine whether or not the pressing operation device 1261 has been operated based on the detection signals from the detection sensors 854 and 890.

Alternatively, a detection sensor may be provided that can detect the lowest position that can be reached by the bottom end of the operation cover member 870, which moves constantly with the operated part 852 (i.e., the position of the bottom end of the operation cover member 870 that can be reached when the button operation part 850 is located at the bottom end of the range of movement by the actuation mechanism 860 and the operated part 852 is located at the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853), and the presence or absence of an operation on the pressing operation device 1261 may be determined based on a detection signal from the detection sensor.

In the sixth embodiment, a pressing operation device 1261 including a button operation unit 850 in which an operated unit 852 is supported on a base 851 via a spring member 853, and an operating mechanism 860 that enables the button operation unit 850 to move in the vertical direction is given as an example of a configuration according to the sixth embodiment, but the configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to a role device that does not have an operating function. For example, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to a role device that includes a role component in which a role is supported on a base via a spring member, and an operating mechanism that enables the role component to move in the vertical direction.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the reserved number display unit 870A is provided on the surface of the operation cover member 870 is illustrated, but instead of or in addition to this, an object that switches whether to be displayed or not depending on the winning or losing of the symbol lottery or the expectation of transition to a special game state may be displayed. For example, the letter "V" may be printed under the number "8" on the reserved number display unit 870A, and when the button operation unit 850 is pressed in a state raised according to the reserved number, if there is a winning unit game, the operation cover member 870 may rise for a certain period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) to a position where the letter "V" is visible to the player, and then return to its original position, and if there is no winning unit game, it may return to its original position without the letter "V" being visible.

Also, the height position of the button operation unit 850 does not necessarily need to change depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, the button operation unit 850 may be located at a height position where the number "8" is visible to the player regardless of the number of reserved balls, and when the player performs a push operation in a situation where the right to play a unit game is reserved and there is a variable display waiting to be executed, the reaction force is increased at a height position according to the number of variable displays until the number of variable displays until the number of variable displays that will result in a win or a high expectation variable display will be displayed based on the results of the win/loss lottery (for example, a height position one scale lower for the next variable display), and the height position at which the reaction force is generated may be configured to suggest to the player the time when the variable display that will result in a win/loss or a high expectation will be displayed, or the reaction force may be configured to have multiple types of magnitude so as to suggest the level of expectation to the player.

In addition, the height position of the button operation unit 850 does not necessarily need to change depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, during a changing display, the button operation unit 850 may rise to one of several heights (neutral positions) set according to the winning or high expectancy level based on the result of the winning or losing lottery during the changing display, or the result of the winning or losing lottery for a reserved ball awaiting execution of the changing display, suggesting to the player that the greater the reaction force when pressed, the more likely an effect with a high expectancy will be executed in the changing display.

(7) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 of the Seventh Embodiment In the seventh embodiment, the push operation device 1261 is configured such that, in the neutral position, the operation surface 870B is positioned approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 in the vertical direction (movement direction of the push operation device 1261), but the push operation device 1261 may be configured such that, in the neutral position, the operation surface 870B is positioned in a position recessed in the vertical direction relative to the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893. Even in the configuration of such a modification, as in the configuration exemplified in the seventh embodiment, a player who performs a push operation on the operation surface 870B of the push operation device 1261 can perform a push operation of slowly pushing the operation surface 870B against the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the operating mechanism 860, rather than a forceful push operation such as hitting the operation surface 870B.

In the seventh embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 that performs a pressing operation in a downward direction on the operation surface 870B is illustrated as an example of a configuration according to the seventh embodiment, but the characteristic configuration according to the seventh embodiment may be applied to a pressing operation device similar to the pressing operation device 1261 that performs a pressing operation in a direction other than downward on the operation surface (for example, forward, left, or right).

In other words, for example, in a pressing operation device in which a pressing operation is performed in a forward direction on an operation surface, the operation surface may be configured to be at a position that is approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening that houses the pressing operation device in the front-to-rear direction, which is the direction of movement of the pressing operation device. Also, in such a pressing operation device, the operation surface may be configured to be recessed in the front-to-rear direction with respect to the opening surface of the opening that houses the pressing operation device.

In the seventh embodiment described above, the pressing operation device 1261 in which the neutral position is a position where the operation surface 870B is approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction is given as an example of a configuration according to the seventh embodiment, but the characteristic configuration according to the seventh embodiment may be applied to the pressing operation device 1261 that can take multiple types of neutral positions including at least a position where the operation surface 870B is approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction as the neutral position, or a position where the operation surface 870B is recessed in the vertical direction relative to the opening surface of the opening R.

In the seventh embodiment described above, FIG. 24 (FIGS. 24(A) and 24(B)) shows an example of a hand rest 895 capable of supporting (placing) a portion of the wrist side of the player's hand (a portion of the hand excluding a portion of the finger side) and a portion of the wrist side of the forearm. However, the hand rest 895 does not necessarily need to be configured to be capable of supporting both a portion of the wrist side of the player's hand and a portion of the wrist side of the forearm, as long as the hand rest is configured to support at least a portion of the hand and the forearm connected to the hand so that the player can operate the operated unit 852 with the hand.

Therefore, for example, the hand rest 895 may be configured so that only a portion of the wrist side of the player's hand supports the operated part so that the fingers of the hand can operate it, or so that only a portion or all of the player's forearm supports the operated part so that the fingers of the hand corresponding to the forearm can operate it.

In the seventh embodiment, the hand rest 895 is configured in the form of a table with a generally flat upper surface capable of supporting a portion of the wrist side of the player's hand and a portion of the wrist side of the player's forearm from below, but the form of the hand rest 895 does not necessarily have to be a table with a generally flat upper surface in the horizontal direction, and may be, for example, a raised shape that matches the shape of the hand or forearm. Also, for example, it may be in the form of a roughly U-shaped cuff that can support the forearm from below, or may be a shape in which the forearm is suspended from above.

In the seventh embodiment, the upper surface of the hand rest 895 is positioned at approximately the same vertical position as the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893, which is the movement direction of the pressing operation device 1261 (the movement direction of the operated part 852). However, the upper surface of the hand rest 895 may be positioned above the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893, or the upper surface of the hand rest 895 and the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 may be configured to have a vertical step.

In the seventh embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 capable of being pressed downward is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the seventh embodiment, but the characteristic configuration according to the seventh embodiment may be applied to an input operation device such as a joystick equipped with an operating lever (rod-shaped body) that can be pushed or pulled relative to a predetermined fulcrum, or an input operation device such as a dial device that can rotate around an axis approximately at its center.

In other words, for example, for an input operation device such as a joystick or a dial device, a support such as a hand rest 895 that supports at least a portion of the player's hand, excluding a portion of the fingers that operate the operated portion of the input operation device, and the forearm portion connected to the hand, so that the player can operate the operated portion with the hand, may be provided closer to the player than the input operation device.

(8) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 of the Eighth Embodiment In the above eighth embodiment, the customer waiting performance displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the non-play state waiting for the player to play is configured by a video or image that uses video data (image data) prepared in advance for various performances displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display, but it is not necessary that all of the customer waiting performances are configured by videos or images that use video data prepared in advance for various performances, and at least a part of the customer waiting performance may be configured by videos or images that use the video data. For example, a video or image dedicated to the customer waiting performance may be prepared, and the customer waiting performance may be configured by a video or image dedicated to the customer waiting performance and a video or image that uses video data prepared in advance for various performances.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the customer waiting performance was composed of videos and images extracted from the suggestive performance, but the videos and images that compose the customer waiting performance do not necessarily have to be videos and images extracted from the suggestive performance. For example, a configuration in which videos and images extracted from a performance (changing performance) other than the suggestive performance displayed during the changing display are used as part of the customer waiting performance may be used.

In the eighth embodiment, when a push operation is performed on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during a non-play state, a variable display (variable performance) selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started during a game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, the trigger for displaying the variable display during a non-play state does not necessarily have to be an operation on the push operation device (specifically, a push operation), and an operation other than a push operation on an input operation device other than the push operation device may be the trigger for displaying the variable display. For example, when a predetermined rotation operation (for example, a clockwise rotation operation or a rotation operation at a rotation speed of 200 rpm or more) is performed on a rotation operation device capable of rotation operation such as the rotation operation device 262 (see FIG. 1) during a non-play state, a variable display selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol is started during a game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

In the eighth embodiment described above, when a push operation is performed on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 during a non-play state, a variable display (variable presentation) selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol is started during play is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, the selection conditions for the variable display do not necessarily have to be the same as when a special symbol is started, and the decorative symbol display device 479 may be configured to display a variable display selected under approximately the same selection conditions as when a special symbol is started when a push operation is performed on a push operation device during a non-play state.

For example, the probability of selecting a demo pseudo jackpot by the demo pseudo winning random number counter equipped in the sub-control board 940 does not necessarily have to be the same as the probability of winning a jackpot by the winning random number counter for the special symbol equipped in the main control board 920. For example, the probability of selecting a demo pseudo jackpot by the demo pseudo winning random number counter may be higher than the probability of winning a jackpot by the winning random number counter for the special symbol. With this configuration, the variable display (variable performance) that is displayed only when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery can be made to appear more easily during a non-play state (more specifically, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-play state) than during play. This makes it possible to make the variable performance that is difficult to appear during play due to the probability of winning a jackpot appear during a non-play state, making it easier to appeal to players about the pachinko machine 100. Also, the probability of winning a jackpot for the variable display executed during a non-play state may be set to 100%, and only the variable display (variable presentation) executed when a jackpot occurs may be executed during a non-play state, in which case the demo pseudo-win random number counter may be omitted.

Alternatively, the various selection probabilities in the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, or the first demo pseudo fluctuation type counter to the fourth demo pseudo fluctuation type counter provided on the sub-control board 940 may be configured to be different from the various selection probabilities in the jackpot symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter, or the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter provided on the main control board 920.

In the eighth embodiment described above, when a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 is pressed during a non-play state, a variable display (variable performance) selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol is started during play is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, when a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 is pressed during a non-play state, a variable display to be displayed during a non-play state may be selected from among the variable displays that can be selected when a special symbol is started during play, under selection conditions that are different from the selection conditions when a special symbol is started during play (for example, the probability of selecting a demo pseudo jackpot using a demo pseudo winning random number counter).

In the eighth embodiment described above, when a push operation is performed on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 during a non-play state, a variable display (variable performance) selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol is started during play is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, regardless of whether the game is in a non-play state or a game, a period may be set during which a predetermined operation (e.g., a push operation) can be input to a predetermined input operation device such as a push operation device to display the variable display, and when a predetermined operation is performed (input) on the push operation device or input operation device during that period (a state in which a predetermined operation can be input to the input operation device), a variable display selected under the same or approximately the same selection conditions as when a special symbol is started during play is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

(9) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment In the above ninth embodiment, in a variable display based on a push operation on the push operation device during a non-play state (i.e., a pseudo variable display for demonstration purposes), four suggestive effects, the expectation level for a transition to a special game state differing depending on the display content, are simultaneously displayed in the divided display areas 479D to 479G of the decorative pattern display device 479. However, instead of or in addition to this, two or more display images (e.g., four display images each including a different type of suggestive display 1623) each including one of a plurality of types of suggestive displays 1623, the expectation level for a transition to a special game state differing depending on the difference in the content of the comment, may be simultaneously displayed in each of the display areas (e.g., display areas 479D to 479G) obtained by dividing the decorative pattern display device 479 into a plurality of parts.

In addition, in a variable display based on a push operation on the push operation device during a non-play state (i.e., a pseudo variable display for a demo), in a configuration in which two or more display images each including different types of suggestion displays 1623 are simultaneously displayed in each of the multiple display areas into which the decorative pattern display device 479 is divided, the variable display may be configured to be displayed faster during the period from the start of the variable display based on a push operation on the push operation device during a non-play state to the appearance of the display image including the suggestion display 1623 than the corresponding period in a variable display based on the initial winning of a special pattern.

As a result, in the same way as in the case where the time from the start of the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during a non-play state to the appearance of the suggestive performance after the reach display is made shorter than the corresponding time in the variable display based on the initial winning of a special pattern, the time from the start to the end of the simulated variable display for the demo can be made shorter than the variable time corresponding to the variable display's variable pattern.

In the ninth embodiment, display images including multiple types of suggestive effects that have different expectations for transitioning to a special game state depending on the display content, and display images including multiple types of hold displays 1622 that have different expectations for transitioning to a special game state depending on their shapes, were simultaneously displayed in multiple divided display areas (e.g., display areas 479D to 479G) of the decorative pattern display device 479.

In contrast, when a press operation is performed on a press operation device during a non-play state, it is not necessary to simultaneously display a display image including multiple types of suggestive effects or multiple types of hold displays 1622, and the display images may be configured to switch sequentially each time a specific operation is performed on an input operation device (e.g., selection operation device 263) other than a press operation device such as press operation device 261 during the period in which these display images are displayed.

In the ninth embodiment, the display images including multiple types of suggestive effects and multiple types of hold displays 1622 are simultaneously displayed in multiple divided display areas (for example, display areas 479D to 479G) in the decorative pattern display device 479, so these display images are displayed in a reduced size compared to when the image (frame image) constituting the variable display, such as a variable display based on the initial winning of a special pattern, is displayed across the entire display area of the decorative pattern display device 479.

Alternatively, the display images including the suggestive effects and the hold display 1622 may be displayed one by one in a reduced size compared to when the images constituting the variable display are displayed across the entire display area of the decorative pattern display device 479, such as a variable display based on the initial winning of a special pattern.

In addition, when there are a plurality of types of substitute displays 1625, display images each including a different type of substitute display 1625 may be simultaneously displayed in each of the display areas obtained by dividing the decorative pattern display device 479. Even in such a configuration, the display images each including the substitute displays 1625 can be displayed in a reduced size compared to when they are displayed after the end of the variable display based on the start winning of the special pattern.

(10) The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which, once a jackpot is hit, the expected jackpot value is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times). It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a special game state is entered if the ball enters a specified area after a jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as an enclosed type pachinko machine in which the ball circulates. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arranged ball type pachinko and mahjong ball. It is not limited to pachinko machines, and may be applied to slot machines, or gaming machines such as Parrot, which is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating problems and effects, etc., as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc. In addition, the meanings and examples of terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
A light-transmitting member (substrate 611) having a surface and a back surface that is a surface opposite to the surface;
A pattern portion provided on the back side of the translucent member and including a pattern (decorative pattern 621) visible through the translucent member from the front side;
A decorative portion (decorative portion 622) is provided on the peripheral side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back side of the translucent member on the front side of the translucent member,
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative portion is colored in a color that is more reflective than at least a portion of the color of the picture.

<Feature 11>
A light-transmitting member (substrate 611) having a surface and a back surface that is a surface opposite to the surface;
A pattern portion provided on the back side of the translucent member and including a pattern (decorative pattern 621) visible through the translucent member from the front side;
A decorative portion (decorative portion 622) is provided on the peripheral side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back side of the light-transmitting member on the front side of the light-transmitting member,
The decorative portion protrudes toward the surface side beyond the portion where the pattern portion is provided on the surface side, and is colored in a color that is more easily reflective than at least some of the colors used to color the pattern.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in Feature 10 or Feature 11 can provide a gaming machine that can favorably increase the attention to the gaming machine. That is, a pattern portion including a pattern is provided on the back side of a light-transmitting member. The pattern of the pattern portion is visible through the light-transmitting member from the front side of the light-transmitting member. Meanwhile, a decorative portion is provided on the peripheral side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back side of the light-transmitting member on the front side of the light-transmitting member. Thus, while the pattern portion is provided on the back side of the light-transmitting member, the decorative portion is provided on the front side of the light-transmitting member, so that the decorative portion can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the pattern portion, thereby improving the decorative feel provided by the decorative portion.

In particular, the decorative portion that is provided three-dimensionally with respect to the pattern portion is colored in a color that is more reflective than at least some of the colors that color the pattern of the pattern portion, which adds brilliance and brilliance to the decorative portion, thereby more appropriately improving the decorative feel provided by the decorative portion.

By improving the decorative feel of the decorative part, it is possible to increase the attention to the pattern (the pattern of the pattern part) provided on the peripheral side of the decorative part, thereby increasing the attention to the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine described in Feature 11, the "color of at least a part of the pattern" may be, for example, the color that is most reflective of light (for example, the color with the highest brightness) among the main colors that color each pattern (for example, the color that colors the largest area of each pattern), or the color that is most reflective of light among the colors that color all of the patterns. In addition, in the gaming machine described in Feature 11, the "color that is configured to be easily reflective of light" may be, for example, a color that is determined by the presence or absence of brilliance, or a color that is determined by the brightness of the color.

<Feature 12>
12. A gaming machine according to feature 10 or 11,
The reel has a cylindrical reel portion (reel body) that can rotate in a circumferential direction,
The pattern portion includes a pattern (decorative pattern 621) as the pattern, and is formed by forming a coating film on the back surface side of the translucent member,
The decorative portion is formed by forming a coating film on the front surface side of the light-transmitting member,
The light-transmitting member is attached to the outer circumferential surface of the reel section with the back side on which the picture portion is formed facing the outer circumferential surface.

In the gaming machine described in feature 12, the light-transmitting member is attached to the outer circumferential surface of the reel unit with the back side on which the picture portion is formed facing the outer circumferential surface, so that the patterns contained in the picture portion can be displayed in a variable manner or in a stationary manner (determined display) by rotating the reel unit. A decorative portion is formed on the front side of the light-transmitting member, so that the attention to the variable display of the patterns or the stationary display (determined display) can be increased.

<Feature 20>
A state-changing portion is provided for making the state of a predetermined surface portion visible in a state that is changed depending on a situation,
The appearance-changing section changes the color or the display object, or the combination of the color and the display object, depending on the presence or absence of light (flash) or the color of light (black light) irradiated from the surface side onto the surface portion, making it visible to the player according to the situation.

<Feature 21>
A picture portion is provided in a game area through which game balls can flow,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the picture portion includes a first picture (picture 701, picture 702, picture 703) that becomes visible in a manner corresponding to a predetermined first situation in a first situation, and a second picture (picture 721A, 721B) that becomes visible in a manner corresponding to a predetermined second situation different from the first situation.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, a gaming machine as described in feature 20 or feature 21 can provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase the attention to the gaming machine.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in feature 21, the picture portion provided in the gaming area where the gaming balls can flow down includes a first picture that is visible in a predetermined first situation in a manner corresponding to the first situation, and a second picture that is visible in a predetermined second situation different from the first situation in a manner corresponding to the second situation, so that different pictures (the first picture or the second picture) can be visibly displayed in the first situation and the second situation. This makes it possible to increase the attention to the gaming machine by the different pictures that are visible depending on the situation.

<Feature 22>
22. The gaming machine according to feature 20 or 21,
The reel has a cylindrical reel portion (reel body) that can rotate in a circumferential direction,
The picture portion is formed by coating one surface of a sheet-like light-transmitting member,
A gaming machine characterized in that the back side of the light-transmitting member is attached to the reel section.

In the gaming machine described in Feature 22, a sheet-like translucent member with a picture portion coated on one side is attached to the outer circumferential surface of the reel portion, so that the attention to the reel portion can be improved. Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which the rotation of the reel portion causes the picture to be displayed in a variable or stationary manner (determined display), the first picture can be visibly displayed in a first situation, and the second picture can be visibly displayed in a second situation, so that the attention to the reel portion can be suitably improved.

<Feature 23>
23. A gaming machine according to any one of features 20 to 22,
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying identification information;
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance as a result of the establishment of a predetermined start condition;
When the start condition is satisfied, a variation execution means (sub-control board 940) for variably displaying the identification information on the display unit, and then for displaying a stopped pattern of the identification information (stop pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means;
a game control means (main control board 920) for causing the variable execution means to stop and display the identification information (a stop pattern showing the first result) corresponding to the first result when the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, and generating a special game state which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state;
a setting storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as the lottery probability for the first result to be selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability for the predetermined lottery result to be selected in the second lottery, among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability for the first result to be selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability for the predetermined lottery result to be selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery; and an input means (rear setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) for inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities.
a setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means,
At least one of the first and second patterns is viewable in a different manner according to a situation within a predetermined variation range in the first situation or the second situation, which can vary within the predetermined variation range;
A gaming machine characterized by having a situation generating means (sub-control board 940) that generates at least one of the first situation or the second situation within the variation range so that the image becomes visible in a manner corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting memory means when a predetermined condition is met.

In the gaming machine described in feature 23, when a predetermined start condition is met, the variation execution means varies and displays the identification information on the display unit, and then the identification information corresponding to the lottery result of a predetermined lottery by the lottery means is displayed as still. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, the identification information corresponding to the first result is displayed as still, and then a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

The setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability for the first result to be selected in a predetermined lottery or the lottery probability for the predetermined lottery result to be selected in a second lottery, among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability for the first result to be selected in a predetermined lottery or the lottery probability for the predetermined lottery result to be selected in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to any of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. In this way, the lottery probability for the first result to be selected in a predetermined lottery or the lottery probability for the predetermined result to be selected in a second lottery can be changed to a probability corresponding to the operation information input by the input means.

When a predetermined condition is met, the situation generating means generates at least one of the first situation or the second situation within the range of variation of each situation (first situation, second situation) so that at least one of the first pattern or the second pattern is visible in a manner corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means.

This allows the probability information stored in the setting storage means, i.e., information corresponding to the currently set probability of the first result being selected in a predetermined lottery or the second result being selected in a second lottery, to be suggested to the player based on the difference in appearance of at least one of the first and second pictures. Therefore, the player can add a gameplay feature of guessing probability information about the gaming machine he or she is playing on, depending on the difference in appearance of at least one of the first and second pictures. For example, the player can consider whether the gaming machine is suited to his or her preferences or a different gaming machine, and use the guessed probability information as one of the selection factors for whether to continue playing or move to another gaming machine, thereby improving the gameplay of a gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in multiple stages.

<Feature 30>
A first decorative portion (decorative lens portion 786) provided at a predetermined position;
A second decorative portion (peripheral decorative portion 788) provided on one side of the first decorative portion;
a light emitting means (light emitter 782) that is provided on a side farther from the player than the second decorative portion and outputs light,
The second decorative portion is
A first transmission portion (direct light transmission region X1) capable of transmitting a portion of the light output from the light emitting means;
A gaming machine characterized by having a reflection means (reflective film portion 790B) capable of reflecting to the player a portion of the light output from the light-emitting means which does not enter the first transparent portion and returns to the light-emitting means side.

<Feature 31>
A first decorative portion (decorative lens portion 786) provided at a predetermined position;
A second decorative portion (peripheral decorative portion 788) provided on one side of the first decorative portion;
a light emitting means (light emitter 782) that is provided on the side of the second decorative portion away from the player and outputs light;
A reflecting means (a reflecting film portion 790B) capable of reflecting light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means,
The second decorative portion is
A first transmission portion (direct light transmission region X1) capable of directly transmitting light output from the light emitting means;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second transmission section (reflected light transmission area X2) adjacent to or close to the first transmission section and capable of transmitting light reflected by the reflecting means.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature 30 or feature 31 can provide a gaming machine that can favorably increase the attention to the gaming machine. That is, the first decorative part is provided at a predetermined position, and the second decorative part is provided on one side of the first decorative part. The second decorative part includes a first transparent part and a second transparent part adjacent to or close to the first transparent part. The first transparent part is configured to directly transmit light output from the light emitting means, while the second transparent part is configured to transmit light reflected by a reflecting means capable of reflecting light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means. Therefore, the first transparent part and the second transparent part can differ in the appearance of light visually recognized by the player (for example, brightness, color, etc.). As a result, the first transparent part and the second transparent part can differ in the way the second decorative part shines, thereby improving the decorativeness of the light transmitted through the second decorative part.

In addition, since the intensity of reflected light is generally smaller than the intensity of incident light, the intensity of light passing through the second transmitting portion can be made weaker than the intensity of light passing through the first transmitting portion. This makes it possible to make the second transmitting portion appear to shine weaker than the first transmitting portion in the second decorative portion. Therefore, the brightness of the second decorative portion can be varied, and in this respect as well, the decorativeness of the light passing through the second decorative portion can be improved.

In this way, with the gaming machine described in feature 30 or feature 31, the decorativeness of the light passing through the second decorative portion is improved, thereby increasing the attention to the second decorative portion and the first decorative portion to which the second decorative portion is provided on one side, thereby increasing the attention to the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine described in Feature 31, the "light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means" that can be reflected by the reflecting means may be direct light that reaches the reflecting means directly after being output from the light emitting means, or it may be indirect light that is reflected by one or more planes different from the reflecting means between being output from the light emitting means and reaching the reflecting means.

<Feature 32>
32. The gaming machine according to claim 30 or 31,
The second transparent portion is adjacent to or close to the first transparent portion and is disposed on an end side of the second decorative portion away from the first decorative portion,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reflecting means is provided below the second transparent portion and reflects light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means upward and away from the first decorative portion, so that a portion of the light reflected by the reflecting means passes through the second transparent portion and another portion travels as light that is directly visible to the player outside the second decorative portion without passing through the second transparent portion.

In the gaming machine described in feature 32, the second transparent portion of the second decorative portion is adjacent to or close to the first transparent portion, and is disposed on the end side of the second decorative portion that is farther from the first decorative portion. The reflecting means disposed below the second transparent portion reflects light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means toward the upper side and toward the side farther from the first decorative portion, so that a part of the light reflected by the reflecting means passes through the second transparent portion, and another part of the light does not pass through the second transparent portion and travels outward from the second decorative portion as light that is directly visible to the player. Depending on whether the light reflected by the reflecting means passes through the second transparent portion or travels outward from the second transparent portion as light that is directly visible to the player, the way the light appears to the player (e.g., brightness, brilliance, etc.) can change, and the decorativeness of the light reflected by the reflecting means is improved.

<Feature 33>
33. The gaming machine according to feature 32,
A gaming machine characterized in that a portion of the reflecting means is exposed outside the second transparent portion without overlapping the second transparent portion when the reflecting means is viewed from the front.

In the gaming machine described in Feature 33, a part of the reflecting means is exposed on the outer side of the second transmissive section without overlapping the second transmissive section when the reflecting means is viewed from the front, so that the player can see a mixture of light reflected by the reflecting means from the outer side of the second transmissive section, and light reflected by the reflecting means from the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means. This makes it possible to give a different impression to the light that the player can see when the reflecting means only reflects natural light.

<Feature 34>
34. The gaming machine according to feature 32 or 33,
The light emitting means is provided below the second decorative part and is configured to be able to output light toward the second decorative part,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second decorative portion is configured such that when light output from the light-emitting means reaches it, a portion of the light passes through the first transparent portion and another portion is reflected toward the reflecting means.

In the gaming machine described in Feature 34, when light output from a light emitting means provided below the second decorative portion toward the second decorative portion reaches the second decorative portion, part of the light passes through the first transparent portion and the other part is reflected toward the reflecting means, so that the light can be transmitted through the first transparent portion and the second transparent portion by the common light emitting means. This prevents the arrangement of the light emitting means from becoming complicated, and reduces manufacturing costs by commonizing the light emitting means for transmitting light through the first transparent portion and the second transparent portion.

<Feature 35>
In the gaming machine according to any one of features 30 to 34,
The first decorative portion has translucency,
A protrusion (protrusion 787) provided along the periphery of the surface that is the front side of the first decorative part on the side where the second decorative part is provided,
A decorative member (decorative sheet 789) is provided on the back side of the first decorative part, which is the back side of the front side, and includes content that can be seen through the first decorative part from the front side.
A gaming machine characterized in that at least the portion of the protrusion that is visible from the front side (end surface 787A) is processed to appear to be a color that is more easily reflective than at least some of the colors contained in the decorative member.

In the gaming machine described in feature 35, a decorative member containing content that is visible through the first decorative portion from the front side of the first decorative portion is provided on the back side of the translucent first decorative portion. Meanwhile, a protrusion is provided along the periphery of the front side of the first decorative portion, on the side where the second decorative portion is provided. Thus, while the decorative member is provided on the back side of the first decorative portion, the protrusion is provided on the front side of the first decorative portion, and therefore the protrusion can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative member. This can improve the decorative feel provided by the protrusion.

In particular, the protrusions that are three-dimensionally provided on the decorative member are processed to appear to have a color that is more reflective than at least some of the colors contained in the decorative member, which can more effectively enhance the decorative feel of the protrusions.

<Feature 40>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state that is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the lottery result by the lottery means and is capable of displaying a performance corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a performance image (video data) used for a predetermined first performance (first suggestion performance) that can be displayed on the display unit;
A performance selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a performance to be displayed on the display unit;
A display control means (sub-control board 940) is provided for displaying on the display unit an image of at least one region cut out from the performance image stored in the storage unit as an image used for a predetermined second performance different from the first performance,
The display control means displays an image of at least one area cut out from the performance image on the display unit in a deformed or processed state.

<Feature 41>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state that is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the lottery result by the lottery means and is capable of displaying a performance corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a performance image (video data) to be used for a predetermined first performance (first suggestion performance) among the performances that can be displayed on the display unit;
A performance selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a performance to be displayed on the display unit;
and a display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying on the display unit an image of at least one region cut out from the performance image stored in the memory unit when a predetermined second performance (second suggestive performance) different from the first performance is selected by the performance selection means,
The display control means, when the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, displays the effect image on the display unit without undergoing a specified deformation or processing, and, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, displays an image of at least one area cut out from the effect image on the display unit after undergoing the specified deformation or processing.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature 40 or feature 41 can provide a gaming machine that can favorably increase the attention to the gaming machine. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be able to display an effect corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The memory unit stores an effect image to be used for a predetermined first effect among the effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a specified second performance different from the first performance is selected by the performance selection means, the display control means displays on the display unit an image of at least one area cut out from the performance image used for the first performance stored in the memory unit, with a specified deformation or processing. Therefore, since the performance image used for the first performance stored in the memory unit is reused in the second performance, the amount of storage of performance images can be reduced, and it becomes easier to reduce the need to develop performance images for each of the first and second performances, thereby reducing development costs.

In addition, since the second effect is configured to display an image of an area cut out from the effect image used in the first effect, the expected events when the first effect is displayed can be similarly suggested when the second effect using the image cut out from the effect image used in the first effect is displayed. This makes it possible to suggest the degree of ease of transition to the special game state by displaying the second effect, for example, when the first effect is an effect that can suggest the degree of ease (expectation, reliability) of transition to the special game state. In addition, the suggestion of the expected events when the first effect is displayed and the suggestion of the expected events when the second effect is displayed are each realized with different appearances, so that the variety of effects can be increased while suppressing the cost of developing effect images for the second effect.

In the second performance, an image of an area cut out from the performance image used in the first performance is displayed, making it difficult to guess which performance image of the first performance corresponds to the image displayed in the second performance. This makes it possible to differentiate the degree of difficulty in guessing what can be expected after the first or second performance is displayed between when the first or second performance is displayed, thereby improving the playability of guessing what can be expected after the first or second performance is displayed (for example, the ease of transitioning to a special game state), and thereby increasing the attention paid to the gaming machine.

In particular, since the image of the area cut out from the performance image used in the first performance is displayed in a deformed or processed state in the second performance, it is advantageously difficult to guess which performance image in the first performance corresponds to the image displayed in the second performance.

<Feature 42>
42. The gaming machine according to claim 40 or 41,
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, at least a portion of the images of multiple areas cut out from the effect image stored in the memory unit are displayed in a deformed or processed state so that they appear to be facing approximately the same direction other than the forward direction.

In the gaming machine described in feature 42, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, the display control means displays images of the multiple regions cut out from the effect image stored in the memory unit (the effect image used for the first effect) in a deformed or processed state so that at least some of the images appear to face in approximately the same direction different from the front direction. This makes it possible to give a more orderly impression than when the images of the multiple regions are all displayed so that they appear to face in different directions.

<Feature 43>
43. The gaming machine according to feature 42,
The display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, at least one of the images of multiple regions cut out from the effect image stored in the memory unit, which have been deformed or processed, is displayed so as to appear to be superimposed on the other images.

In the gaming machine described in feature 43, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, the display control means displays at least one of the images of multiple regions cut out from the effect image stored in the memory unit (the effect image used for the first effect) that has been transformed or processed so that it appears to be superimposed on the other images, making it difficult for the player to recognize the content of the superimposed image. In this respect, it is also difficult for the player to guess the effect image that corresponds to the image displayed in the second effect. This makes it possible to favorably improve the gameplay in guessing what can be expected after the first or second effect is displayed (for example, the ease of transitioning to a special game state), and as a result, it is possible to increase the attention to the gaming machine.

<Feature 50>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state that is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the lottery result by the lottery means and is capable of displaying a performance corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a performance image (video data) used for a predetermined first performance (first suggestion performance) that can be displayed on the display unit;
A performance selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a performance to be displayed on the display unit;
The gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a display control means (sub-control board 940) that simultaneously displays on the display unit at least a portion of images corresponding to images of multiple areas cut out from the performance image stored in the memory unit as images used for a predetermined second performance (second suggestive performance) different from the first performance.

<Feature 51>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state that is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the lottery result by the lottery means and is capable of displaying a performance corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a performance image (video data) to be used for a predetermined first performance (first suggestion performance) among the performances that can be displayed on the display unit;
A performance selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a performance to be displayed on the display unit;
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a display control means (sub-control board 940) that, when a predetermined second effect (second suggestive effect) different from the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, causes at least a portion of images corresponding to images of multiple areas cut out from the effect image stored in the memory unit to be displayed simultaneously on the display unit.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature 50 or 51 can provide a gaming machine that can favorably increase the attention to the gaming machine. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be able to display an effect corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The memory unit stores an effect image to be used for a predetermined first effect among the effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a second performance different from the first performance is selected by the performance selection means, at least some of the images corresponding to the images of the multiple regions cut out from the performance image used for the first performance stored in the memory unit are simultaneously displayed on the display unit by the display control means. Therefore, since the performance image used for the first performance stored in the memory unit is reused in the second performance, the amount of storage of performance images can be reduced, and it becomes easier to reduce the need to develop performance images for each of the first and second performances, thereby reducing development costs.

In addition, since the second performance is configured to display an image corresponding to an image of an area cut out from the performance image used in the first performance, the event that can be expected when the first performance is displayed can also be suggested when the second performance using an image cut out from the performance image used in the first performance is displayed. As a result, for example, when the first performance is a performance that can suggest the degree of ease (expectation, reliability) of transition to a special game state, it is possible to suggest the degree of ease of transition to the special game state by the display of the second performance.
Since the suggestion of an event that can be expected when the first performance is displayed and the suggestion of an event that can be expected when the second performance is displayed are realized with different appearances, the variation of the performances can be increased while suppressing the cost for developing a performance image for the second performance.

In the second performance, an image corresponding to an image of an area cut out from the performance image used in the first performance is displayed, making it difficult to guess which performance image of the first performance corresponds to the image displayed in the second performance. This makes it possible to differentiate the degree of difficulty in guessing what can be expected after the first or second performance is displayed between when the first or second performance is displayed, thereby improving the playability of guessing what can be expected after the first or second performance is displayed (for example, the ease of transitioning to a special game state), and thereby increasing the attention paid to the gaming machine.

In particular, since at least some of the images corresponding to the images of the multiple regions cut out from the performance image used in the first performance are displayed simultaneously, it is easier to guess which performance image in the first performance corresponds to the image displayed in the second performance, compared to when, for example, one image of the images corresponding to the images of the multiple regions is displayed alone. This makes it possible to prevent it from becoming too difficult to guess which performance image in the first performance corresponds to an image displayed in the second performance.

In the gaming machine described in feature 51, the "image corresponding to the image of the multiple regions cut out from the presentation image" may be an image that is completely identical in appearance to the image of the multiple regions cut out from the presentation image, or an image that is approximately identical in appearance to the image of the multiple regions cut out from the presentation image, or an image that displays the image cut out from the presentation image with the same appearance, or an image that has been deformed or processed from the cut out image.

<Feature 52>
52. The gaming machine according to feature 50 or feature 51,
The display control means displays at least one of the images corresponding to the images of the cut-out areas so as to appear to be superimposed on another image when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means.

In the gaming machine described in feature 52, when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, the display control means displays at least one of the images corresponding to the multiple regions cut out from the effect image stored in the memory unit in association with the first effect so that it appears to be superimposed on the other images, making it difficult for the player to recognize the content of the superimposed image. This makes it suitably difficult to guess which effect image of the first effect corresponds to the image displayed in the second effect.

<Feature 60>
an operating means (button operating unit 850, operation cover member 870) which is provided with an operated unit (operated unit 852, operation cover member 870) which is movable in a predetermined direction by operation by a player, and which can be arranged in a neutral position set in a plurality of places when the operated unit is not operated, and which is configured such that when the player operates the operated unit in the predetermined direction in each neutral position, the operated unit can move in the predetermined direction while deforming an elastic body;
an operating means (operating mechanism 860) that can hold the operating means in any one of the neutral positions when the operated portion is not operated, and that operates the operating means so that the position of the operating means can be moved without the player's operation of the operated portion;
and an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the actuation means so as to at least change the position of the operation means;
The gaming machine, wherein the action control means at least includes control for moving the operating means at a speed that generates an inertial force large enough to deform the elastic body.

<Feature 61>
an operating means (button operating unit 850, operation cover member 870) that is supported on a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and has an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction by operation by a player, and that is located in a predetermined neutral position when the operated part is not operated, and that is configured so that when a player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction, the elastic body deforms to move the operated part in the predetermined direction relative to the base;
an actuation means (actuation mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means in the neutral position when the operated portion is not operated, and capable of moving the position of the operating means in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation of the operated portion;
A gaming machine characterized by having an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operating means so as to at least change the position of the operating means.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (see, for example, JP 2016-193329 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature 60 or feature 61 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably operate an operated part that can be operated by a player. That is, the operating means equipped with an operated part is configured such that the operated part is supported on a base body via an elastic body, so that when a player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction, the elastic body is deformed to move the operated part in the predetermined direction relative to the base body.

The operating means is configured to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the actuation means when the operated part is not being operated. This allows the operating means to be positioned in the predetermined neutral position when the operated part is not being operated.

The operating means is configured so that the position of the operating means can be moved by the actuating means in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player operating the operated portion. The actuating means is controlled by the motion control means so that the position of the operating means is at least changeable.

Therefore, for example, when the operating means is operated under the control of the operation control means, and the operating means stopped at a predetermined first position (i.e., in a state where no operation is being performed on the operated part) is moved from the first position (e.g., a neutral position) in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction to a predetermined second position and then stopped at the second position, the operated part supported on the base via an elastic body can be moved along the predetermined direction by the inertial force received by the operated part in the operating means stopped at the second position, and it is also possible to cause a vibration motion (reciprocating motion) that reciprocates between the predetermined direction and the direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

Alternatively, for example, if the operating means is configured to enable movement of the operating means in a predetermined direction from the neutral position when a player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force that exceeds the holding force holding the operating means in the neutral position, and to move the operating means toward the neutral position when the operation on the operated part is completed after the operating means has moved in a predetermined direction from the neutral position with a force that exceeds the holding force, then when the operation on the operated part is completed with a force that exceeds the holding force and the operating means has returned to the neutral position and stopped, the operated part, which is supported on the base via an elastic body, can be made to vibrate (reciprocate) between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction due to the inertial force received by the operated part.

In this way, according to the gaming machine described in Feature 60 or Feature 61, the operating means having an operated part supported on the base via an elastic body is configured so that the position of the operating means can at least be changed by the actuation means controlled by the motion control means, so that the operated part of the operating means can be made to vibrate (reciprocate) back and forth between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the inertial force received by the operated part.

This allows the operating means to function not only as a means for allowing the player to operate the device, but also as a means capable of providing effects that utilize the vibration of the operated part. By making it possible for the operating means to form part of the effects, interest in the operating means can be increased, and this can increase the attention paid to the gaming machine. Furthermore, even with simple movement control of the operating means, the movement of the operated part can be made more complex, resulting in a different tactile sensation when the player touches the operated part.

<Feature 62>
62. The gaming machine according to feature 60 or 61,
The operating means enables the operation means to move from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when a player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force that exceeds the holding force that holds the operation means in the neutral position, and moves the operation means toward the neutral position when the operation on the operated part is completed after the operation of the operation means with a force that exceeds the holding force on the operated part has moved the operation means in the predetermined direction from the neutral position.

In the gaming machine described in feature 62, the operating means is configured to allow the operating means to move in a predetermined direction from the neutral position when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force that exceeds the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, and is configured to move the operating means toward the neutral position when the operation on the operated part (operation with a force that exceeds the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position) moves the operating means in the predetermined direction from the neutral position and then the operation on the operated part is terminated.

Since the position of the operating means can be moved in a predetermined direction by the actuation means, it is possible to make the amount of movement (stroke amount) of the operated part by the player's operation from the neutral position in a predetermined direction exceed the amount of movement of the operated part that is possible due to deformation of the elastic body. This makes it possible to diversify the feeling of operation when the player operates the operated part, compared to when the amount of movement of the operated part is limited to a certain range based on the deformation of the elastic body.

In addition, if the operation control means is configured to control the actuating means so as to change the holding force, the force with which the player operates the operated part can be made variable in the area in which the operating means is moved by the actuating means, so even in such a case, it is possible to diversify the operational feel when the player operates the operated part.

<Feature 70>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation execution means (main control board 920) for displaying a pattern on a predetermined display unit in a variable manner when the start condition is satisfied, and then displaying a pattern corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means as a stopped pattern;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state, after the stop display by the variable execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result;
and a reserve storage means (main control board 920) for storing information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means as reserved information in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the start condition is established while the variable display is being performed by the variable execution means, and for reserving the execution of the variable display corresponding to the information by the variable execution means,
An operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operating cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of a player and is located in a predetermined neutral position when the operated portion is not operated;
and an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so as to be able to change at least one of the position of the operation means and the magnitude of the reaction force against the moving operation of the operation means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means includes at least a hold response control that controls the operation of the operating means so that the operation is in a manner corresponding to at least one of the number of hold information (number of holds) stored in the hold memory means or the content of the hold information.

<Feature 71>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation execution means (main control board 920) for displaying a pattern on a predetermined display unit in a variable manner when the start condition is satisfied, and then displaying a pattern corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means as a stopped pattern;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state, after the stop display by the variable execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result;
and a reserve storage means (main control board 920) for storing information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means as reserved information in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the start condition is established while the variable display is being performed by the variable execution means, and for reserving the execution of the variable display corresponding to the information by the variable execution means,
An operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operating cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of a player and is located in a predetermined neutral position when the operated portion is not operated;
an operating means (operating mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means in the neutral position when the operated part is not being operated, and capable of moving the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated part, enabling the operating means to move from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, and moving the operating means toward the neutral position when the operation on the operated part is completed after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation on the operated part with a force exceeding the holding force;
and an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the actuation means so as to at least change the position of the operation means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means controls the actuation means so that the operating means moves to the neutral position predetermined according to the number of pending information (number of pending times) stored in the pending memory means, or so that the movement pattern of the operating means when the operated part is operated by a player corresponds to the content of the pending information stored in the pending memory means.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (see, for example, JP 2016-193329 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature 70 or feature 71 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably operate an operated part that can be operated by a player. In other words, the operating means, which has an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation, is configured to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the actuation means when the operated part is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned in the predetermined neutral position when the operated part is not operated.

The operating means is configured so that, when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means can be moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the actuation means, and when the operation on the operated part is terminated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position), the operating means is configured to move toward the neutral position.

The operating means is configured so that the position of the operating means can be moved by the actuating means at least in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player operating the operated portion. The actuating means is controlled by the motion control means so that the position of the operating means is at least changeable.

Here, in the gaming machine described in feature 70 or feature 71, when a predetermined start condition is met while a variable display is being performed by the variable execution means, the hold storage means stores information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means as hold information in a predetermined memory section up to a predetermined number, and the execution of the variable display corresponding to that information by the variable execution means is held in a configuration in which the operation means moves to a neutral position that is predetermined according to the number of hold information stored in the hold storage means, or the movement mode of the operation means when the operated part is operated by the player is a mode according to the content of the hold information stored in the hold storage means.

By changing the neutral position of the operating means, it is possible to change the amount of movement (stroke amount) of the operated part in a specified direction from the neutral position when operated by the player, thereby diversifying the operation feel of the operating means. In addition, by changing the movement mode of the operating means when the player operates the operated part, it is possible to diversify the operation feel when the player operates the operated part. Diversifying the operation feel of the operating means can increase the attention to the gaming machine.

Examples of the pending information include whether the lottery results were correct or not, and the content of the presentation selected based on the lottery results.

<Feature 72>
72. The gaming machine according to claim 70 or 71,
The operating means is configured so that the operated part is supported on a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by operation by the player, and when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction, the elastic body deforms so that the operated part can be moved in the predetermined direction relative to the base.

In the gaming machine described in feature 72, the operating means is configured such that the operated part is supported on the base via an elastic body, so that when a player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction, the elastic body is deformed to move the operated part in the predetermined direction relative to the base.

Therefore, for example, in an operating means that has returned to the neutral position and stopped after operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position has ended, it is possible to cause the operated part supported on the base body via the elastic body to vibrate (reciprocate) back and forth between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction due to the inertial force received by the operated part.

This allows the operating means to function not just as a means for allowing the player to perform operations, but also as a means capable of providing effects that utilize the vibration of the operated part. By making it possible for the operating means to form part of the effects, interest in the operating means can be increased, and in this respect too, the gaming machine can be made more attractive.

<Feature 80>
An operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operating cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of a player and is located in a predetermined neutral position when the operated portion is not operated;
and an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means so as to at least change the position of the operation means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means controls the operation of the operating means so that, when a predetermined condition based on the game situation (e.g., the number of holds, the game time, the number of times a predetermined effect (e.g., the display of a specific character) is executed) or the result of a predetermined lottery is established, the operating means moves to a neutral position corresponding to the established condition among a plurality of predetermined neutral positions.

<Feature 81>
An operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operating cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of a player and is located in a predetermined neutral position when the operated portion is not operated;
an operating means (operating mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means in the neutral position when the operated part is not being operated, and capable of moving the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated part, enabling the operating means to move from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, and moving the operating means toward the neutral position when the operation on the operated part is completed after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation on the operated part with a force exceeding the holding force;
and an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the actuation means so as to at least change the position of the operation means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means controls the operating means so that, when a predetermined condition is met, the operating means moves to a neutral position corresponding to the met condition out of a plurality of predetermined neutral positions.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (see, for example, JP 2016-193329 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature 80 or feature 81 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably operate an operated part that can be operated by a player. In other words, the operating means, which has an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation, is configured to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the actuation means when the operated part is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned in the predetermined neutral position when the operated part is not operated.

The operating means is configured so that, when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means can be moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the actuation means, and when the operation on the operated part is terminated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position), the operating means is configured to move toward the neutral position.

The operating means is configured so that the position of the operating means can be moved by the actuating means at least in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player operating the operated portion. The actuating means is controlled by the motion control means so that the position of the operating means is at least changeable.

Here, when a predetermined condition is met, the actuation means is controlled by the motion control means so that the operating means moves to one of a plurality of predetermined neutral positions that corresponds to the met condition. By changing the neutral position of the operating means, it is possible to change the amount of movement (stroke amount) of the operated part in a predetermined direction from the neutral position due to the player's operation, thereby diversifying the operational feel when the player operates the operated part. Diversifying the operational feel of the operating means can increase the attention to the gaming machine.

The "predetermined condition" described in feature 81 may be, for example, when the number of reserved unit plays related to a special pattern changes, or when the number of operations of an operated part during a predetermined presentation (for example, a presentation executed in the variable display of a decorative pattern) reaches a predetermined number.

<Feature 82>
82. The gaming machine according to claim 80 or 81,
The operating means is configured so that the operated part is supported on a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by operation by the player, and when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction, the elastic body deforms so that the operated part can be moved in the predetermined direction relative to the base.

In the gaming machine described in feature 82, the operating means is configured such that the operated part is supported on the base via an elastic body, so that when a player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction, the elastic body is deformed to move the operated part in the predetermined direction relative to the base.

Therefore, for example, in an operating means that has returned to the neutral position and stopped after operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position has ended, it is possible to cause the operated part supported on the base body via the elastic body to vibrate (reciprocate) back and forth between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction due to the inertial force received by the operated part.

This allows the operating means to function not just as a means for allowing the player to perform operations, but also as a means capable of providing effects that utilize the vibration of the operated part. By making it possible for the operating means to form part of the effects, interest in the operating means can be increased, and in this respect too, the gaming machine can be made more attractive.

<Feature 90>
An operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operating cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of a player and is located in a predetermined neutral position when the operated portion is not operated;
an actuation means (actuation mechanism 860) that holds the operating means in the neutral position and allows the operating means to move from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction;
and an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the actuation means so as to be able to change at least one of a position of the operation means and a reaction force against a moving operation of the operation means,
The operation control means controls the operating means so that when a player operates the operated part in the specified direction, the reaction force against the movement operation of the operating means changes, and a gaming machine characterized in that multiple patterns of the change in reaction force are set corresponding to the lottery result or expectation level of a specified lottery.

<Feature 91>
An operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operating cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of a player and is located in a predetermined neutral position when the operated portion is not operated;
an operating means (operating mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means in the neutral position when the operated part is not being operated, and capable of moving the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated part, enabling the operating means to move from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, and moving the operating means toward the neutral position when the operation on the operated part is completed after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation on the operated part with a force exceeding the holding force;
and an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the actuation means so as to at least change the position of the operation means and the holding force,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means controls the operating means so that, when a player operates the operated part in the specified direction with a force that exceeds the holding force, the reaction force against the movement operation of the operating means changes at a first position away from the neutral position in the specified direction.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (see, for example, JP 2016-193329 A).

Although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there is still room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature 90 or feature 91 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably operate an operated part that can be operated by a player. In other words, the operating means, which has an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation, is configured to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the actuation means when the operated part is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned in the predetermined neutral position when the operated part is not operated.

The operating means is configured so that, when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means can be moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the actuation means, and when the operation on the operated part is terminated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position), the operating means is configured to move toward the neutral position.

The operating means is configured so that the position of the operating means can be moved by the actuating means at least in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player operating the operated portion. The actuating means is controlled by the motion control means so that the position of the operating means is at least changeable.

The operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force that exceeds the holding force, the holding force changes at a first position away from the neutral position in a predetermined direction. As a result, when the player operates the operated part with a force that exceeds the holding force, the operating feel of the operating means changes at the first position, which is midway through the operation, so that the operating feel of the operating means does not become monotonous, thereby making it possible to increase the attention paid to the gaming machine. For example, by setting control of the operating feel of the operating means so that it resists a constant reaction force against the movement operation of the operating means, as the operating feel of the operating means, control of the operating feel so that the reaction force changes discontinuously, it is possible to change the reaction force against the movement operation of the operating means at the first position.

<Feature 92>
92. The gaming machine according to claim 90 or 91,
The operating means is configured such that the operated part is supported on a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by operation by the player, and when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction, the elastic body deforms so that the operated part can be moved in the predetermined direction relative to the base.

In the gaming machine described in feature 92, the operating means is configured such that the operated part is supported on the base via an elastic body, so that when a player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction, the elastic body is deformed to move the operated part in the predetermined direction relative to the base.

Therefore, for example, in an operating means that has returned to the neutral position and stopped after operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position has ended, it is possible to cause the operated part supported on the base body via the elastic body to vibrate (reciprocate) back and forth between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction due to the inertial force received by the operated part.

This allows the operating means to function not only as a means for allowing the player to operate the machine, but also as a means capable of providing effects that utilize the vibration of the operated part. Since the operating means can form part of the effects, interest in the operating means can be increased, and in this respect, the attention to the gaming machine can also be increased.

<Feature A0>
An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) that includes an operated unit (operated unit 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of a player and that is maintained in a predetermined neutral state when the operated unit is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the position of the operation means so as to at least change the position of the operation means;
A detection means (encoder, sub-control board 940) capable of detecting at least one of the movement amount of the operation means or the movement speed of the operation part when the player operates the operation part in a predetermined direction;
and an operation execution means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined display on a predetermined display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) or for operating a predetermined movable unit when at least one of the movement amount or the movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value or becomes a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range.
A gaming machine characterized in that two or more values corresponding to the results of a predetermined lottery are set as the specified target value or the specified value or a value within the specified range.

<Feature A1>
An operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operating cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of a player and is located in a predetermined neutral position when the operated portion is not operated;
an operating means (operating mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means in the neutral position when the operated part is not being operated, and capable of moving the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated part, enabling the operating means to move from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, and moving the operating means toward the neutral position when the operation on the operated part is completed after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation on the operated part with a force exceeding the holding force;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the actuation means so as to at least change the position of the operation means;
A detection means (encoder, sub-control board 940) capable of detecting at least one of the movement amount of the operation means or the movement speed of the operated part when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an operation execution means (sub-control board 940) that displays a predetermined display on a predetermined display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) or operates a predetermined movable unit when at least one of the movement amount or the movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value or becomes a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (see, for example, JP 2016-193329 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in Feature A0 or Feature A1 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably operate an operated part that can be operated by a player. That is, the operating means having an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of a player is configured to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the actuation means when the operated part is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned in the predetermined neutral position when the operated part is not operated.

The operating means is configured so that, when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means can be moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the actuation means, and when the operation on the operated part is terminated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position), the operating means is configured to move toward the neutral position.

The operating means is configured so that the position of the operating means can be moved by the actuating means at least in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player operating the operated portion. The actuating means is controlled by the motion control means so that the position of the operating means is at least changeable.

Here, in the gaming machine described in Feature A0 or Feature A1, a detection means is provided that can detect the amount of movement of the operating means or the movement speed of the operated part when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force that exceeds the holding force. When the amount of movement or the movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value, a predetermined display is displayed on a predetermined display unit or a predetermined movable part is operated by the action execution means. Thus, it is possible to provide a gameplay that allows the player to operate the operating means in accordance with a predetermined target value, thereby increasing the attention to the gaming machine.

<Feature A2>
In the gaming machine according to feature A0 or feature A1,
The operating means is configured so that the operated part is supported on a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by operation by the player, and when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction, the elastic body deforms so that the operated part can be moved in the predetermined direction relative to the base.

In the gaming machine described in Feature A2, the operating means is configured such that the operated part is supported on the base via an elastic body, so that when a player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction, the elastic body is deformed to move the operated part in the predetermined direction relative to the base.

Therefore, for example, in an operating means that has returned to the neutral position and stopped after operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position has ended, it is possible to cause the operated part supported on the base body via the elastic body to vibrate (reciprocate) back and forth between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction due to the inertial force received by the operated part.

This allows the operating means to function not just as a means for allowing the player to perform operations, but also as a means capable of providing effects that utilize the vibration of the operated part. By making it possible for the operating means to form part of the effects, interest in the operating means can be increased, and in this respect too, the gaming machine can be made more attractive.

<Feature B0>
An operating means (button operating unit 850, operation cover member 870) including an operating unit (operated unit 852, operation cover member 870) having a contact surface (pressing surface) that can be contacted by a player and can move in a predetermined direction (downward), and at least a part of the operating unit is accommodated in and attached to a predetermined opening;
An actuation means (actuation mechanism 860) capable of holding the actuation means in a predetermined neutral position and capable of moving the position of the actuation means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
and an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operating means so as to at least change the position of the operating means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the neutral position of the operating means includes at least a position where the contact surface is approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening (or at least a part of the periphery of the opening) in the direction of movement of the operating means, or a position where the contact surface is recessed relative to the opening surface (or at least a part of the periphery of the opening) in the direction of movement of the operating means.

<Feature B1>
an operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is equipped with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operating cover member 870) that can move in the direction of pressing (downward) by a player pressing a predetermined pressing surface (operation surface 870B), the operating means being housed and attached in a predetermined opening with the pressing surface facing the player, and that is positioned in a predetermined neutral position when the operated portion is not pressed;
an operating means (operating mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means in the neutral position when the operated portion is not being pressed, and capable of moving the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the direction of pressing without the player pressing the operated portion, which allows the operating means to move from the neutral position in the direction of pressing when the player presses the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, and which moves the operating means toward the neutral position when the pressing operation on the operated portion is terminated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position in the direction of pressing due to a pressing operation on the operated portion with a force exceeding the holding force;
and an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the actuation means so as to at least change the position of the operation means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the neutral position of the operating means includes at least a position where the pressing surface is approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening in the direction of movement of the operating means, or a position where the pressing surface is recessed in the direction of movement of the operating means relative to the opening surface.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (see, for example, JP 2016-193329 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, a gaming machine described in Feature B0 or Feature B1 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably operate a player-contactable operating means or a player-operable operating means. For example, an operating means having an operated part that can move in the direction of a player's pressing operation on a predetermined pressing surface is configured to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the actuation means when the operated part is not pressed. This positions the operating means in the predetermined neutral position when the operated part is not pressed.

In addition, the operating means is configured by the actuation means so that when a player presses the operated part in a predetermined direction (more specifically, in the direction of pressing) with a force that exceeds the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means can move from the neutral position in the direction of the pressing, and when the pressing operation on the operated part (pressing operation with a force that exceeds the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position) is terminated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position in the direction of the pressing.

The operating means is configured so that the position of the operating means can be moved by the actuating means at least in the direction opposite to the direction of the pressing without the player pressing the operated portion. The actuating means is controlled by the motion control means so that the position of the operating means is at least changeable.

Here, in an operating means that is housed and attached in a specified opening with the pressing surface of the operated part (the surface that is pressed by the player) facing the player, the neutral position of the operating means includes at least a position where the pressing surface is approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening and the movement direction of the operating means, or a position where the pressing surface is recessed in the movement direction of the operating means relative to the opening surface. Therefore, when the neutral position of the operating means is a position where the pressing surface of the operated part is approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening and the movement direction of the operating means, or a position where the pressing surface is recessed in the movement direction of the operating means relative to the opening surface, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform a forceful pressing operation such as hitting the pressing surface, compared to a case where the pressing surface protrudes from the opening surface (more specifically, protrudes in the direction opposite to the pressing direction).

By this, the neutral position of the operating means is a position where the pressing surface of the operated part is roughly equal to the opening surface of the opening in the direction of movement of the operating means, or a position where it is recessed in the direction of movement of the operating means relative to the opening surface, the player operating the operating means (performing a pressing operation on the operated part) can perform a pressing operation in which the pressing surface is pressed against a holding force (a force that holds the operating means in a neutral position), rather than a forceful pressing operation such as hitting the pressing surface.

Therefore, in a gaming machine equipped with an operating means that allows the operating means to move from a neutral position in the direction of the pressing when the operated part is pressed with a force that exceeds the holding force, the player can preferably experience the operational feeling of pressing, which is difficult to feel when pressing with force due to the momentum of the pressing operation, and this can increase the attention to the gaming machine equipped with the operating means.

<Feature B2>
In the gaming machine according to feature B0 or feature B1,
The operating means is configured such that the operated part is supported on a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can move in the direction of pressure when the player presses the pressure surface, and when the player operates the pressure surface in the direction of pressure, the elastic body deforms and the operated part can move in the specified direction relative to the base.

In the gaming machine described in Feature B2, the operating means is configured such that the operated part is supported on the base via an elastic body, so that when a player presses the pressing surface in a predetermined direction (more specifically, in the pressing direction), the elastic body is deformed to move the operated part relative to the base in the pressing direction.

Therefore, for example, in the case of an operating means that has returned to the neutral position and stopped after a pressing operation on the pressing surface with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position has ended, it is possible to make the operated part supported on the base body via the elastic body vibrate (reciprocate) back and forth between the pressing direction and the direction opposite to the pressing direction due to the inertial force received by the operated part.

This allows the operating means to function not only as a means for the player to perform a pressing operation, but also as a means capable of providing an effect utilizing the vibration of the operated part. Since the operating means can form part of the effect, interest in the operating means can be increased, and in this respect, the attention to the gaming machine can also be increased.

<Feature C0>
An operating means (button operating unit 850, operation cover member 870) including an operating unit (operated unit 852, operation cover member 870) having a contact surface (pressing surface) that can be contacted by a player and can move in a predetermined direction (downward), and at least a part of the operating unit is accommodated in and attached to a predetermined opening;
An actuation means (actuation mechanism 860) capable of holding the actuation means in a predetermined neutral position and capable of moving the position of the actuation means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the actuation means so as to at least change the position of the operation means;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a support part (hand rest 895) that is provided closer to the player than the operating means and is capable of supporting at least a portion of the player's hand excluding a portion of the finger side that contacts the operating part and the forearm part connected to the hand, and is provided in a position where the player can contact the operating part on the finger side of the supported part when at least that portion is supported.

<Feature C1>
An operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operated portion (operated portion 852, operating cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by being operated by a player with his/her hand, and that is located in a predetermined neutral position when the operated portion is not operated;
an operating means (operating mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means in the neutral position when the operated part is not being operated, and capable of moving the position of the operating means at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without the player's operation on the operated part, enabling the operating means to move from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, and moving the operating means toward the neutral position when the operation on the operated part is completed after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation on the operated part with a force exceeding the holding force;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the actuation means so as to at least change the position of the operation means;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a support portion (hand rest 895) that is provided closer to the player than the operating means and is capable of supporting at least a portion of the player's hand excluding a portion of the finger side that operates the operated part and the forearm portion connected to the hand, and that supports the player's hand on the finger side of the supported portion when at least that portion is supported so that the player can operate the operated part.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (see, for example, JP 2016-193329 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in Feature C0 or Feature C1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating a player-contactable operating means or a player-operable operating means. For example, an operating means having an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by a player's hand is configured to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the actuation means when the operated part is not operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned in the predetermined neutral position when the operated part is not operated.

The operating means is configured so that, when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, the operating means can be moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the actuation means, and when the operation on the operated part is terminated after the operating means has moved from the neutral position to a predetermined direction by the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position), the operating means is configured to move toward the neutral position.

The operating means is configured so that the position of the operating means can be moved by the actuating means in at least a direction opposite to a predetermined direction without the player operating the operated portion. The actuating means is controlled by the motion control means so that the position of the operating means is at least changeable.

Here, a support section is provided on the side closer to the player than the operating means, which supports at least a portion of the player's hand, excluding the fingers that operate the operated part, and the forearm connected to the hand, so that the player can operate the operated part with the hand. Therefore, when the player operates the operated part with his or her hand, the support section can support at least a portion of the hand, excluding the fingers that operate the operated part, and the forearm connected to the hand, so that the hand can be stabilized and the player can be prevented from operating an inappropriate position on the operated part.

In addition, because the support unit can support at least a portion of the player's hand, excluding a portion of the fingers that operate the operated part, and the forearm that is connected to the hand, the strength of the operation on the operated part can be reduced compared to when the hand and forearm are free to move. This makes it difficult for the player operating the operated part (operating the operating means) to perform forceful operations on the operated part (such as hitting the operated part).

Therefore, in a gaming machine equipped with an operating means that allows the operating means to move from a neutral position to a specified direction when the operated part is operated in that direction with a force that exceeds the holding force, the player can preferably experience the feeling of operating the operating means, which is difficult to feel when operating with force due to the momentum of the operation, and this can increase the attention to the gaming machine equipped with the operating means.

In the gaming machines of features C0 and C1, the "hand" may be the part from the wrist to the tip side, consisting of the palm and fingers, and the "forearm" may be the part connected to the hand, from the wrist to the elbow.

<Feature C2>
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
A light-transmitting member (front panel 222) is provided in front of a game area where game balls flow down, and separates a player from the game area so that the player can see the game area from the front side.
The operation means is provided forward of the light-transmitting member,
The support portion is provided such that at least a portion of the support portion is located forward of the operating means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the length obtained by subtracting the front-to-back length from the front end of the operated part to the rear end of the support part in the area including the operated part and the support part from the front-to-back length in the area forward of the translucent member is shorter than the front-to-back length of the operated part.

In the gaming machine described in Feature C2, the operating means is provided forward of the translucent member that separates the player from the playing area into which the game balls flow, and the support part is provided so that at least a portion of it is forward of the operating means, and the length obtained by subtracting the front-to-rear length from the front end of the operating means to the rear end of the support part in the area including the operated part and support part of the operating means from the front-to-rear length of the area forward of the translucent member is shorter than the front-to-rear length of the operated part. In other words, the area including the operated part and support part of the operating means occupies a relatively large area in the front-to-rear direction of the area forward of the translucent member.

In such a configuration, the size of the operated part can be relatively large in the area forward of the translucent member (for example, a size that occupies approximately half of the area in the front-to-rear direction, or a size that allows the player to operate it with multiple fingers, etc.). In this way, even when the size of the operated part is relatively large in the area forward of the translucent member, a support part is provided so that at least a portion of it is forward of the operating means, thereby enabling preferable operation of the operated part (i.e., a relatively large operated part) and allowing the player to preferably experience the feeling of operating the operating means that includes the operated part.

<Feature C3>
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C0 to C2,
The operating means is configured so that the operated part is supported on a base (base 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and can be moved in a predetermined direction by operation by the player, and when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction, the elastic body deforms so that the operated part can be moved in the predetermined direction relative to the base.

In the gaming machine described in feature C3, the operating means is configured such that the operated part is supported on the base via an elastic body, so that when a player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction, the elastic body is deformed to move the operated part in the predetermined direction relative to the base.

Therefore, for example, in an operating means that has returned to the neutral position and stopped after operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position has ended, it is possible to cause the operated part supported on the base body via the elastic body to vibrate (reciprocate) back and forth between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction due to the inertial force received by the operated part.

This allows the operating means to function not just as a means for allowing the player to perform operations, but also as a means capable of providing effects that utilize the vibration of the operated part. By making it possible for the operating means to form part of the effects, interest in the operating means can be increased, and in this respect too, the gaming machine can be made more attractive.

<Feature D1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the lottery result by the lottery means and is capable of displaying at least a performance corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of performance images (video data) that can be used for the plurality of types of performances (variable display, suggestive performance) that can be displayed on the display unit;
A performance selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects a performance to be displayed on the display unit from among the multiple types of performances;
a display control means (sub-control board 940) that displays a lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is established, and that displays the effect using the effect image stored in the memory unit on the display unit when the effect is selected by the effect selection means before displaying the lottery result,
The display control means, during a non-play state in which no variable display is being performed before the lottery result is displayed, displays on the display unit a non-play image (customer waiting effect) consisting of at least one unit image (frame image, still image) constituting one or more of the effect images used in at least some of the multiple types of effects, or an image of at least one area cut out from at least one unit image constituting the one or more effect images, for at least some of the effects among the multiple types of effects.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature D1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying effect images. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be capable of displaying at least an effect corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The memory unit stores multiple types of effect images that can be used for multiple types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is met, the display control means displays the lottery result selected by the lottery means on the display unit, and when the effect to be displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the effect selection means, the effect using the effect image stored in the memory unit is displayed on the display unit before the lottery result is displayed.

In addition, during a non-play state waiting for the player to play, the display control means displays on the display a non-play image that includes at least one unit image constituting one or more performance images each used for at least some of the multiple types of performances that can be displayed on the display, or an image of at least one area cut out from at least one unit image constituting the one or more performance images.

This allows the non-play image to be displayed during a non-play state waiting for the player to play, so the player can recognize or guess what kind of effects (more specifically, at least some of the multiple types of effects) can be displayed on the display unit when a specific start condition is met. This increases the player's interest in the effects displayed on the display unit, thereby increasing the level of attention paid to the gaming machine.

In particular, the non-play image is an image that is configured by reusing a part of the effect image stored in the storage unit (more specifically, an image of a unit image that configures the effect image or an image of an area cut out from the unit image), so there is no need to prepare a dedicated image for the non-play image,
This allows the amount of storage to be reduced, and allows non-play images to be displayed at the same high resolution as the effects (effect images) displayed on the display unit when a predetermined start condition is met. Also, since there is no need to prepare dedicated images for non-play images, development costs can be reduced.

The non-play state of the gaming machine described in feature D1 may be a non-play state in which the machine is waiting for a player to play, or, instead of describing the non-play state, may be an operable state in which a specific operation can be performed on a specific operating unit.

<Feature E1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the lottery result by the lottery means and is capable of displaying at least a performance corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of performance images (video data) that can be used for the plurality of types of performances (variable display, suggestive performance) that can be displayed on the display unit;
A first effect selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects an effect to be displayed on the display unit from among the multiple types of effects in response to the predetermined result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operation unit (a pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by a player;
A second effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting an effect to be displayed on the display unit from among the multiple types of effects based on the same or substantially the same selection conditions as those of the first effect selection means when the player operates the operation unit during a non-play state in which no variable display is being performed before the lottery result is displayed;
a display control means (sub-control board 940) that, when the predetermined start condition is established, causes a result of the lottery by the lottery means to be displayed on the display unit, and, when the effect is selected by the first effect selection means, causes the effect to be displayed on the display unit using the effect image stored in the memory unit before displaying the result of the lottery;
The display control means causes a display corresponding to the lottery result to be displayed on the display unit when a player performs a specified operation on the operation unit during the non-play state, and when the effect is selected by the second effect selection means, causes the display unit to display the effect using the effect image stored in the memory unit before displaying the display corresponding to the lottery result.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature E1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying effect images. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be capable of displaying at least an effect corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The memory unit stores multiple types of effect images that can be used for multiple types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is met, the first effect selection means selects an effect to be displayed on the display unit from among the multiple types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit in accordance with the result of the lottery by the lottery means. In contrast, when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during a non-play state in which the player is waiting to play, the second effect selection means selects an effect to be displayed on the display unit from among the multiple types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit, based on selection conditions that are the same as or substantially the same as those of the first effect selection means.

When a predetermined start condition is met, the display control means displays the lottery result selected by the lottery means on the display unit, and when the effect to be displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the first effect selection means, the effect using the effect image stored in the memory unit is displayed on the display unit before the lottery result is displayed.

In addition, when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during a non-play state, the display control means causes the display unit to display a display corresponding to the case where the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the predetermined result, and when the effect to be displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the second effect selection means, the effect using the effect image stored in the memory unit is displayed on the display unit before displaying the display corresponding to the lottery result.

Therefore, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit during a non-play state, an effect selected under the same or approximately the same selection conditions as when a predetermined start condition is met is displayed, so that the variable display that appears when a predetermined start condition is met can be displayed during a non-play state with the same or approximately the same frequency (probability) as when the start condition is met. This allows the player to virtually experience the effect that is displayed when a predetermined start condition is met during a non-play state with the same or approximately the same frequency as when the start condition is met. This can increase the player's interest in the playability brought about by the effect that is displayed when the start condition is met, which can increase the attention paid to the gaming machine.

The non-play state of the gaming machine described in feature E1 may be a non-play state in which the machine is waiting for a player to play, or, instead of describing the non-play state, may be an operable state in which a specific operation can be performed on a specific operating unit.

<Feature F1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that displays the lottery result by the lottery means and is capable of displaying at least a performance corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of performance images (video data) that can be used for the plurality of types of performances (variable display, suggestive performance) that can be displayed on the display unit;
A performance selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects a performance to be displayed on the display unit from among the multiple types of performances in response to the lottery result when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operation unit (a pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by a player;
a display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying on the display unit the effect selected by the effect selection means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and for displaying on the display unit an effect using the effect image stored in the memory unit when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during a non-play state in which no variable display is being performed before the lottery result is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with an effect non-execution means (sub-control board 940) which, when a player performs a specified operation on the operating unit during the non-play state, non-executes a part of the effect that is executed between the establishment of the specified start condition and the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means, during the period from the specified operation being performed to the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature F1 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably operate an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be capable of displaying at least an effect corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The memory unit stores multiple types of effect images that can be used for multiple types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined start condition is met, the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit, and when the effect to be displayed on the display unit is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the effect selection means, the effect using the effect image stored in the memory unit is displayed on the display unit before the lottery result is displayed.

In addition, when the player performs a specified operation on the operation unit during a non-play state waiting for the player to execute a game, a performance selected by the performance selection means and using a performance image stored in the memory unit is displayed.

Here, when the player operates the operation unit during a non-play state, some of the functions that are executed from when a predetermined start condition is met until the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means are made non-executable by the effect non-execution means from when the operation unit is operated until the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means.

Therefore, there is an apparent difference between the period from when a specified operation is performed on the operation unit during a non-play state until the end of the effect displayed on the display unit (i.e., the effect selected by the effect selection means) and the period from when a specified start condition is met until the end of the effect displayed on the display unit (i.e., the effect selected by the effect selection means) in that some of the effects executed during the latter period are not executed during the former period.

This allows the player to easily recognize, based on the difference, that the effect displayed when a specific operation is performed on the operation unit during a non-play state is different from the effect displayed when a specific start condition is met, and is a pseudo-effect with no possibility of a special play state occurring after the effect ends.

Therefore, when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during a non-play state, the player can be prevented from mistaking an event that would not occur in a simulated presentation, such as a special game state occurring after a presentation displayed on the display unit based on the predetermined operation. This can suitably prevent the occurrence of situations that are unfavorable to the player, such as the player mistakingly recognizing the presentation displayed on the display unit due to operating the operation unit during a non-play state, and thereby expecting the occurrence of a special game state that should not occur.

The non-play state of the gaming machine described in feature F1 may be a non-play state in which the machine is waiting for a player to play, or, instead of describing the non-play state, may be an operable state in which a specific operation can be performed on the operating unit.

In addition, instead of the description of the non-execution means in the gaming machine described in feature F1, the function may be a function stopping means that, when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during a non-play state in which no variable display is being performed before the lottery result is displayed, stops part of the function that is executed between the establishment of a predetermined start condition and the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means, during the period from the predetermined operation to the end of the effect selected by the effect selection means.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in feature F1, the effect that is not executed by the effect non-execution means may be an effect that accompanies an input operation of an input means that allows the player to input during the variable display, or may be an effect in which a moving body (gimmick) driven by a driving means such as a motor or solenoid performs a predetermined action.

<Feature F2>
A gaming machine according to feature F1,
the display control means, when the predetermined start condition is established, causes the display unit to display a variation of a pattern and a result of the lottery by the lottery means after the variation of the pattern, and when the effect is selected by the first effect selection means, causes the display unit to display the effect using the effect image stored in the storage unit before displaying the lottery result;
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when a player operates the operating unit during the non-play state, the effect non-execution means does not execute the execution of the varying display of the patterns from the time the operating unit is operated until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit.

In the gaming machine described in feature F2, when a predetermined start condition is met, the result of the lottery drawn by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit after the changing patterns are displayed, whereas when the player operates the operation unit during a non-play state, the effect non-execution means stops the execution of the changing pattern display during the period from when the operation unit is operated to when the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit. Therefore, since the player does not recognize the changing pattern display during the period from when the operation unit is operated to when the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, it is possible to preferably prevent the player from misunderstanding the effect displayed on the display unit due to operating the operation unit during a non-play state.

<Feature F3>
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
A moving member (a role) that is moved by a predetermined driving means;
and an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for operating the operating member by driving the driving means before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit by the display control means when the predetermined start condition is established,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when a player performs the specified operation during the non-play state, the effect non-execution means non-executes the operation of the operating member by the operation control means from the time the specified operation is performed until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit.

In the gaming machine described in feature F3, when a predetermined start condition is met, the operating member operates before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit, while when the player operates the operation unit during a non-play state, the effect non-execution means causes the operation of the operating member to be non-executed during the period from when the operation unit is operated to when the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit. Therefore, since the player does not recognize the operation of the operating member during the period from when the operation unit is operated to when the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, it is possible to preferably prevent the player from misrecognizing the effect displayed on the display unit due to operating the operation unit during a non-play state.

<Feature G1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operation means (a pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by a player;
a display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a mode of variable display (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is established, and for selecting a mode selectable when the predetermined start condition is established as the mode of variable display to be displayed on the display unit when the player operates the operation means during a non-play state in which no variable display is being performed before the lottery result is displayed;
and a display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying, on the display unit, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and a lottery result by the lottery means at a variable time corresponding to the variable display when the predetermined start condition is established,
The display control means, when a player operates the operating means during the non-play state, causes the display unit to display a corresponding display (a pseudo-changing display for demonstration purposes) which is composed of at least a part of a changing display in a manner selected by the display selection means, and which includes at least one of a first display (suggestive performance) which can suggest the expected degree of transition to the special play state, or a second display which includes a predetermined display (hold display 1622, suggestive display 1623) which can suggest the expected degree, in a time shorter than the changing time corresponding to the changing display in the selected manner.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature G1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying a presentation image. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the gaming machine is configured to be capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and the result of the lottery performed by the lottery means on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is met.

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode (specific content) of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit. Also, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the variable display selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit at a variable time corresponding to the variable display.

On the other hand, when the player operates the operating means during a non-play state in which no variable display is being performed before the lottery result is displayed by the lottery means (during a non-play state in which the player is waiting to play), the display selection means selects a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit that is selectable when a specified start condition is met, and that is a variable display mode that is selectable when a specified start condition is met.

When the player operates the operating means during a non-play state, the display control means displays on the display unit a corresponding display consisting of at least a part of the variable display in the manner selected by the display selection means, the corresponding display including at least one of a first display capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to a special play state (expectation indicating the degree of ease of transition to a special play state) or a second display including a predetermined display capable of suggesting the degree of expectation, for a time shorter than the variable time corresponding to the manner of the selected variable display.

In this way, the player can operate the operating means during a non-play state to display the corresponding display that corresponds to the variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means, and visually confirm what kind of display (the first display or the specified display included in the second display) that can suggest the degree of expectation of transitioning to the special game state is, even if the specified start condition is not met (even if the specified start condition is not met). Therefore, in a configuration in which the variable display that is displayed when the start condition is met includes the first display or the second display that can suggest the degree of expectation, it is possible to improve the playability of inferring an event that can be expected after the variable display (for example, the degree of ease of transitioning to the special game state) from the content of the variable display, and thereby to increase the attention to the gaming machine.

In particular, the corresponding display that is displayed when the player operates the operating means during a non-play state is displayed on the display unit for a time shorter than the change time corresponding to the mode of the change display selected by the display selection means, so that the display (the first display or a predetermined display included in the second display) that can suggest the likelihood of transitioning to a special play state can be efficiently viewed within a time shorter than the change time.

The non-play state of the gaming machine described in feature G1 may be a non-play state in which no variable display is performed before the lottery result is displayed, or a non-play state in which the machine is waiting for a player to play, or, instead of describing the non-play state, may be an operable state in which a specified operation can be performed on a specified operating means or a specified operating unit.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in feature G1, "the variable display selected (by the display selection means)" may be from the start to the end of the variable display, or may include the state before or at the start of the variable display in addition to the start to the end of the variable display.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in feature G1, the "corresponding display" may be the variable display itself selected by the display selection means, or may be a variable display in which part of the variable display is omitted.

<Feature G2>
A gaming machine according to feature G1,
As a mode that can be selected by the display selection means, a plurality of types of modes including at least one of the first display and the second display as a plurality of different display effects that can be executed at the same timing after the start of the variable display are set,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when a player operates the operating means during the non-play state, the display control means causes the display unit to simultaneously display two or more of the multiple types of display effects which can be selected by the display selection means and which can be executed at the same timing, in a smaller size than when a variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed when the specified start condition is met.

In the case of a gaming machine described in feature G2, when a player operates the operating means during a non-play state, at least one of a first display (a display included in the variable display that can suggest the expectation of transitioning to a special gaming state) or a second display (a display included in the variable display that can suggest the expectation of transitioning to a special gaming state) as a plurality of different display effects preset for the mode of the variable display selected by the display selection means is displayed simultaneously on the display unit by the display control means in a smaller size than when the variable display selected by the display selection means is displayed when a predetermined start condition is met.

In other words, since two or more first displays or two or more second displays can be simultaneously displayed on the display unit at the same timing after the start of the variable display, the player can simultaneously view displays (first displays or predetermined displays included in the second displays) that can suggest two or more degrees of expectation that can appear in separate variable displays executed by the satisfaction of multiple start conditions during a non-play state. Therefore, since the player can efficiently recognize the difference between displays that can suggest two or more degrees of expectation during a non-play state, it becomes easier to play while recognizing the difference in the degree of expectation that corresponds to the difference in the display that can suggest the degree of expectation.

In addition, the two or more first displays or the two or more second displays displayed simultaneously are displayed in a smaller size than when the variable display selected by the display selection means is displayed when a predetermined start condition is met, so that the player can easily recognize that the first display or the second display is a display that is unlikely to result in a special game state after its display, based on its display size.

<Feature H1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operation means (a pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by a player;
a display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a mode of variable display (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is established, and for selecting a mode selectable when the predetermined start condition is established as the mode of variable display to be displayed on the display unit when the player operates the operation means during a non-play state in which no variable display is being performed before the lottery result is displayed;
and a display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying on the display unit a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is established,
The display control means, when a player operates the operating means during the non-play state, causes the display unit to display a corresponding display (a pseudo-variable display for demonstration purposes) consisting of at least a part of the variable display in the manner selected by the display selection means and a display corresponding to the lottery result for the corresponding display, and also causes the display unit to display at least a part of the corresponding display or at least one of the display corresponding to the lottery result in a smaller size than when the variable display in the manner selected by the display selection means or the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed when the specified start condition is met.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature H1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying a presentation image. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the gaming machine is configured to be capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and the result of the lottery performed by the lottery means on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is met.

When a predetermined start condition is met, the display selection means selects the mode (specific content) of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit. Also, when a predetermined start condition is met, the display control means displays the variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit.

On the other hand, when a player operates the operating means during a non-play state in which no variable display is being performed before the lottery result is displayed by the lottery means (when the non-play state is waiting for the player to play), the display selection means selects a variable display that is selectable when a predetermined start condition is met as the variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit. Then, when a player operates the operating means during a non-play state, the display control means displays on the display unit a corresponding display consisting of at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means, and a display corresponding to the lottery result for the corresponding display.

By operating the operating means during a non-play state, the player can visually recognize at least a portion of the variable display that can be displayed when a specified start condition is met as the corresponding display. Therefore, since the configuration allows at least a portion of the variable display that can be displayed when a start condition is met to be displayed during a non-play state, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the playability brought about by the variable display that is displayed when a start condition is met, and thereby to increase the attention paid to the gaming machine.

In particular, when the player operates the operating means during a non-play state, the display control means displays at least a portion of the corresponding display (at least a portion of the variable display in the manner selected by the display selection means) or at least one of the displays corresponding to the lottery result in a smaller size on the display unit than when the variable display in the manner selected by the display selection means or the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed when a predetermined start condition is met.

This allows the player to conveniently recognize, based on the display size, that a part or all of the corresponding display (at least a part of the variable display) displayed on the display unit after a specified operation is performed on the operating means during a non-play state, or a display corresponding to a lottery result, is a display that is unlikely to result in a special play state after the corresponding display has ended or after the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed, unlike a variable display or lottery result that is displayed based on the fulfillment of a specified start condition.

Therefore, when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means while in a non-playing state, the player can be prevented from mistaking an event that is impossible during the non-playing state, such as the occurrence of a special game state after a corresponding display displayed on the display unit based on the predetermined operation. This can effectively prevent the occurrence of situations that are unfavorable to players and game center staff, such as a player mistaking a corresponding display displayed on the display unit or a display corresponding to a lottery result due to operating the operating means while in a non-playing state, leading to expectations of the occurrence of a special game state that should not occur.

The non-play state of the gaming machine described in feature H1 may be a non-play state in which no variable display is performed before the lottery result is displayed, or a non-play state in which the machine is waiting for a player to play, or, instead of describing the non-play state, may be an operable state in which a specified operation can be performed on a specified operating means or a specified operating unit.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in feature H1, "the variable display in the manner selected by the display selection means" may be from the start to the end of the variable display, or may include the state before or at the start of the variable display in addition to the start to the end of the variable display.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in feature H1, the "corresponding display" may be the variable display itself selected by the display selection means, or may be a variable display in which part of the variable display is omitted.

<Feature H2>
A gaming machine according to feature H1,
As a mode that can be selected by the display selection means, a mode including a plurality of different display effects that can be executed at the same timing after the start of the variable display is set,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when a player operates the operating means during the non-play state, the display control means causes the display unit to simultaneously display two or more of the multiple types of display effects which can be selected by the display selection means and which can be executed at the same timing, in a smaller size than when a variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed when the specified start condition is met.

In the case of a gaming machine described in feature H2, when a player operates the operating means during a non-playing state, two or more corresponding displays that correspond to two or more variable displays, respectively, and that are some or all of the multiple types of variable displays prepared in advance for the mode selected by the display selection means, become the display objects, and at least a portion of each of the two or more corresponding displays that are the display objects are displayed simultaneously on the display unit by the display control means in a smaller size than when the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed when a predetermined start condition is met.

In other words, when there are two or more corresponding displays to be displayed, at least a portion of each of the two or more corresponding displays can be displayed simultaneously on the display unit, allowing the player to simultaneously view all display effects that may be executed at the same time during a non-playing state.

Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which a variable display including a display effect capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to a special game state is prepared, a player can efficiently recognize the difference between two or more display effects capable of suggesting the degree of expectation that may be executed at the same timing by operating the operating means during a non-game state, by visually checking the variable display after the effect. This makes it easier for the player to play the game while recognizing the difference in the degree of expectation according to the difference in the display capable of suggesting the degree of expectation.

<Feature H3>
A gaming machine according to feature H2,
The display performance includes at least one of a first display (suggestion performance) that is a display included in the variable display selected by the display selection means and is capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the special game state, or a second display that includes a predetermined display (hold display 1622, suggestion display 1623) that is a display included in the variable display selected by the display selection means and is capable of suggesting the degree of expectation,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when a player operates the operating means during the non-play state, the display control means simultaneously displays on the display unit at least one of the first display or the second display included in each of the two or more corresponding displays that are the display targets in a smaller size than when a variable display in the manner selected by the display selection means is displayed when the specified start condition is met.

In the case of a gaming machine described in feature H3, when a player operates the operating means during a non-play state, at least one of the first display (a display capable of suggesting the likelihood of transitioning to a special gaming state) or the second display (a display including a predetermined display capable of suggesting the likelihood of transitioning to a special gaming state) included in each of the two or more corresponding displays to be displayed is displayed simultaneously on the display unit in a smaller size than when a variable display in a manner selected by the display selection means is displayed when a predetermined start condition is met.

In other words, since two or more first displays or two or more second displays can be simultaneously displayed on the display unit at the same timing after the start of the variable display, the player can simultaneously view displays (first displays or predetermined displays included in the second displays) that can suggest two or more degrees of expectation that can appear in separate variable displays executed by the satisfaction of multiple start conditions during a non-play state. Therefore, since the player can efficiently recognize the difference between displays that can suggest two or more degrees of expectation during a non-play state, it becomes easier to play while recognizing the difference in the degree of expectation that corresponds to the difference in the display that can suggest the degree of expectation.

<Feature J1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operation means (button operation unit 850, operation cover member 870) that is operable by a player and has an operated portion (operated portion 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and that is located in a predetermined neutral position when the operated portion is not operated;
an operating means (operating mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means in the neutral position when the operated portion is not operated, and capable of moving the position of the operating means in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without a player's operation on the operated portion;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the movement of the position of the operating means by the actuation means;
a display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a mode of variable display (specific content of variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is established, the display selection means selecting a mode that can be selected when the predetermined start condition is established as the mode of variable display to be displayed on the display unit when a player operates the operation means located at the neutral position during a non-skill state in which no variable display is being performed before the lottery result is displayed;
a display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying on the display unit a variable display in the manner selected by the display selection means when the predetermined start condition is established, and displaying on the display unit a lottery result by the lottery means, and for displaying on the display unit at least a variable display in the manner selected by the display selection means when a player operates the operation means during the non-play state;
The display mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode,
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, if the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction from the neutral position during a period in which the operation means can be operated, the display control means displays on the display part a predetermined performance prepared to be capable of appearing in the specific variable display;
when the player operates the operation means during the non-play state and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, during a period in which the operation means is operable, the action control means moves the operated portion from the neutral position in the predetermined direction, and then moves the operated portion in the opposite direction to the neutral position;
The display control means is configured to, when a player operates the operating means during the non-play state and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, cause the operation control means to move the operated portion from the neutral position in the specified direction, to cause the display portion to display a specified presentation prepared to be displayed in the specific variable display.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature J1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying a presentation image. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the gaming machine is configured to be capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and the result of the lottery performed by the lottery means on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is met.

When a predetermined start condition is met, the display selection means selects the mode (specific content) of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit. Also, when a predetermined start condition is met, the display control means displays the variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to be held in a predetermined neutral position by the actuation means when the operated part is not being operated. As a result, the operating means is positioned in the predetermined neutral position when the operated part is not being operated. The operating means is configured to be able to move the position of the operating means in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, without the player operating the operated part, under the control of the actuation means.

When a player operates the operating means during a non-play state in which no variable display is being performed before the lottery result is displayed by the lottery means (during a non-play state in which the game is waiting for the player to play), the display selection means selects, as the variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit, a mode that is selectable when a predetermined start condition is met, and is a variable display mode that is selectable when the predetermined start condition is met. Then, when a player operates the operating means during a non-play state, the display control means causes at least the variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means to be displayed on the display unit.

By operating the operating means during a non-play state, the player can visually confirm the variable display that can be displayed when a predetermined start condition is met. Therefore, since the variable display that can be displayed when a start condition is met can be displayed during a non-play state, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the gameplay brought about by the variable display that is displayed when a start condition is met, and this can increase the attention paid to the gaming machine.

The variable display selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display that includes a period during which the player can operate the operation means during that period of the variable display, and when a specified start condition is met and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means (when a specified start condition is met and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means), when the player operates the operated part from the neutral position in a specified direction during the period during which the operation means can be operated in that specific variable display, a specified effect that has been prepared to be made visible in that specific variable display is displayed on the display unit by the display control means.

When a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operation means during a non-play state (when the player operates the operation means during a non-play state and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means), during the period in which the operated part can be operated, the operation control means moves the operated part from the neutral position in a specified direction, and then the operated part is moved in the direction opposite to the specified direction to the neutral position. Thus, when a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operation means during a non-play state, during the period in which the operated part can be operated during the specific variable display, the operated part automatically moves back and forth as if it had been operated by the player.

As a result, when a specific variable display is displayed as a result of the player operating the operating means during a non-playing state, during the period during which the operated part is operable during the specific variable display, it is possible to simulate a situation in which the operated part is operated by the player, without the player actually operating the operated part.

Then, when the operation control means moves the operated part from the neutral position in a predetermined direction, the display control means displays on the display part a predetermined effect that has been prepared to appear in the specific variable display. Therefore, when a specific variable display is displayed as a result of the player operating the operating means while in a non-playing state, the player can virtually experience what kind of effect would appear if the operated part were operated during the period in which the operated part in the specific variable display is operable, without actually operating the operated part.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a specific variable display (a variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operating means) can be displayed as a variable display when the starting condition is met, the player can virtually experience the specific variable display while in a non-playing state, which can increase the player's interest in the gameplay brought about by the specific variable display in which a predetermined effect can be displayed through the player's participation, thereby increasing the attention paid to the gaming machine.

The non-play state of the gaming machine described in feature J1 may be a non-play state in which no variable display is performed before the lottery result is displayed, or a non-play state in which the game is waiting for the player to play, or instead of describing the non-play state, it may be an operable state in which a specified operation can be performed on a specified operating means or a specified operating unit.

<Feature J2>
A gaming machine according to feature J0 or feature J1,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a non-game state ending means (sub-control board 940) which ends the non-game state when the player operates the operated part in the specified direction while the variable display based on the player's operation of the operating means during the non-game state is being displayed.

In the case of a gaming machine described in feature J2, if the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction while a variable display based on the player's operation of the operating means during a non-play state is being displayed, the non-play state is terminated by the non-play state termination means. Therefore, the variable display displayed during the non-play state (the variable display displayed based on the player's operation of the operating means during a non-play state) can be easily terminated by the player's operation of the operated means (more specifically, the player's operation of the operated part in a predetermined direction).

<Feature K1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine equipped with a display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display (stop display) corresponding to the lottery result,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a display control means (sub-control board 940) which controls the display unit to display the specified variable display and the result display when the specified start condition is satisfied, and which controls the display unit to display, when the specified display condition (start winning of a special pattern, when the push operation device is pushed during a non-play state) a variable display image including at least a part of the variable display that is displayed when the specified start condition is satisfied, a gaming machine image (gaming machine image 1701) corresponding to the gaming machine for which the variable display image is displayed on the display unit, and a player image (player image 1702) corresponding to the player located in front of the gaming machine.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature K1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying presentation images. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined start condition is met, a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means under the control of the display control means.

When a predetermined display condition is met in the gaming machine, the display control means controls the display unit to display a variable display image including at least a part of the variable display that is displayed when a predetermined start condition is met, a gaming machine image corresponding to the gaming machine on which the variable display image is displayed on the display unit, and a player image corresponding to the player positioned in front of the gaming machine. Therefore, a player playing the gaming machine can convey various information to the player, such as the player's emotions according to the expectation level indicated by the performance that appears in the variable display with respect to the current variable display that is displayed based on the fulfillment of the display condition, and the method of operating the gaming machine, through the actions and appearance of the player in the player image playing the gaming machine in the gaming machine image displayed on the display unit.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in feature K1, the variable display that is displayed when a specified display condition is met may be configured to display, at the end of the variable display, a result display using at least a part of the gaming machine image or the player image.

<Feature K2>
A gaming machine according to feature K1,
The display control means controls the display of at least one of the gaming machine image and the player image on the display unit so that at least a portion of the gaming machine image or the player image is displayed differently depending on whether the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result or not.

In the case of a gaming machine described in feature K2, when a gaming machine image and a player image are displayed on the display unit, at least one of the gaming machine image and the player image is displayed with at least a portion different depending on whether the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result, under the control of the display control means. Thus, the result of the lottery by the lottery means can be suggested to the player by the difference in at least a portion of at least one of the gaming machine image and the player image.

<Feature K3>
A gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
The display control means of this gaming machine is characterized in that, at the timing when the result display is to be displayed, the display control means at least performs control to change the player image to an image corresponding to the result display in the event of the specified result (winning a jackpot) without displaying the result display.

In the case of a gaming machine described in feature K3, at the timing when the result display is to be displayed, the display control means controls the player image to change to an image corresponding to the result display in the case of a predetermined result, without displaying the result display. Therefore, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result that generates a special gaming state, the result can be clearly indicated to the player.

<Feature L1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the predetermined variation display and the result display when the predetermined start condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display control means is configured to be able to execute a first lottery result display control which displays the result display in a predetermined manner (combination of decorative patterns) when the predetermined start condition is met and the variable display is displayed on the display unit, and a second lottery result display control which displays the result display by the first lottery result display control in a manner (deformed, reduced) different from the predetermined manner when the variable display is displayed on the display unit, or displays a predetermined image (alternative display 1625) having content different from the result display by the first result display control and corresponding to the predetermined result (winning a jackpot).

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature L1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying a result display corresponding to a lottery result. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is met and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined start condition is met, the display control means controls the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means to be displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

In the gaming machine, the display control means is configured to be able to execute a first lottery result display control and a second lottery result display control. Specifically, according to the first lottery result display control, when a predetermined start condition is met and a variable display is displayed on the display unit, a result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, according to the second lottery result display control, when a variable display is displayed on the display unit, the result display by the first lottery result display control is displayed in a manner different from the predetermined manner, or a predetermined image having different contents from the result display by the first lottery result display control and corresponding to a predetermined result is displayed. Therefore, the lottery result displayed by the second lottery result display control has a different display manner or different contents from the lottery result displayed by the first lottery result display control, so that it is possible to increase the variation in the display of the lottery result, and it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the lottery result due to deformation, reduction, etc., or an image with different contents. This makes it possible to provide a playability in which the lottery result is closely watched when it is displayed.

<Characteristic M1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated portion;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided,
The display control means controls the display unit to display, when the specified start condition is met and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, an image (performance image 1712) including the operated part and a part of the body (left hand 1712B) in contact with or close to the operated part, in which the part of the body moves to perform an operation on the operating means (a movement operation on the operated part) during the operation possible period.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature M1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying a presentation image. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured so that the operated part can be placed in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated part can be changed.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to that mode. Then, in the gaming machine, when a predetermined start condition is met and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, an image including an operated portion of the operation means and a part of the body in contact with or close to the operated portion, in which the part of the body moves to operate the operation means (movement operation on the operated portion), is displayed on the display unit during the operable period during which the player can operate the operation means, under the control of the display control means. For this reason, the content of the displayed image (an image in which a part of the body in contact with or close to the operated portion of the operation means moves to operate the operation means) can suggest to the player how to operate the operation means.

<Characteristic M2>
A gaming machine according to feature M1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the specified start condition is met and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the display control means controls the display unit to display, during the operation possible period, an image of a part of the body moving and performing an operation on the operation means, together with an image showing information related to the operation on the operation means (text information in the form of a string of characters such as ``Continuous hits!'').

In the case of a gaming machine described in feature M2, when a predetermined start condition is met and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the display control means controls the display unit to display, during the operable period in which the player can operate the operating means, an image showing information related to the operation of the operating means (display information 1713) along with an image of a part of the body in contact with or close to the operated part of the operating means moving to operate the operating means, so that the image showing the information related to the operation of the operating means can clearly suggest to the player how to operate the operating means.

<Feature N1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated portion;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the specified start condition is met and the display selection means selects the specific variable display, the display control means controls the display unit to display, during the operable period, a moving image (presentation image 1715) representing the operation of the operating means, wherein the position of the operated part of the operating means includes at least one of a displacement amount different from the displacement amount controlled by the operation control means, or a reciprocating speed different from the reciprocating speed controlled by the operation control means.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature N1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying a presentation image. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is established and a lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is established, a display selection means selects a mode of a variable display to be displayed on a display unit, and under the control of the display control means, a variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured so that the operated part can be placed in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated part can be changed.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to that mode. Then, in the gaming machine, when a predetermined start condition is met and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, a moving image that represents the operation of the operating means during the operable period during which the player can operate the operating means is displayed on the display unit under the control of the display control means, the moving image including at least one of a mode in which the position of the operated part of the operating means has a displacement amount different from the displacement amount controlled by the operation control means, or a mode in which the position has a reciprocating speed different from the reciprocating speed controlled by the operation control means. This makes it possible to easily suggest to the player the operation of the operating means controlled by the operation control means.

<Feature N2>
A gaming machine according to feature N1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means performs control to operate the operating means to change the position of the operated portion while the moving image is being displayed on the display portion.

In the gaming machine described in feature N2, when a moving image is displayed on the display unit, the operating means operates under the control of the operation control means, thereby changing the position of the operated part. Therefore, by allowing the player to visually recognize the moving image displayed on the display unit during the operation of the operating means that changes the position of the operated part, the operating mode of the operating means can be specifically understood.

<Characteristic P1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated portion;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided,
A gaming machine characterized in that the operation control means controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position to the specified direction or a direction opposite to the specified direction during at least a portion of the period from the start to the end of the operable period.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature P1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is met, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured so that the operated part can be placed in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated part can be changed.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to that mode is provided. Then, in the gaming machine, the position of the operated part is configured to be displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the control of the operation control means during at least a portion of the period from the start to the end of the operable period. Therefore, the player can be made to know the remaining time of the operable period through the position of the operated part (for example, the height position of the operated part). For example, even in a situation where a game is being played without visually checking a display device capable of displaying a variable display, the player can be made to know that an operable period has occurred and the length of time remaining through the position of the operated part.

<Feature Q1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display control means is configured to be able to execute at least the following controls: control to display a predetermined effect when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means; and control to display the predetermined effect when the position of the operated part is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position under the control of the operation control means.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature Q1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is met, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of at least displaying the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so as to be able to change the position of the operated part. By controlling the operation control means, the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In this gaming machine, the display control means is configured to be capable of at least controlling the display of a predetermined effect when the position of the operated part is displaced from a neutral position to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means, and controlling the display of a predetermined effect when the position of the operated part is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position under the control of the operation control means. Therefore, even though the player can visually recognize the operated part of the operating means and recognize the position (e.g., height position) of the operated part, or place his/her hand on the operated part and feel the change in the position of the operated part, it is difficult to understand the correspondence between the amount of operation and the trigger for the effect to be executed, and this provides a gameplay in which the trigger for the execution of the same effect is associated with the height positions of multiple types of operating surfaces.

<Feature R1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display control means is configured to be able to execute at least the following controls: control to display a predetermined first effect when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means; and control to display a predetermined second effect different from the first effect when the position of the operated part is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position under the control of the operation control means.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature R1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is met, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so as to be able to change the position of the operated part. By controlling the operation control means, the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the display control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a control for making a predetermined first effect appear when the position of the operated part is displaced from a neutral position to a predetermined first position by the control of the action control means, and a control for making a predetermined second effect different from the first effect appear when the position of the operated part is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position by the control of the action control means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gameplay in which a player can visually recognize the operated part of the operating means and recognize the position (e.g., height position) of the operated part, or place his/her hand on the operated part and feel the change in the position of the operated part, while expecting the execution of different effects that are set separately according to the amount of operation.

<Characteristic S1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operating means so as to change at least one of the position of the operated part or the magnitude of a reaction force against the moving operation of the operated part;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means is configured to at least execute the following controls when the specified start condition is met, the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, and the operated part is operated to move a specified amount in the specified direction during the operable period: control to set the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the specified amount of movement to a specified first magnitude, and control to set the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the specified amount of movement to a second magnitude different from the first magnitude.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature S1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operation means operable by the player is provided with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operation means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means to be able to change at least one of the position of the operated part and the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation of moving the operated part.

Here, as the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided. In the gaming machine, the operation control means is configured to at least execute the following control when a predetermined start condition is established and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means and the operated part is operated to move a predetermined amount in a predetermined direction during the operable period: control to set the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the operated part has moved a predetermined amount to a predetermined first magnitude, and control to set the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the operated part has moved a predetermined amount to a second magnitude different from the first magnitude. Therefore, the player can feel in advance the degree of the force required to operate the operated part of the operating means to operate the operated part, and then can easily feel the degree of the operating feel that is different from that feel. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the difference in the operating feel when multiple types of operating feel are provided on the operating means, and information to be conveyed to the player by the difference in the operating feel, such as a change in expectation, can be accurately conveyed.

<Feature S2>
A gaming machine according to feature S1,
The specific variable display is configured to be able to display one of a plurality of types of effects when the operation means is operated during the operable period,
The display control means is configured to be capable of at least executing a control to cause a predetermined first performance among the plurality of types of performances to appear and a control to cause a second performance different from the first performance to appear when the predetermined start condition is established and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means and the operation means is operated during the operable period;
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the specified start condition is satisfied, and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means and the operated part is moved a specified amount in the specified direction during the operable period, the operation control means controls the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the specified amount of movement to be the first magnitude when the first presentation is displayed by the display control means, and controls the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the specified amount of movement to be the second magnitude when the second presentation is displayed by the display control means.

In the gaming machine described in feature S2, the specific variable display is configured to be capable of causing one of the multiple types of effects to appear when the operation means is operated during an operable period in which the player can operate the operation means. The display control means is configured to be capable of at least executing control to cause a specific first effect to appear among the multiple types of effects and control to cause a second effect different from the first effect to appear when a specific starting condition is established and the display selection means selects the specific variable display and the operation means is operated during the operable period.

In the gaming machine, when a predetermined start condition is met, and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means and the operated part is operated to move a predetermined amount in a predetermined direction during the operable period, the operation control means controls the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the operated part has moved the predetermined amount to a first magnitude when a first effect is produced by the display control means, and controls the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the operated part has moved the predetermined amount to a second magnitude when a second effect is produced by the display control means. This makes it possible to provide a gameplay in which, when a player operates the operating means, the player can expect the execution of different effects that have been set separately depending on the degree of the operating feel for the operating means.

<Feature T1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the predetermined variation display and the result display when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
and an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated part can be changed according to the progress of the variable display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the specified start condition is satisfied, the operation control means controls the position of the operated part to gradually displace from the neutral position to the specified direction or a direction opposite to the specified direction, depending on the progress of the varying display during at least a portion of the varying period from the start of the varying display by the display control means to the end of the varying display.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature T1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means under the control of the display control means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated part can be changed in accordance with the progress of the variable display.

In this gaming machine, when a predetermined starting condition is met, the position of the operated part is gradually displaced from a neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, according to the progress of the variable display during at least a portion of the variable display period from the start of the variable display by the display control means to the end of the variable display, under the control of the operation control means. This provides gameplay that allows the player to recognize the progress of the variable display by visually recognizing the change in position of the operated part on the operating means (for example, a change in height) or by the sensation of touching the operated part.

<Feature T2>
A gaming machine according to feature T1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the specified start condition is satisfied, the operation control means controls the position of the operated part to gradually displace at an approximately constant speed from the neutral position to a specified end position in the specified direction or the opposite direction in accordance with the progress of the changing display during the changing period.

In the gaming machine described in feature T2, when a predetermined starting condition is met, the position of the operated part is gradually displaced at a substantially constant speed from a neutral position to a predetermined end position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, according to the progress of the variable display during the variable period (at least a portion of the period from the start of the variable display by the display control means to the end of the variable display) under the control of the operation control means. This provides gameplay in which the player can recognize the progress of the variable display by visually recognizing the change in position of the operated part on the operating means (for example, a change in height) or by the sensation of touching the operated part.

<Feature U1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the predetermined variation display and the result display when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated portion;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a state control means (sub-control board 940) which, when the operating means is operated, controls the state of a predetermined event (progression of a variable display, progress of a predetermined period of time measured during play) which is started based on the fulfillment of the specified start condition and which would end after a specified time if the operation is not performed, to advance from the state when the operation was performed in accordance with the amount of operation by the operation.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature U1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined start condition is met, a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means under the control of the display control means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured so that the operated part can be placed in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated part can be changed.

In this gaming machine, when the operating means is operated, the state control means controls the state of a predetermined event that would end after a predetermined time if the operation was not performed, so that the state of the predetermined event advances from the state at the time the operation was performed in accordance with the amount of operation performed by the operation. Therefore, when a player wishes to advance the progress of the variable display, the player can easily advance to the desired section, thereby providing a gameplay experience that allows the player to view in advance effects that were intended to be viewed later.

<Feature V1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
A display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the display unit to display the predetermined variation display and the result display when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
and an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the position of the operated part can be changed according to the progress of the variable display,
The display control means advances the progress (playback position) of the varying display from the timing when an operation is performed on the operating means in accordance with the speed and amount of operation performed by the operation, and, when the operation is terminated, controls the progress of the varying display to return to the timing when the operation was performed or to the timing as if the progress had progressed without the operation being performed.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature V1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined start condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined start condition is met, a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means under the control of the display control means.

The operation means operable by the player is provided with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the operation of the player. The operation means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not being operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated part can be changed according to the progress of the variable display.

In this gaming machine, the progress of the variable display progresses from the timing when an operation is performed on the operating means according to the speed and amount of the operation, by the control of the display control means, and when the operation is terminated, the progress of the variable display returns to the timing when the operation was performed or the timing that would have progressed without the operation being performed. Therefore, in a configuration in which the control of the progress of the variable display in the first control board (first control means) and the control of the progress of the variable display in the second control board (second control means) are synchronized, the control of the progress of the variable display in each control board can be synchronized to fast-forward the variable display, adding a gameplay feature that allows future events to be recognized in advance.

<Characteristic W1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated portion;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided,
The specific variable display is configured to be able to produce a predetermined effect when the operating means is operated during the operable period,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display control means is configured to at least execute the following controls: when the specified start condition is satisfied, the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, and the operated part is moved in the specified direction by an operation on the operating means during the operable period, control to make the specified presentation appear when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a specified first position by the operation; and control to make the specified presentation appear when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a specified second position away from the first position in the specified direction by the operation.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature W1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is met, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured so that the operated part can be placed in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated part can be changed.

Here, as the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to that mode, and the specific variable display is configured so that a predetermined presentation can be made to appear when the operation means is operated during the operable period.

In the gaming machine, the display control means is configured to execute at least the following controls: when a predetermined start condition is met, a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, and the operated part is moved in a predetermined direction by an operation on the operating means during the operable period, control to make a predetermined presentation appear when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the operation; and control to make a predetermined presentation appear when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined second position away from the first position in a predetermined direction by the operation. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the correspondence between the amount of operation on the operating means and the presentation to be executed, and provides a gameplay in which the trigger for the execution of the same presentation is associated with multiple types of operation amounts.

<Feature X1>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated portion;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
As a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display including an operable period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode is provided,
The specific variable display is configured to be able to display one of a plurality of types of effects when the operating means is operated during the operable period,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display control means is configured to at least execute the following controls: when the specified start condition is satisfied, the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, and the operated part is moved in the specified direction by an operation on the operating means during the operable period, control to cause a specified first effect among the multiple types of effects to appear when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a specified first position by the operation; and control to cause a specified second effect, different from the first effect, among the multiple types of effects to appear when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a specified second position away from the first position in the specified direction by the operation.

A typical example of an amusement machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in the play area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine transitions to a special play state that is more advantageous than the normal play state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature X1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured so that the operated part can be placed in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated part can be changed.

Here, as the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to that mode, and the specific variable display is configured so that one of multiple types of effects can be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operable period.

In the gaming machine, the display control means is configured to at least execute the following controls: when a predetermined start condition is met, a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, and the operated part is moved in a predetermined direction by an operation on the operation means during an operable period, control to make a predetermined first effect appear among the multiple types of effects when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the operation; and control to make a predetermined second effect different from the first effect appear among the multiple types of effects when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined second position away from the first position in a predetermined direction by the operation. This provides the player with a gameplay experience that allows him or her to expect the execution of different effects that are set according to the amount of operation.

<Characteristics of Z series>
A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a gaming area and a jackpot is won in a lottery held in response to the ball, the machine is configured to transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state (for example, JP 2011-31031 A).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

<Characteristic Za>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display control means is configured to at least execute control to cause a predetermined effect to appear when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in the opposite direction to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means, and control to cause the predetermined effect to appear when the position of the operated part is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position under the control of the operation control means.

The gaming machine described in feature Za can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so as to be able to change the position of the operated part. By controlling the operation control means, the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the display control means is configured to be capable of at least controlling the display of a predetermined presentation when the position of the operated part is displaced from a neutral position in the opposite direction to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means, and controlling the display of a predetermined presentation when the position of the operated part is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position under the control of the operation control means.

As a result, even though the player can visually see the operated part of the operating means and recognize the position of the operated part (for example, the return position in the opposite direction after operating the operated part), or place his/her hand on the operated part and feel the change in position of the operated part, it is difficult for him/her to understand the correspondence between the amount of operation and the trigger for the performance to be executed, thereby providing a gameplay in which the trigger for the execution of the same performance is associated with the return positions of multiple types of operating surfaces.

<Features ZB>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
an operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operating unit (operated unit 852, operating cover member 870) that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and can move in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press, and that can place the operating unit in a predetermined neutral position when not in contact with a part of the player's body;
A motion control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the motion of the motion means so as to change the position of the motion unit, and controls the position of the motion unit to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display control means is configured to at least execute control to cause a predetermined first effect to appear when the position of the operating part is displaced from the neutral position in the opposite direction to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means, and control to cause a predetermined second effect different from the first effect to appear when the position of the operating part is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position under the control of the operation control means.

In the gaming machine described in feature ZB, the specified direction in which the player can press may be a direction in which the player can perform a pressing action so as to increase the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which the player can move part of the player's body away from the operating part.

<Characteristic Zb>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display control means is configured to at least execute control to cause a predetermined first effect to appear when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in the opposite direction to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means, and control to cause a predetermined second effect different from the first effect to appear when the position of the operated part is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position under the control of the operation control means.

A gaming machine described in feature ZB or feature Zb can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operating part that can be contacted by a part of the player's body or an operated part that can be operated by the player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means also includes an operating part that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and moved in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operating part in a predetermined neutral position when no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so as to change the position of the operated part. By controlling the operation control means, the position of the operating part or the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the display control means is configured to be capable of at least controlling the display of a predetermined first effect when the position of the operating part or the operated part is displaced from a neutral position in the opposite direction to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means, and controlling the display of a predetermined second effect different from the first effect when the position of the operating part or the operated part is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position under the control of the operation control means.

Therefore, when the operating part of the operating means or the operated part of the operating means is displaced in the opposite direction, the player can expect to see different effects set according to the amount of displacement (i.e., whether it has been displaced to the first position or to the second position). Also, the player can visually confirm the operating part of the operating means or the operated part of the operating means and recognize the position of the operating part or the operated part (for example, the return position in the opposite direction after being displaced in a predetermined direction), or place his/her hand on the operating part or the operated part and feel the change in the position of the operating part or the operated part, and can expect to see different effects set according to the amount of displacement.

<Characteristic Zc>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operating means so as to at least control the magnitude of a reaction force against the moving operation of the operated portion;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The display mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode,
The specific variable display is configured to be capable of displaying a performance selected from a plurality of types of performances with different expectancies when the operating means is operated during the period,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means is configured to be able to execute at least a first control in which, when a predetermined first presentation is executed as a presentation in the specific variable display, the operated part can be moved in a pressing operation direction while the player is pressing the operated part, and the reaction force in the pressing operation direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition, and when a second presentation having a different expectation level from the first presentation is executed as a presentation in the specific variable display, a second control in which the conditions for controlling the reaction force in a certain section are common to the first control, and the reaction force in the pressing operation direction is controlled based on a predetermined second condition including a section of control different from the first control.

The gaming machine described in feature Zc can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is met, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of at least displaying the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that at least the magnitude of the reaction force against the movement operation of the operated part can be controlled.

Here, as the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to that mode.
The specific variable display is configured so that, when the operating means is operated during the period, a presentation selected from a plurality of types of presentations having different degrees of expectation can be made to appear.

In the gaming machine, the operation control means is configured to execute at least a first control in which, when a predetermined first presentation is executed as a presentation in a specific variable display, the operated part can be moved in the pressing direction while the player is pressing the operated part, and the reaction force in the pressing direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition, and, when a second presentation having a different expectation level from the first presentation is executed as a presentation in a specific variable display, a second control in which the conditions for controlling the reaction force in the part of the first control are the same, and the reaction force in the pressing direction is controlled based on a predetermined second condition including a section of control different from the first control.

Therefore, when the first or second performance is executed in a specific variable display, the player can feel a similar reaction force in the pressing operation direction in at least some sections of each performance (i.e., sections where the conditions for controlling the reaction force are common), so that in that section, it is difficult for the player to tell from the feeling of the reaction force whether the performance being executed is the first performance or a second performance with a different expectation level from the first performance. This makes it possible to provide gameplay that allows players to expect the expectation level of a performance executed in a specific variable display that includes multiple performances with different expectation levels.

<Features ZD>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
an operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operating unit (operated unit 852, operating cover member 870) that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and can move in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press, and that can place the operating unit in a predetermined neutral position when not in contact with a part of the player's body;
A motion control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the motion of the motion means so as to change the position of the motion unit, and controls the position of the motion unit to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The display mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the operation unit is operable during the period of the variable display according to the mode,
The specific variable display is configured to be able to produce a performance selected from a plurality of types of performances with different expectations when the operation unit operates during the period,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means is configured to at least execute a first control in which, when a predetermined first presentation is executed as a presentation in the specific variable display, the operating part can be moved in the opposite direction when a part of the player's body is in contact with the operating part, and the reaction force of at least a portion of the section in the opposite direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition, and when a second presentation having a different expectation level from the first presentation is executed as a presentation in the specific variable display, a second control is controlled based on a predetermined second condition in which the reaction force of the portion of the section is different from that of the first control.

In the gaming machine described in feature ZD, the specified direction in which the player can press may be a direction in which the player can perform a pressing action so as to increase the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which the player can move part of the player's body away from the operating part.

<Characteristic Zd>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The display mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode,
The specific variable display is configured to be capable of displaying a performance selected from a plurality of types of performances with different expectancies when the operating means is operated during the period,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means is configured to at least execute a first control in which, when a predetermined first presentation is executed as a presentation in the specific variable display, the operated part can be moved in the opposite direction when the player presses the operated part in the predetermined direction, and the reaction force of at least a portion of the section in the opposite direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition, and when a second presentation having a different expectation level from the first presentation is executed as a presentation in the specific variable display, a second control is controlled based on a predetermined second condition in which the reaction force of the portion of the section is different from that of the first control.

A gaming machine described in Feature ZD or Feature Zd can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operating part that can be contacted by a part of the player's body or an operated part that can be operated by the player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means also includes an operating part that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and can move in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operating part in a predetermined neutral position when no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. Meanwhile, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operation means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so as to change the position of the operating part or the operated part. By controlling the operation control means, the position of the operating part or the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to that mode. The specific variable display is configured so that when the operation means is operated during that period, a presentation selected from a plurality of types of presentations with different degrees of expectation can be made to appear.

In the gaming machine, the operation control means is configured to execute at least a first control in which, when a predetermined first presentation is executed as a presentation in a specific variable display, the operating part or the operated part can be moved in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the operating part or the player is pressing the operated part in a predetermined direction, and the reaction force of at least a portion of the section in the opposite direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition, and, when a second presentation having a different expectation level from the first presentation is executed as a presentation in a specific variable display, a second control is controlled based on a predetermined second condition in which the reaction force of the portion of the section is different from that of the first control.

Therefore, in the first and second effects that can be executed in a specific variable display, the reaction force is different in at least a portion of the opposite direction, so in a situation where part of the player's body is in contact with the operating part, or in a situation where the player is pressing the operated part in a specified direction, it is difficult for the player to tell from the feeling of the reaction force in that portion of the section whether the effect being executed is the first effect or a second effect that has a different expectation level from the first effect. This makes it possible to provide a gameplay that allows players to expect the expectation level of an effect executed in a specific variable display that includes multiple effects with different expectation levels.

<Features Ze>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means is configured to be able to execute at least a first control in which, when a player moves the operated part along the specified direction, the operated part moves along the specified direction while generating a reaction force resisting the moving operation, and a second control in which, after the first control is executed, the operation of the operating means is controlled in a direction in which the operated part moves in the direction in which the moving operation was performed.

The gaming machine described in feature Ze can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of at least displaying the predetermined variable display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so as to be able to change the position of the operated part. By controlling the operation control means, the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the operation control means is configured to be able to execute at least a first control in which, when a player moves the operated part along a predetermined direction, the operated part moves along the predetermined direction while generating a reaction force that resists the movement operation, and a second control in which, after the first control is executed, the operation of the operating means is controlled so that the operated part moves in the direction of the movement operation.

Thus, after the player feels a reaction force resisting the movement operation while moving the operated part in a predetermined direction through a movement operation, the second control causes the operated part to move in the direction of the movement operation, and the player may feel that the reaction force has become smaller. In some cases, the movement speed of the operated part due to the operation may be so fast that something operating the operated part (for example, the player's hand) may move away from the operated part. This can add an element of surprise to the player's movement of the operated part, and provide a variety of gameplay features using the operating means.

<Characteristics of ZF>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
an operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operating unit (operated unit 852, operating cover member 870) that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and can move in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press, and that can place the operating unit in a predetermined neutral position when not in contact with a part of the player's body;
A motion control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the motion of the motion means so as to change the position of the motion unit, and controls the position of the motion unit to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the action control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first control that generates a reaction force capable of moving the action part in the opposite direction when part of the player's body is in contact with the action part, and a second control that controls the action of the action means in a direction in which the action part progresses in the specified direction after performing the first control.

In the gaming machine described in feature ZF, the specified direction in which the player can press may be a direction in which the player can perform a pressing action so as to increase the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which the player can move part of the player's body away from the operating part.

<Characteristic Zf>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first control that generates a reaction force capable of moving the operated part in the opposite direction when part of the player's body is in contact with the operated part, and a second control that controls the operation of the operating means in a direction in which the operated part moves in the specified direction after performing the first control.

A gaming machine described in feature ZF or feature Zf can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operating part that can be contacted by a part of the player's body or an operated part that can be operated by the player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means also includes an operating part that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and can move in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operating part in a predetermined neutral position when no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. Meanwhile, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operation means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so as to change the position of the operating part or the operated part. By controlling the operation control means, the position of the operating part or the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the action control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first control that generates a reaction force capable of moving the action part or the operated part in the opposite direction when a part of the player's body is in contact with the action part or the operated part, and a second control that controls the action of the action part or the operating means in a direction in which the action part or the operated part moves in a predetermined direction after the first control is executed.

Thus, after the player feels a reaction force capable of moving the operating part or operated part in the opposite direction when a part of the player's body is in contact with the operating part or operated part, the second control causes the operating part or operated part to move in a predetermined direction (i.e., the opposite direction to the opposite direction), and the player may feel that the reaction force has become smaller, and in some cases, the movement speed of the operated part due to this movement may be too fast, causing the part of the player (part of the body) that was in contact with the operating part or operated part to move away from the operating part or operated part. This makes it possible to add an element of surprise to the sensation the player receives from the operating part or operated part that can move in the opposite direction when a part of the player's body is in contact with it, and to provide a variety of playability using the operating means or operating means.

<Characteristic Zg>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means is configured to be able to execute at least a first control in which, when a player moves the operated part along the specified direction, the operated part moves along the specified direction while generating a reaction force that resists the movement operation, and a second control in which, after the first control is executed, the operation of the operating means is controlled so as to generate a reaction force that keeps the operated part at a certain position or within a certain range in the direction of the movement operation.

The gaming machine described in feature Zg can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so as to be able to change the position of the operated part. By controlling the operation control means, the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In this gaming machine, the operation control means is configured to be able to execute at least a first control in which, when a player moves the operated part in a predetermined direction, the operated part moves in the predetermined direction while generating a reaction force that resists the movement operation, and a second control in which, after the first control is executed, the operation of the operating means is controlled to generate a reaction force that keeps the operated part at a fixed position or within a fixed range in the direction in which the movement operation was performed.

Thus, after the player feels a reaction force resisting the movement operation while moving the operated part in a predetermined direction with the movement operation, the reaction force generated by the second control holds the operated part at a fixed position or within a fixed range in the direction of the movement operation, causing the player to feel as if the operated part, which he had been moving in the predetermined direction with his own movement operation, has suddenly stopped moving or the movement of the operated part has become slower. This makes it possible to add an element of surprise to the movement operation of the operated part by the player, and to provide a variety of gameplay features using the operating means.

<Features ZH>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
an operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operating unit (operated unit 852, operating cover member 870) that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and can move in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press, and that can place the operating unit in a predetermined neutral position when not in contact with a part of the player's body;
A motion control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the motion of the motion means so as to change the position of the motion unit, and controls the position of the motion unit to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the action control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first control that generates a reaction force capable of moving the action part in the opposite direction when part of the player's body is in contact with the action part, and a second control that controls the operation of the action means so as to generate a reaction force that keeps the action part at a predetermined position or within a predetermined range after performing the first control.

In the gaming machine described in feature ZH, the specified direction in which the player can press may be a direction in which the player can perform a pressing action so as to increase the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which the player can move part of the player's body away from the operating part.

<Feature Zh>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first control that generates a reaction force capable of moving the operated part in the opposite direction when part of the player's body is in contact with the operated part, and a second control that controls the operation of the operating means so as to generate a reaction force that keeps the operated part at a predetermined position or within a predetermined range after performing the first control.

A gaming machine described in feature ZH or feature Zh can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operating part that can be contacted by a part of the player's body or an operated part that can be operated by the player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means also includes an operating part that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and moved in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operating part in a predetermined neutral position when no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. Meanwhile, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operation means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so as to change the position of the operating part or the operated part. By controlling the operation control means, the position of the operating part or the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In this gaming machine, the action control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first control that generates a reaction force capable of moving the action part or the operated part in the opposite direction when a part of the player's body is in contact with the action part or the operated part, and a second control that controls the action of the action means or the operating means so as to generate a reaction force that keeps the action part or the operated part at a predetermined position or within a predetermined range after the first control is executed.

Thus, when a part of the player's body is in contact with the operating part or operated part, the player feels a reaction force capable of moving the operating part or operated part in the opposite direction, and then feels as if the operating part or operated part has suddenly stopped moving or has become less mobile, because the reaction force generated by the second control holds the operated part at a predetermined position or within a predetermined range in the direction of the movement operation. This makes it possible to add an element of surprise to the sensation the player receives from the operating part or operated part that can move in the opposite direction when a part of the player's body is in contact with it, and to provide a variety of playability using the operating means or operating means.

<Characteristic Zj>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first operation control that causes the operated part to operate in a first manner when a predetermined movement operation is performed in which a part of the player's body and the operated part move toward the predetermined direction and then a part of the player's body moves away from the operated part, and a second operation control that causes the operated part to operate in a second manner different from the first manner when the predetermined movement operation is performed.

The gaming machine described in the feature Zj can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit operable by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means when a predetermined starting condition is established is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is established, a mode of a variable display to be displayed on a display unit is selected by a display selection means, and under the control of the display control means, a variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so as to be able to change the position of the operated part. By controlling the operation control means, the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the motion control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first motion control that causes the operated part to move in a first manner when a predetermined movement operation is performed in which a part of the player's body and the operated part move in a predetermined direction and then the part moves away from the operated part, and a second motion control that causes the operated part to move in a second manner different from the first manner when the predetermined movement operation is performed.

Therefore, when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body and the operated part move in a predetermined direction and then the part moves away from the operated part, the manner of movement of the operated part can be made different between when the first movement control is performed and when the second movement control is performed. For example, when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body and the operated part move in a predetermined direction and then the part moves away from the operated part, the operated part can be made to move to a different position (for example, a different position in the height direction) or the moving speed of the operated part can be made different. This can add an element of surprise to the player's movement of the operated part, and can provide a variety of playability using the operating means.

<Features ZK>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
an operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operating unit (operated unit 852, operating cover member 870) that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and can move in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press, and that can place the operating unit in a predetermined neutral position when not in contact with a part of the player's body;
A motion control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the motion of the motion means so as to change the position of the motion unit, and controls the position of the motion unit to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the action control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first action control that causes the action unit to operate in a first manner when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body separates from the action unit after the part of the player's body and the action unit are displaced in the opposite direction, and a second action control that causes the action unit to operate in a second manner different from the first manner when the predetermined situation occurs.

In the gaming machine described in feature ZK, the specified direction in which the player can press may be a direction in which the player can perform a pressing action so as to increase the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which the player can move part of the player's body away from the operating part.

<Feature Zk>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first operation control that operates the operated part in a first manner when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body and the operated part are displaced in the opposite direction and then the part separates from the operated part, and a second operation control that operates the operated part in a second manner different from the first manner when the predetermined situation occurs.

A gaming machine described in feature ZK or feature Zk can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operating unit that can be contacted by a part of the player's body or an operated unit that can be operated by the player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means also includes an operating part that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and moved in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operating part in a predetermined neutral position when no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operation means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operating part or the operated part can be changed. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operating part or the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the action control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first action control that operates the action unit or the operated part in a first manner when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body separates from the action unit after the part of the player's body and the action unit are displaced in the opposite direction, or when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body separates from the operated part after the part of the player's body and the operated part are displaced in the opposite direction, and a second action control that operates the action unit or the operated part in a second manner different from the first manner when the predetermined situation occurs.

Therefore, when the first motion control is performed and when the second motion control is performed, the manner of motion of the operated part can be made different in a predetermined situation in which a part of the player's body separates from the operating part or the operated part after a part of the player's body and the operating part or the operated part are displaced in the opposite direction. For example, when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body separates from the operating part or the operated part after a part of the player's body and the operating part or the operated part move in the opposite direction, the operated part can be made to move to a different position (for example, a position with a different height) or the moving speed of the operated part can be made different. This can add surprise to the feeling that the player receives from the operating part or the operated part that can move in the opposite direction in a situation in which a part of the player's body is in contact with it, and can provide a variety of playability using the operating means or the operating means.

<Characteristics Zm>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The operation control means includes:
When the operating force of the player on the operated part is a predetermined magnitude, a predetermined reaction force is generated that moves the operated part in the predetermined direction in a predetermined movement pattern (a combination of a moving speed and a moving amount);
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be at least capable of executing control to generate a reaction force of a magnitude different from the specified reaction force so that the operated part moves in the pattern of the moving movement when the player's operating force on the operated part is different from the said magnitude, or so that the movement of the operated part approaches the pattern of the moving movement.

A gaming machine described in the feature Zm can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit operable by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means when a predetermined starting condition is established is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is established, a display selection means selects a mode of a variable display to be displayed on a display unit, and under the control of the display control means, a variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so as to be able to change the position of the operated part. By controlling the operation control means, the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the operation control means is configured to at least perform control such that, when the player's operating force on the operated part is of a predetermined magnitude, a predetermined reaction force is generated that causes the operated part to move in a predetermined movement pattern (combination of movement speed and movement amount) in a predetermined direction, and, when the player's operating force on the operated part is different from the aforementioned magnitude, a reaction force of a magnitude different from the aforementioned predetermined reaction force is generated so that the operated part moves in the movement pattern or the movement of the operated part approaches the movement pattern.

Therefore, even if a player operates the operated part with a predetermined operating force, or even if the player operates the operated part with an operating force different from the predetermined force, the operated part can be moved in a predetermined direction in a predetermined movement operation pattern or a pattern similar to the movement operation pattern. As a result, even if there is variation in the operating force applied to the operated part due to individual differences between players, each player can move the operated part in a predetermined direction in a pattern that is the same as or similar to (almost the same as) the predetermined movement operation pattern, providing a gameplay in which the operated part can be moved in the same or almost the same pattern for all players.

<Features ZN>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
an operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operating unit (operated unit 852, operating cover member 870) that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and can move in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press, and that can place the operating unit in a predetermined neutral position when not in contact with a part of the player's body;
A motion control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the motion of the motion means so as to change the position of the motion unit, and controls the position of the motion unit to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The operation control means includes:
When a contact force of a part of the player's body contacting the moving part in the predetermined direction is of a predetermined magnitude, a predetermined reaction force is generated that moves the moving part in the opposite direction in a predetermined movement movement pattern (a combination of a moving speed and a moving amount);
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to at least be capable of executing control to generate a reaction force of a magnitude different from the specified reaction force so that the operating part operates in the pattern of the moving movement when the contact force is different from the magnitude, or so that the operation of the operating part approaches the pattern of the moving movement.

In the gaming machine described in feature ZN, the specified direction in which the player can press may be a direction in which the player can perform a pressing action so as to increase the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which the player can move part of the player's body away from the operating part.

<Characteristics Zn>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The operation control means includes:
When an operating force applied to the operated part in the predetermined direction has a predetermined magnitude, a predetermined reaction force is generated that causes the operated part to move in the opposite direction in a predetermined movement pattern (a combination of a movement speed and a movement amount);
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to at least be capable of executing control to generate a reaction force of a magnitude different from the specified reaction force so that the operated part moves in the pattern of the moving movement when the operating force is different from the magnitude, or so that the movement of the operated part approaches the pattern of the moving movement.

A gaming machine described in feature ZN or feature Zn can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operating unit that can be contacted by a part of the player's body or an operated unit that can be operated by the player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means also includes an operating part that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and moved in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operating part in a predetermined neutral position when no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operation means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operating part or the operated part can be changed. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operating part or the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the operation control means is configured to at least perform the following control: when the contact force of a part of the player's body contacting the operating part in a predetermined direction is a predetermined magnitude, or when the operating force on the operated part in a predetermined direction is a predetermined magnitude, the operation control means generates a predetermined reaction force that causes the operating part or the operated part to move in a predetermined movement movement pattern (combination of movement speed and movement amount) in the opposite direction; and when the contact force is different from the magnitude, the operation part moves in the movement movement pattern or the movement of the operating part approaches the movement movement pattern, or when the operating force is different from the magnitude, the operated part moves in the movement movement pattern or the movement of the operated part approaches the movement movement pattern.

Therefore, whether the contact force applied by the player to the operating part or the operating force applied to the operated part is a predetermined magnitude or different from the predetermined magnitude, the operating part or the operated part can be moved in the opposite direction in a predetermined movement operation pattern or a pattern similar to the movement operation pattern. As a result, even if the contact force applied to the operating part or the operating force applied to the operated part varies due to individual differences between players, each player can move the operating part or the operated part in the opposite direction in the same or similar (almost the same) pattern as the predetermined movement operation pattern, providing a playability in which the operating part or the operated part can be moved in the same or almost the same pattern for all players.

<Characteristics Zp>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operating means so as to at least control the magnitude of a reaction force against the moving operation of the operated portion;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The display mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode,
The specific variable display is configured to be capable of producing a performance selected from a plurality of types of performances with different expectancies when the operating means is operated during the period,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first control that controls the operation of the operating means so that the operated part can move in the predetermined direction at a predetermined moving speed when a predetermined first presentation is executed as a presentation in the specific variable display, and a second control that controls the operation of the operating means so that the operated part can move in the predetermined direction at a speed different from the predetermined moving speed when a second presentation having a different expectation level from the first presentation is executed as a presentation in the specific variable display.

The gaming machine described in feature Zp can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operated unit that can be operated by a player. That is, in a gaming machine in which the gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is met and the result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is met, the display selection means selects the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means that can be operated by the player is equipped with an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that at least the magnitude of the reaction force against the movement operation of the operated part can be controlled.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to that mode. The specific variable display is configured so that when the operation means is operated during that period, a presentation selected from a plurality of types of presentations with different degrees of expectation can be made to appear.

The operation control means in the gaming machine is configured to be capable of executing at least a first control for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the operated part can move in a predetermined direction at a predetermined moving speed when a predetermined first presentation is executed as a presentation in a specific variable display, and a second control for controlling the operation of the operating means so that the operated part can move in a predetermined direction at a speed different from the predetermined moving speed when a second presentation having a different expectation level from the first presentation is executed as a presentation in a specific variable display.

As a result, the moving speed of the operated part moving in a specified direction can be made different when the first performance is executed and when the second performance is executed in a specific variable display, providing a gameplay that allows the player to infer the expectation of the performance executed in a specific variable display from the moving speed of the operated part.

<Characteristics ZQ>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
an operating means (button operating unit 850, operating cover member 870) that is provided with an operating unit (operated unit 852, operating cover member 870) that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and can move in a predetermined direction (downward) that the player can press, and that can place the operating unit in a predetermined neutral position when not in contact with a part of the player's body;
A motion control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the motion of the motion means so as to change the position of the motion unit, and controls the position of the motion unit to be displaced from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The display mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the operation unit is operable during the period of the variable display according to the mode,
The specific variable display is configured to be able to produce a performance selected from a plurality of types of performances with different expectations when the operation unit operates during the period,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first control that controls the operation of the operation means so that the operation unit can operate in the opposite direction at a predetermined moving speed when a predetermined first performance is executed as a performance in the specific variable display, and a second control that controls the operation of the operation means so that the operation unit can operate in the opposite direction at a speed different from the predetermined moving speed when a second performance having a different expectation level from the first performance is executed as a performance in the specific variable display.

In the gaming machine described in feature ZQ, the specified direction in which the player can press may be a direction in which the player can perform a pressing action so as to increase the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part, and the opposite direction may be a direction in which the player can move part of the player's body away from the operating part.

<Characteristic Zq>
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on a start winning, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-play state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
An operation means operable by a player, the operation means having an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the operation of the player, and the operation means (button operation part 850, operation cover member 870) that can place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not operated;
An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to change the position of the operated part, and controls the position of the operated part to be displaced from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
A display selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects the mode of the variable display (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, a display control means (sub-control board 940) controls the display unit to display the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display,
The display mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to the mode,
The specific variable display is configured to be capable of producing a performance selected from a plurality of types of performances with different expectancies when the operating means is operated during the period,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first control that controls the operation of the operating means so that the operated part can move in the opposite direction at a predetermined moving speed when a predetermined first presentation is executed as a presentation in the specific variable display, and a second control that controls the operation of the operating means so that the operated part can move in the opposite direction at a speed different from the predetermined moving speed when a second presentation having a different expectation level from the first presentation is executed as a presentation in the specific variable display.

A gaming machine described in feature ZQ or feature Zq can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably operating an operating part that can be contacted by a part of the player's body or an operated part that can be operated by the player. That is, in a gaming machine in which a gaming control means generates a special gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state when a predetermined starting condition is met and the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by a lottery means is a predetermined result, when the predetermined starting condition is met, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit is selected by the display selection means, and under the control of the display control means, the variable display according to the selected mode and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are displayed on a display unit that is capable of displaying at least the predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

The operating means also includes an operating part that can be contacted by a part of the player's body and moved in a predetermined direction that the player can press. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operating part in a predetermined neutral position when no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operation means that can be operated by the player includes an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operation means is configured to be able to place the operated part in a predetermined neutral position when the operation means is not being operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operating part or the operated part can be changed. By the control of the operation control means, the position of the operating part or the operated part is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operation means during the period of the variable display according to that mode. The specific variable display is configured so that when the operation means is operated during that period, a presentation selected from a plurality of types of presentations with different degrees of expectation can be made to appear.

In the gaming machine, the operation control means is configured to be capable of executing at least a first control for controlling the operation of the operating means or the operating means so that the operating unit or the operated unit can move in the opposite direction at a predetermined moving speed when a predetermined first performance is executed as a performance in a specific variable display, and a second control for controlling the operation of the operating means or the operating means so that the operating unit or the operated unit can move in the opposite direction at a speed different from the predetermined moving speed when a second performance with a different expectation level from the first performance is executed as a performance in a specific variable display.

As a result, the moving speed of the operating part or operated part moving in the opposite direction can be made different between when the first performance is executed and when the second performance is executed in a specific variable display, providing a gameplay that allows the player to guess the expectation of the performance executed in a specific variable display based on the moving speed of the operating part or operated part.

Note that at least one of the features described in Features 10 to Zq may be applied in combination with one or more of the other features. The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: A gaming machine that comprises a launch operation means operated by the player, a game ball launch means that launches game balls based on the operation of the launch operation means, a passage section that guides the launched game balls to a designated game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the game ball passes through a designated passage section among the various game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine that starts the rotation of a rotating body based on the operation of a start operation means, stops the rotation of the rotating body based on the operation of a stop operation means, and awards a bonus to the player based on the image that appears after the rotation has stopped.

As described above, this invention is suitable for gaming machines such as pinball machines.

100... gaming machine, 479... decorative pattern display device, 611... substrate, 621... decorative pattern, 622... decorative part, 701... pattern, 702... pattern, 703... pattern, 721A... pattern, 721B... pattern, 741A... pattern, 741B... pattern, 741C... pattern, 905... rear setting switch, 907... initialization switch, 920... main control board, 940... sub-control board, 782... light emitting means, 786... decorative lens part, 787... protrusion, 787A... end face, 788... peripheral decorative part, 789... decorative sheet , 790B...reflecting film portion, X1...direct light transmission area, X2...reflected light transmission area, 850...button operation portion, 851...base, 852...operated portion, 853...spring member, 860...operation mechanism, 870...operation cover member, 870B...operation surface, 895...hand rest, 222...front panel, 1622...hold display, 1623...suggestion display, 1625...alternative display, 1701...game machine image, 1702...player image, 1712...performance image, 1712B...left hand, 1713...display information, 1715...performance image

Claims (1)

A lottery means for conducting a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is established;
a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than a normal game state when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine having a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a display control means which controls the display unit to display the specified variable display and the result display when the specified start condition is satisfied, and which controls the display unit to display, when the specified start condition is satisfied, a variable display image including at least a part of the variable display that is displayed when the specified start condition is satisfied or a result display image indicating the lottery result, a gaming machine corresponding image corresponding to the gaming machine on which the player is playing, and a player operation image which uses the gaming machine corresponding image to display the method of operation by the player of the gaming machine in a situation where the variable display image or the result display image is displayed on the display unit.